Revit MEP 2009

Imperial Tutorial

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Creating a Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Secondary Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System . Creating the Primary System Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Primary System Equipment . . . . . . . . . Inspecting and Color Coding the System . . . . . . . . . Creating Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Electrical Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . 26 . 31 . 35 . 39 . 45 . 47 . 47 . 57 . 60 . 63 . 72

Developing Your MEP Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

v

Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. 77 . 88 . 94 . 95

Chapter 4

Mechanical Systems: Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 . 101 . 108 . 112 . 136 . 141 . 148 . 153 . 156 . 160 . 162 . 168 . 185

Chapter 5

Mechanical Systems: Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 . 189 . 196 . 200 . 204 . 217 . 230 . 249 . 252 . 260 . 263

Chapter 6

Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 . 269 . 274 . 280 . 281 . 284 . 284 . 291 . 296 . 303 . 304 . 309 . 314 . 320 . 325 . 331 . 338

Chapter 7

Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 . 344 . 345 . 346

vi | Contents

Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 346 . 352 . 359 . 371 . 376 . 382 . 390 . 398

Chapter 8

Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Placing Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 . 406 . 410 . 432 . 445 . 451 . 458

Chapter 9

Creating Revit MEP Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Modifying Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Fan Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family . Modifying Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Water Closet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . Creating Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Light Fixture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flange Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol Family . . . . . . . . . . . . Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lookup Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 . 470 . 474 . 483 . 488 . 491 . 493 . 498 . 498 . 507 . 518 . 555 . 561 . 561 . 568 . 568 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 571 . 571

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 . 577 . 582 . 589 . 595 . 599 . 599 . 602 . 605 . 607 . 610 . 615 . 615

Contents | vii

Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Chapter 11

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 . 631 . 637 . 641 . 644 . 644 . 649 . 651 . 654 . 656 . 662 . 670 . 673 . 673 . 675 . 678 . 682 . 682 . 684 . 684

Chapter 12

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 . 688 . 692 . 692 . 702 . 704 . 709 . 712 . 713

Chapter 13

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 . 720 . 727 . 731 . 732 . 735 . 737 . 741 . 742 . 742 . 743 . 745

Chapter 14

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 . 761 . 767 . 767 . 769

viii | Contents

Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 769 . 773 . 779 . 779 . 781 . 783 . 784 . 790 . 791 . 791 . 792

Chapter 15

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 Chapter 16 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 . 815 . 823 . 827 . 830 . 830 . 833 . 836 . 836

Chapter 17

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 . 840 . 840 . 844 . 848 . 851 . 856

Chapter 18

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 . 862 . 872 . 879

Chapter 19

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894 . 894 . 903 . 906

Contents | ix

Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 908 . 911 . 911 . 913 . 916 . 918 . 919

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 Chapter 21 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925 . 925 . 927 . 929 . 930 . 933 . 933 . 937 . 939 . 942 . 947 . 949 . 950 . 953 . 953 . 954 . 959 . 961 . 964 . 965 . 967

x | Contents

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix.

3

■ ■

Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. 10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2009?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

Understanding the Basics | 5

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2009 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, walls, windows, doors, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example, windows, doors, and cabinets are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and keynotes are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You

Understanding the Basics | 7

create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories, families, and types.

Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. For example, categories of model elements include walls and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a 30” X 42” title block or a 32" x 84" door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. and View.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. Edit. which are listed on the menu. click (New). the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. you type the required key combination to perform the command. By default. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. In addition. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. While working in the drawing area. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. This creates a new project based on the default template. For example. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. a door type is specified. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. On the left side of the Options Bar. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. When you select the Door tool. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors.the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu.

For example. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . when you add a door. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model.8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. 9 In the Type Selector. You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. In the drawing area. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. ■ The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars.

There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. immediately below the Type Selector.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. containing buttons grouped by function. click the tab in the Design Bar. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. 11 Click OK. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . The respective commands display on the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab.

In the Project Browser. reports. select Views (all).TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . schedules. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. families. sheets. and rename views. and groups. families. delete. and groups of your current project: ■ Right-click in the browser to add. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.

After creating a browser organization scheme. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. elevations. and group name. 3D). Navigating the User Interface | 15 . windows). walls. family category (doors. click Cancel. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. The cursor displays as a pencil. To open a view. Do not click. click Wall. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets.■ The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. double-click its name. The browser is dockable.

it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. click Modify to end the Wall command. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. You can use this tri-pane. When you place the cursor over an element. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. regarding selected elements in a view. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point.In the bottom left corner of the window. Revit MEP 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2009 Help. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). In the status bar." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. 20 Press TAB. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. The status bar also provides information. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. In this case. 18 On the Design Bar. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 3. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. in conjunction with tooltips. There are several tools that help you find information. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . It highlights when the cursor is over it. Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. find a keyword on the Index tab.

you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 17 . Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP In this exercise. In the following steps. There are several ways to access zoom options. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. Tooltips: To see tooltips. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. click on the Standard toolbar. Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials.In addition. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. click Training Files. For example. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. After you are familiar with these tasks. You can also press SHIFT+F1. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Toolbar: From the toolbar. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. Windows: From any window. If no Help button displays. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. press F1 for help. Click the Help button.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. press F1 for context-sensitive help. and then click a specific menu command or button for help.

the view zooms out from the building model. 5 On the View toolbar. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. the view zooms in on the selected area. this is referred to as a crossing selection.The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). When you release the mouse button. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 7 Click in the drawing area. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. In the drawing area. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command.

on the View toolbar. and click the SteeringWheels tab. and click Help. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click Settings menu ➤ Options. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 15 To exit the wheel. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. . click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. press ESC. NOTE As you zoom in and out. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. and then using the Zoom tool again. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. To modify or add snap increments. 10 To display SteeringWheels. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. 13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. moving the wheel to the desired location. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 19 . As you move the mouse. To define settings for SteeringWheels. For more information about SteeringWheels. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool.9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.

expand Floor Plans. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. referred to as shape handles. Small blue dots. Similar controls. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . called drag controls. These are the drag controls. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and on the Tools toolbar. 18 Click and drag the left control. and select the wall. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. 17 Type ZR. expand Views (all). moving the cursor to the left horizontally. click (Move). When drawing or modifying a building model. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. Cnst.Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. as shown. display along the ends. to lengthen the wall. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. bottoms. and double-click 2nd Flr.

and drag it on top of the table. The table moves down.Some commands. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 21 . 23 Click next to the lower wall. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. as shown. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. and click again to specify the ending position. In this case. After selecting the element to move. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 24 Select the plant. such as Move and Copy. for example. click to specify the starting position. you want to move the table closer to the wall.

The table and plant are returned to their original locations. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Press ESC twice. 29 To end the command. click Lines. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. 26 On the Undo menu. Some commands. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Move. All changes you make to a project are tracked. In this example. select the second item in the list. and click again to end it. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. On the Design Bar. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. or press CTRL+Z.Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. on the Standard toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. such as the Lines command. click the Undo command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. click Modify.

Express Workshop 23 .

24 .

secondary supply air systems and a primary. Creating a Supply Air System In this lesson. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. you can create supply. you create a supply air system that consists of 2 low pressure. The systems are used to perform calculations and analysis. Finally. creating the primary supply system. and to place and size ductwork. 25 . you place the variable air volume (VAV) box. When you have finished these tutorials. return. an HVAC system is a logical connection between air terminals and HVAC mechanical equipment. To create Mechanical Supply Air 2. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an MEP project. You then create the main trunk line for Mechanical Supply Air 3 and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. you add and connect the air handler.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit MEP functionality and highlight powerful features that are integral to the most common MEP workflows. you will have a basic understanding of Revit MEP design and documentation tools. and size the ductwork. In Revit MEP. which is the physical representation of the system. and exhaust systems using these components. high pressure system. The model you use in this lesson contains the secondary system Mechanical Supply Air 1. connect it to existing air terminals. After air terminals and mechanical equipment are placed in a model.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. VAV box in the model. the model contains one completed secondary supply air system. click the Mechanical tab. you place a parallel.Creating a Secondary Supply Air System In this exercise. right-click the Design Bar. If necessary. ■ Open the i Express Workshop Supply Air System. The Mechanical commands are displayed. fan-powered. scroll until the folder is displayed. you create the logical system shown above on the left. Display the Mechanical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. In this exercise. creating a secondary supply system. You then define a logical connection between the VAV box and 4 existing air terminals. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. At the beginning of this exercise. click Training Files. 2 If the Mechanical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click Mechanical.

when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. Then. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. Add a VAV box 7 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in.In this tutorial. The entire model displays on the screen. To pan. hold the wheel down and drag. when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. roll the wheel. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region. click Mechanical Equipment. To zoom in and out. In this tutorial. 4 Type ZR. you find the command at the far left of the screen. Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 27 . You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. you can enter ZE to zoom out. The model zooms to the specified area.

11 Click to place the VAV box in the location shown. select Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 3 . the Type Selector displays the mechanical equipment that is pre-loaded in the model. but do not click. click Modify to end the command.Directly above the Design Bar.8 inch Inlet. 9 Move the cursor to the area near the interior door of the room between grid lines 3 and 4. 8 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Design Bar. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The cursor displays as the VAV box outline. 10 Press SPACEBAR once to rotate the VAV box 90 degrees. on the Options Bar.

200000 (20%). ■ 15 Click OK. verify that SupplyAirFlow is set to 900 CFM. This value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the Level 1 ceiling and the Level 2 floor.13 Right-click the VAV box.Airflow. and click Element Properties. After the system is created.) ■ Under Mechanical . this value is automatically updated to reflect the supply airflow requirement. 18 Click to select the air terminal. for Offset. you can enter 10 0 without units. You do not need to enter the units. or just 10. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 29 . indicating that it has been selected. Verify that the PrimaryToSupplyRatio is 0. The air terminal turns red. Create the system 17 Move the cursor over the leftmost supply air terminal in the model to highlight it. enter 10' 0". 14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 19 Move the cursor off the air terminal. This value is built into the family type for the VAV box. 16 Press ESC to clear the selection of the VAV box. This value is built into the family type for the VAV box.

When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected air terminals. The red sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components of the system. move the cursor over the supply air terminal to the right. and click to select it. You have created a secondary supply air system that includes 4 air terminals and a VAV box. 24 Select the VAV box you just placed. the equipment supplying the system. 27 On the Options bar. indicating that they are selected. click (Select Equipment For System).20 While pressing CTRL. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 25 On the Design Bar. Verify the elements of the system 26 Select an air terminal that is an element of the system you just created. click 23 On the Options Bar. The Options Bar displays system information such as the system name. select the 2 supply air terminals to the right. and the number of elements that make up the system. (Create Supply Air System). 21 While pressing CTRL. click Modify to end the command. 22 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. click (Edit System). the air terminals display in red.

28 In the Supply Air : Mechanical Supply Air 2 dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. for Solution Type. the ductwork. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System The model now contains the logical connection for Mechanical Supply Air System 2. click (Layout Path). Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 31 . Specify the layout 1 Select an air terminal in the system you created. In this exercise. The sketch graphics highlight. Next. you leave it unchanged. select Network. click Finish.rvt. In this tutorial. showing the logical connection between the components of the system. 3 On the Options Bar. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. you create the physical connection for the system. Verify the connections between the system elements 29 Move the cursor over an air terminal in the system to highlight it. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you complete the secondary system by adding ductwork. 30 Press TAB. the secondary supply air system shown below on the left. however.Revit MEP automatically named the system Mechanical Supply Air 2. You could change the name by overwriting it. Do not click. 31 Move the cursor off the air terminal.

click Settings. 4 On the Options Bar. which is located to the far left of the drawing area. Verify that Flex Duct Type is set to Flex Duct Round : Flex . 11 On the Design Bar. The layout path settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . ■ ■ ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. Verify that Offset is 10' 0". verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. (Show Next Solution) to display other suggested network 5 Click until the network solution shown below displays. 7 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. click solutions. for Duct Type. thus maintaining the consistency of these systems within the project. and fire protection systems. Verify that Offset is 10' 0". piping. 8 In the right pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. 9 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. Configuring the layout path settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during the project. Verify that the Maximum Flex Duct Length is 2’ 0”. click Finish Layout. plumbing. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected.A network layout solution displays with main segments in blue and branch segments in green. for Duct Type.Round. select Branch. Specify the layout path settings 6 On the Options Bar. select Main. 10 Click OK.

15 Press TAB again to highlight the next level of connections. A disconnection will negatively impact calculations involving this system.Revit MEP automatically creates and initially sizes all of the ducts and fittings required to connect the components of the system. Select Ducts. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 33 . Click Check None. Revit MEP supports 4 of the most common sizing methods: Friction. 18 On the Options Bar. Select Flex Ducts. or click in an empty part of the drawing area. 16 Press TAB until the entire hierarchy of connected ducts.08 in-wg/100ft. and type SD. click View menu ➤ Shading with Edges. Size the duct system 21 On the Options Bar. click Sizing. Check the connectivity of the system You can check the connectivity of ducts and fittings using the TAB key. 22 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ Under Sizing Method. 20 Click OK. Do not click. Velocity. the system has not been created properly. Select Duct Fittings. and Static Regain. click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). and equipment is highlighted. select Friction. 17 Click to select the highlighted system. 14 Press TAB. You will use TAB to examine the hierarchy of the system components. and enter . Equal Friction. If the entire network does not highlight. 12 If the ductwork displays in wireframe instead of with shading. 13 Highlight a segment of the newly created ductwork by moving the cursor over it. and a disconnection exists at the point where the highlighting stops. fittings. The branch to which the duct is connected highlights.

In the Element Properties dialog. 36 On the Options Bar. Verify the calculated airflow value for the VAV box. for Branch Sizing. 29 Press ESC to clear the selection. 38 Press ESC to clear the selection. under Mechanical .08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. 28 Click OK.Airflow. scroll to Mechanical . 23 Click OK. The ductwork is sized using the friction method at . 32 In the Element Properties dialog. you create the ductwork for the primary system and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. Under Constraints. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . the adjusted SupplyAirFlow value of 625 CFM for the VAV reflects the supply airflow values calculated for the system. select the segment of duct shown. click (Element Properties). The ductwork is automatically updated with all the necessary fittings. The Flow value of 300 CFM is the sum of the 2 air terminals. click (Element Properties). 33 Click OK. 34 Press ESC to clear the selection. scroll to Mechanical . 35 Select the VAV box in the system. 26 On the Options Bar. The Flow value of 150 CFM matches the required flow for the air terminal.Airflow.■ ■ Verify that Only is selected. click Modify to end the command.Airflow. Next. 24 On the Design Bar. 31 On the Options Bar. Verify the sizing 25 In the system you created. select Calculated Size Only. 30 Select the segment of duct shown. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). 37 Click OK.

click near the door in the room to the left of the secondary systems. in the location shown by the pencil. select Round Duct : Taps. and click to place the second segment of ductwork and end the run. ■ The cursor displays as a pencil. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 35 . select 10' 0". Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. 2 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector.Creating the Primary System Ductwork In this exercise. click Duct. 5 Move the cursor past the rightmost VAV. you create the main trunk line for the primary system and connect the 2 secondary systems. This specifies the duct diameter. 4 Click in the location shown to end the first segment of ductwork. Create the primary air duct 1 On the Design Bar.rvt. For Offset. For D:. 3 To start the duct run. select 12".

36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The ductwork and the proper fittings are automatically created. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. Add an end cap Before you size the ductwork for a system. 10 In the Type Selector. The model is zoomed to the end of the duct. 8 Type ZR. 9 On the Design Bar. Draw the main trunk line again. 11 Place the cursor over the end of the duct to display an endpoint snap point. ■ ■ Click again to undo to first section of duct. and specify a zoom region at the end of the trunk line. click Duct Fitting. you must place end caps on all open ends of the ductwork except for the end that connects to the air source. as described above. This determines airflow direction and ensures accurate duct sizing. click (Undo) to undo the last segment of duct. 7 If your trunk line does not match the above illustration and you want to draw it again. do the following: ■ On the toolbar above the Options Bar.6 Press ESC twice to end the command.

13 Click to place the end cap. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 37 . 14 On the Design Bar. First.12 Press TAB until the point snap graphic shown below displays. the type of snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bat at the lower-left corner of the screen. This connects the end cap to the ductwork. Connect one secondary system You will use 2 methods of drawing a duct from a VAV box to the trunk line. 18 In the Select Connector dialog. closing the right end of the duct run. 17 On the Options Bar. 15 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. you use the Connect Into tool to automatically draw the duct. (Connect Into). click Modify to end the command. 16 Select the leftmost VAV. 20 Select the primary air duct. In addition to the graphic at the cursor. click 19 Click OK. select Connector 0 : Supply Air: Round : 8" Primary Air Connector.

23 Right-click the 8” inlet supply connector. you manually draw the connecting duct.Ductwork is automatically created to connect the VAV to the primary air flow supply with a tap connection. 22 Select the VAV box. Connect the other secondary system Next. and click Draw Duct. 21 Type ZR. and zoom in on the rightmost VAV box. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

i Express Workshop Supply Air System. click Modify to end the command.rvt. 2 In the Type Selector. primary system. 26 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. Do not click. 3 Move the cursor to the location shown. Place the air handler 1 On the Design Bar.24 Click on the center of the primary duct in the location where the intersection snap (an X) displays. Adding the Primary System Equipment In this exercise. Next. 25 On the Design Bar. select Air Handler : 10 ton. click Mechanical Equipment. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The ductwork is created with a tap connection. Adding the Primary System Equipment | 39 . you add and connect the air handler for the primary system. you place an air handler and connect it to the main trunk line to complete the high pressure.

Create a vertical section of duct 8 Move the cursor over an edge of the air handler to highlight it.The cursor displays as the air handler outline. 4 Press SPACE BAR as needed to rotate the air handler 90 degrees. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Do not click. 6 Click to place the air handler. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 5 Move the air handler to the location shown.

are also visible. select 10' 0". 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector.9 Click to select the air handler. These are the connectors for the air handler supply. 11 Right-click the connector. intake. for the hydronic supply and return. click (Apply Current Offset). and exhaust. and click Draw Duct. return. ■ Adding the Primary System Equipment | 41 . The connectors on the front of the unit. The connectors on the top of the unit are displayed. Under Offset. 10 Move the cursor over the 24" x 24" supply connector. select Rectangular Duct/Radius Elbows Tees. On the Options Bar.

and click Draw Duct. The vertical section of duct you just created is visible. 18 Right-click the center point of the duct. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . past the end of the primary duct. 19 Move the cursor to the right.A vertical section of duct is created. expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. which is located directly to the left of the drawing area. 13 Press ESC. and click. 15 Double-click 3D HVAC. Attach a rectangular duct 17 Select the vertical duct you just created. 16 Close the 3D HVAC view. 14 In the Project Browser.

(Select Equipment for System). Create the main system logical connection 21 While pressing CTRL. 22 On the Options bar: ■ Click Click (Create Supply Air System). click (Element Properties). Adding the Primary System Equipment | 43 . select the leftmost VAV box. 24 Press ESC.20 Press ESC twice to end the command. 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the air handler. The sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components. and then select the rightmost VAV box. ■ 23 Select the air handler.

click Modify to end the command. 31 Select the 24" x 24" rectangular supply duct by clicking a point on the duct between the air handler and the primary trunk line. 35 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Options Bar. 33 On the Design Bar. Connect the ductwork 29 On the Tools toolbar located above the Options Bar. View the system components 38 On the Design Bar. under Mechanical . the value for SupplyAirFlow has been updated based upon the primary to supply ratio you specified in the element properties of the 2 VAV boxes. click (Trim/Extend).815 CFM. 37 Press ESC to clear the selection. 32 Select the primary 12" round duct. 28 Click in an empty part of the drawing area to clear the selection. 27 Click OK. 34 Select the air handler.In the Element Properties dialog. The ducts are trimmed and connected with the proper fittings. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Airflow. under Mechanical . click System Browser.Airflow. notice that the value for SupplyAirFlow is 32. click (Element Properties). 36 Click OK. verify that (Trim/Extend to Corner) is selected. This is the capacity of the air handler. In the Element Properties dialog.

The browser displays 3 mechanical systems: the primary system that you just created. 2 Select a section of a secondary system. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model. Inspecting and Color Coding the System In this exercise.The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. you inspect the system and color code the ductwork. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. and double-click 3D HVAC. Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. 40 Expand any Supply Air system to view its HVAC components.rvt. the secondary system that you created in an earlier exercise. Inspecting and Color Coding the System | 45 . You then add a legend to automatically color code the ductwork based on specific calculated values. expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. close the System Browser. 39 In the System Browser. click (System Inspect). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and the secondary system that was already in the model when you opened it. expand Mechanical (3 systems). Elements are listed by the system they belong to. Next. you inspect part of the system you created. 41 When you are done. Inspect the completed supply air system 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar.

static pressure. The flow arrows indicate flow direction. visual indication of a system’s air flow. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. including flow. select Duct Color Fill . 4 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. The legend is added and the ductwork is automatically color coded based on the actual flow values. Delete the legend and remove color coding from the ductwork 12 Select the legend. 8 On the Design Bar. click Cancel Inspector. 9 Click in the drawing area to place the legend to the left of the air handler. the other systems are displayed in half tone. 6 On the Design Bar. click Inspect. 10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Flow. and pressure loss. the red arrows indicate critical flow path. under Color Scheme. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 5 Move the cursor over a section of the system. The inspection tag describes the section that is being inspected.The selected system maintains its appearance. 7 Close the 3D HVAC view. Place a legend and color code the ductwork Color coding the ductwork provides a quick.

14 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. One circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on one side of a room in the model. and insulation type). temperature rating. The legend remains selected. junction boxes. The color is removed from the ductwork. including power panels. As you create circuits. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. 18 When prompted to save the model. distribution systems. and demand factors have been defined. You then automatically balance the electrical loads on a panelboard. voltage definitions. junction boxes. Creating Electrical Systems | 47 . and switches. select none. lighting fixtures. and the color scheme is removed from the legend. Wiring types (including material. Creating a Supply Air System. click No. After creating the logical connections. power circuits. receptacles. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. click 15 Click OK. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. The model already contains the electrical components you use to create the systems. 16 On the Standard toolbar at the top of the window. Creating Lighting Circuits In this exercise. under Schemes. you create the physical connections between the components: the wiring. Creating Electrical Systems In this lesson. click 17 Click File menu ➤ Close.13 On the Options Bar. Electrical settings have already been specified for the model. (Delete) to delete the legend. you create 2 lighting circuits using lighting fixtures. . the other circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on the other side of the room. and a 480V panelboard that have already been placed in the model. You use the System Browser to view the created circuits. Revit MEP ensures that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems.

when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar. and click Electrical. right-click the Design Bar. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Training Files. Display the Electrical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. The Electrical commands are displayed. ■ Open the i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. you find the command at the far left of the screen.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. If necessary. 2 If the Electrical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. scroll until the folder is displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Electrical tab. In this tutorial.

The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. The entire model displays on the screen. roll the wheel. The model zooms to the specified area. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. In this tutorial. To zoom in and out. To pan. you can enter ZE to zoom out. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. hold the wheel down and drag. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region. Creating Lighting Circuits | 49 . when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. Create a lighting circuit 7 Move the cursor over the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the large room in the model. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. 4 Type ZR. Then.

indicating that they are selected.The lighting fixture highlights. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select the 2 lighting fixtures that are located immediately to the right of the previously selected 2 lighting fixtures. they display in red. indicating that it has been selected. When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected lighting fixtures. move the cursor over the lighting fixture below the selected lighting fixture. The lighting fixture turns red. 9 Move the cursor off the lighting fixture. 8 Click to select the lighting fixture. and click to select it. 11 While pressing CTRL. 10 While pressing CTRL.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. click 14 Select lighting panel LP-1. which is the logical connection between the elements. click (Create Power Circuit). The red sketch graphics show the created circuit. 13 On the Options Bar.12 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). Creating Lighting Circuits | 51 .

Create a second lighting circuit 16 Place the cursor above and to the left of the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .15 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. and then drag diagonally to create a selection window that includes all 4 lighting fixtures as shown. all the elements within the window are selected. 17 When you release the mouse button.

click 23 Select lighting panel LP-1. The sketch graphics show the created circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits | 53 . click (Create Power Circuit). Click OK. which is the logical connection between the elements. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). Click Check None. click the junction box located among the lighting fixtures to select it. The lighting fixtures remain selected. 20 While pressing CTRL. 21 On the Options Bar.18 On the Options Bar. Select Lighting Fixtures. click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 22 On the Options Bar.

you have created 2 lighting circuits. 25 Move the cursor over a lighting fixture in the leftmost circuit so that the lighting fixture highlights. Do not click. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The components include the 4 lighting fixtures and the junction box. 24 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. Modify a circuit At this point. 26 Press TAB to display the circuit.The sketch graphics show the logical circuit with a home run.

click (Add To Circuit). Verify the modified circuit 32 Highlight the junction box in the circuit and press TAB. Creating Lighting Circuits | 55 . 29 In the Power : 1 dialog. 31 In the Power : 1 dialog. 28 On the Options Bar.The circuit includes 4 lighting fixtures. 27 Click to select the highlighted circuit. 30 Select the junction box located among the lighting fixtures. click (Edit Circuit). click Finish.

are created.The modified circuit is highlighted. the wiring. 34 Select lighting panel LP-1. 33 Move the cursor away from the circuit to remove the highlighting. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model. The circuits become visible when the physical connections. and you can view the system components using the System Browser. Elements are listed by the system they belong to. only the logical connections between the elements exist. At this point. click System Browser. Display the electrical systems The lighting circuits you created are called electrical systems in Revit MEP. 36 In the System Browser. close the System Browser. Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. Next. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . You can display the logical connections using the TAB key. you assign switches to control the lighting fixtures. 37 Expand the 2 circuits to view their electrical components. The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. 38 When you are done. 35 On the Design Bar. expand Electrical (7 Systems) ➤ Power ➤ LP-1.

click (Edit Switch System). Creating Switch Systems | 57 . Create a switch system 1 Select the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the room. (Select Switch).rvt. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. The sketch graphics show the only currently selected component of the system. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. you create switch systems to define switching behavior. click (Create Switch System). The switches have already been placed in the model. and the 4 lighting fixtures on the right are controlled by another switch. 2 On the Options Bar. click 5 Select the switch as shown.Creating Switch Systems In this exercise. The 4 lighting fixtures on the left of the room are controlled by one switch. 4 In the Switch System dialog. All elements in the drawing except the selected lighting fixture display in halftone.

click (Add to System). 13 Press TAB. 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . enter A. The identifier A is assigned to the switch for reference purposes. 11 In the Switch System (A) dialog. and the lighting fixture displays in full tone in the drawing area.The Options Bar displays the selected switch and the number of lighting fixtures currently selected (1). click (Switch Properties). Verify the switch system 12 Move the cursor over the switch to highlight it. click Finish. 6 In the Switch System dialog. under Electrical . 9 In the Element Properties dialog. The switch system highlights. 7 One by one. for Switch ID. the Number of Fixtures count on the Options Bar is updated.Lighting. Assign an identifier to the switch 8 In the Switch System dialog. 10 Click OK. select the 3 remaining lighting fixtures on the left side of the room. As you select each lighting fixture.

14 Move the cursor away from the switch system to remove the highlighting. The identifier B is assigned to the switch for reference purposes. click (Create Switch System). Click Check None. 18 On the Options Bar. click 17 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Lighting Fixtures. under Electrical . (Select Switch). 25 In the Switch System (B) dialog. Creating Switch Systems | 59 .Lighting. Create a second switch system 15 Drag to draw a selection window that includes the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. Assign an identifier to the switch 22 In the Switch System dialog. click Finish. Click OK. click (Switch Properties). The 4 lighting fixtures remain selected. for Switch ID. 24 Click OK. (Edit Switch System). enter B. 20 In the Switch System dialog. The selection is filtered. click 19 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. click 21 Select the switch as shown.

clear Leader. you define lighting fixture types and tag the lighting fixtures. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.Verify the switch system 26 Move the cursor over the switch and press TAB to highlight the switch system. 3 Select the upper-left lighting fixture. Tagging Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. you define the lighting fixture types for the room. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. The lighting fixture is labeled with an automatically generated tag. click Tag ➤ By Category. you add a tag to each lighting fixture that identifies its type and the switch that controls it. Then. so each side of the room requires a different lighting fixture type. Tag the lighting fixtures 1 On the Design Bar. The lighting requirements for the left side of the room are different from the lighting requirements for the right side of the room.rvt. Next. 2 On the Options Bar. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

9 In the Type Properties dialog. The top part of the tag displays the identifier for the lighting fixture type. 14 Press ESC to clear the selection.The bottom part of the tag displays the identifier (A) for the switch that controls the lighting fixture. which you have not yet defined. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. Tagging Lighting Fixtures | 61 . click Edit/New. 4 One by one. select the remaining 7 lighting fixtures in the room. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. enter A. Click OK. under Identity Data. 5 Press ESC to end the command. 10 In the Name dialog: ■ ■ Enter 2x4 3Lamp A. The selected lighting fixtures are tagged. click Duplicate. click OK. Create a new lighting fixture type 6 Select the upper-left lighting fixture. for Type Mark. 12 Click OK. select (Element Properties).

and the tag is updated.Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp A) is automatically updated to display type mark A. 18 Press ESC twice to end the command. click (Match Type). 20 On the Options Bar. 17 Select the other 3 lighting fixtures on the left side of the room. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . For each lighting fixture. 16 Select the lighting fixture shown to specify the lighting fixture type to be matched. in the Type Selector. The 4 selected lighting fixtures are changed to the specified type. The cursor displays as an eyedropper. the type is changed. Change the type for some lighting fixtures 15 On the Tools toolbar. and their tags are automatically updated.Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp B.The top part of the tag for the lighting fixture with the new type (Troffer Corner Insert . select the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. Change the type for the remaining lighting fixtures 19 While pressing CTRL. select Troffer Corner Insert .

Creating Power Circuits In this exercise. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. you create electrical circuits with wiring. while the other connects the 8 receptacles in the adjoining large room. Next. Turn off the tags 22 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 23 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. The lighting fixture tags are no longer displayed in the model. You then connect the 2 circuits to create a multi-circuit home run.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. 25 Click OK. scroll to Lighting Fixture Tags. 24 Clear Lighting Fixture Tags.rvt. Creating Power Circuits | 63 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. on the Annotation Categories tab. you use electrical receptacles and a 208 volt panelboard that have already been placed in the model to create 2 electrical circuits with arc type wiring. select the 2 receptacles in the small room. One circuit connects 2 electrical receptacles in a small room. Create a power circuit with wiring 1 While holding down CTRL.

(Select a Panel for the Circuit). click 4 Select power panel PP-1. The sketch graphics show the logical created circuit. 3 On the Options Bar. The sketch graphics show the created circuit home run. click (Create Power Circuit). 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .2 On the Options Bar.

The circuit wiring with a homerun is created. 6 Press ESC to clear the selection. You can also specify the zoom region by clicking in one corner and dragging to the other corner. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom to Region command. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. Creating Power Circuits | 65 .5 In the drawing area near the created circuit. View conductor information 7 Type ZR. 8 Click to specify the upper-left and lower-right corners of the zoom region shown. click as shown to create arc type wiring.

Loads. 13 Press ESC to clear the selection. 12 Click OK. The tick marks indicate the number of conductors (3) for the wire. 14 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. Create a second circuit with wiring 15 In the large room. 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click (Element Properties). and ground). 10 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. neutral. verify the number of conductors of each type (hot.9 Select the wire shown. under Electrical . select the receptacle as shown.

16 While pressing CTRL. select the remaining receptacles in the large room. 17 On the Options Bar. for a total of 8 receptacles. Creating Power Circuits | 67 . click 19 Select power panel PP-1. The sketch graphics show the circuit and home run. The sketch graphics show the circuit. 18 On the Options Bar. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). click (Create Power Circuit).

20 In the drawing area near the created circuit. 68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click as shown to create arc type wiring. The circuit wiring with a homerun is created. The single arrow at the end of the home run wire indicates a single-circuit home run.

and click Delete. 24 Type ZR. 25 On the Design Bar. The wire is deleted. Creating Power Circuits | 69 . and zoom in on the region shown. Rewire a circuit 22 Select the home run wire for the small circuit.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. The cursor displays as a pencil with arc type wiring. 23 Right-click. click Wire.

press TAB until the graphic displays. 29 With the point snap graphic displayed. 28 Move the cursor to the location shown. click to place the end of the wire. 27 With the point snap graphic displayed. If the cursor is positioned as shown. In addition to the graphic in the drawing. click to place the end of the wire. The cursor is correctly positioned when the point snap graphic displays. If the cursor is positioned as shown. the displayed snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bar at the lower-left corner of the screen.26 Move the cursor to the location shown. but the point snap graphic is not displayed. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . press TAB until the graphic displays. but the point snap graphic is not displayed.

click Tag ➤ By Category. 34 Highlight a wire in the small circuit as shown. select Leader. click Modify to end the command. 33 On the Options Bar. The 2 arrows on the large circuit home run indicate that it is now a multi-circuit home run. Creating Power Circuits | 71 . creating a multi-circuit home run.The two circuits are automatically connected. Tag the wires 32 On the Design Bar. View the multi-circuit home run 31 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. 30 On the Design Bar. The wires in the circuit have been automatically resized to accommodate the demand created by the new multi-circuit home run.

which is located directly to the left of the drawing area. 38 On the Design Bar. Balancing Electrical Loads In this exercise. you view the panel schedule report for panelboard PP-1 and balance the electrical loads on this panel. 3 In the Project Browser. The temporary label shows the 2 circuits (5 and 6) and the power panel name (PP-1). 37 Click to place the label. you balance the electrical loads on panelboard PP-1. click Modify to end the command. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .The temporary label shows the circuit the circuit number (5) and the power panel name (PP-1). 35 Click to place the label. click (Panel Schedule Report).rvt. The Panel Schedule Report view opens. scroll down as needed. and expand Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. View the panel schedule report 1 Select power panel PP-1. Next. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. 2 On the Options Bar. PP-1 is highlighted to show that it is the currently displayed view. 36 Highlight a wire in the large circuit as shown. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

12 Click OK. Balance the loads on the panel 9 Select power panel PP-1. right-click PP-1. click Rebalance Loads. (Edit Circuits on Panel). All the circuits connected to the panel are listed. click The Edit Circuits dialog displays. and click Properties. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 6 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog. under Panel Schedule. for Appearance on Sheet. The loads are balanced across each phase. are shown. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. Balancing Electrical Loads | 73 .4 In the Project Browser. and C. click OK. 8 Close the Panel Schedule Report view. A. and the current loads on phases. and the circuit structure is automatically reorganized. click Edit. B. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.

You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Electrical Systems.The reorganized circuit structure is reflected in the wire labels. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. click No. 74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 14 When prompted to save the model.

Developing Your MEP Designs 75 .

76 .

you plan the system by first placing spaces in the building. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. In this exercise. you place spaces in the areas of the building model.Mechanical Systems 3 In this tutorial. as most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. After finishing each exercise.autodesk. As you create the mechanical system. you can choose to save your work. you first carefully plan the system. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. go to http://www. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a plenum level and place various types of spaces. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spacial environment. you configure the linked architectural model. After applying a color scheme to the zones. This information is used for heating and cooling load analysis. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. At the end of this tutorial. First. In this lesson. By following the recommended workflow. you design a mechanical system for an office building. and contain information about the locations in which they are placed. as with any design project. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. 77 .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you perform a heating and cooling load analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. Planning Mechanical Systems To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. methodology. If the tutorial datasets are not present. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2009. This system consists of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. you will understand the process. However. Then.

This makes the architectural components (such as walls and floors) room-bounding so that they are recognized as boundaries for spaces. NOTE When working with a linked file. The Status Bar located below the Design Bar and a tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and after the linked model highlights. Open the i Spaces. and click OK twice. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model.■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. not in the MEP dataset. The linked model is configured.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. The level 1 floor plan of the linked model displays. expand Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click East . Next. right-click. make certain that the roof is defined as room-bounding. click the Training Files icon. click Modify. click Edit/New. The elevation view opens. and click Element Properties. Configure the linked model The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and that the ceiling is defined as non room-bounding. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels to place spaces in the plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor) of the building. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 1 Mech. These components are defined in the architectural dataset. select Room Bounding. In this section. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design bar. 6 In the Project Browser. you add a level for plenums. 1 In the Project Browser. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 78 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 4 In the Type Properties dialog. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to achieve an accurate heating and cooling load analysis.Mech.

■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK twice. For Cut plane. verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. enter Level 1 Plenum for View Name. click Yes. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. Under View Depth. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 7 is created. and enter an Offset value of 0 0. and click Edit for View Range. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Identity Data. If asked to rename the corresponding level and views. verify that Level : Plenum is selected. ■ 10 Draw a plenum level 8' 6" above Level 1. Scroll down to the Extents category. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Level 7. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Draw) is selected. and click OK.7 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. enter an Offset of 1' 0" For Bottom. select Level Above (Level 2). and in the Plan View Types dialog clear Ceiling Plan. 8 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Project Browser. Click Plan View Types. For Offset. and press ENTER. for Top. verify that 0' 0" is specified. In the View Range dialog. click Level. Placing Spaces | 79 . and its listed in the Project Browser under Mechanical ➤ ???. verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. for Level. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and click Properties. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select HVAC for Sub Discipline.

Mech view is not maximized or the elevation view was closed. The Space box contains all unplaced spaces (spaces that were placed in unbounded areas). 16 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ 19 Place the cursor in the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements. For Upper Limit. New indicates that a new space is being placed.Mech. and zoom the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building. the 1 . 15 Use the mouse scroll wheel. 14 Click Windows menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows to close the elevation view. and maximize the window. In the Space box. For Offset. verify that New is selected. 18 On the Options Bar. If Close Hidden Windows is unavailable. under Floor Plans. enter 0' 0" . The Space tool is also on MEP-specific Design Bar tabs. Verify that Leader is cleared. select Level 1 Plenum. Verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box. click Space. double-click 1 . 17 Verify that Space Tag is selected in the Type Selector. Notice that the level is renamed in the elevation view. Place a space in an office area and in an open area 13 In the Project Browser. This action specifies the vertical extent of the space. 80 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .The Level 1 Plenum floor plan is now listed under HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.

21 With the Space tool open. TIP You can also right-click in the drawing area. and after the space snaps to the room-bounding elements. This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area. Only the space tag displays because the visibility for the interior fill and reference lines is not activated. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.20 Click to place the space. and click Zoom to Fit. Make certain that you place the space to the center-right of the open space as shown. Later in the exercise. you will separate the open space near the entrance and place a space there. Placing Spaces | 81 . click to place a space as shown. You activate this visibility later in this exercise. 22 Move the cursor to the large open area in the center of the floor plan.

you rename the 2 spaces. 82 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Next. 24 Zoom in on the space tag in the upper left hand corner office.23 Click Modify. A text box appears. 25 Click the space tag name.

28 With the view active. and press ENTER. Reference displays space reference lines (cross hairs). enter 101 in the text box. you activate spaces visibility.Enter Office. 29 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. and select Color Fill. 27 Repeat this method. enter VG on the keyboard. The 2 spaces display in the floor plan view. 26 Double-click the space tag number. expand Spaces. and Reference. The Interior option displays space shading. and click in the drawing area. Open 104. 30 Click OK. Color Fill displays space color fill when it is applied. Interior. and rename the space in the open area. You apply color fill to spaces in a later exercise. Placing Spaces | 83 . Next.

The entrance area is bound only by the radius wall—this area is considered semi-bounded. and draw a zoom region around the upper-corner of the radius wall as shown. 33 On the Options Bar. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. verify that 0' 0" is specified.Mech view active. you need to make this area fully-bounded by drawing space separation lines. 31 With the 1 . and (Line) are selected. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Draw). 32 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. For Offset.Place a space in the entrance area You need to place a space in the area next to the building entrance becaue this entrance area will be heated and cooled more often than the rest of the open space. enter ZR. To place a space in the entrance area. Chain. 84 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . and click Mechanical. click Space Separation. right-click the Design Bar.

40 Press ESC twice to close the Draw tool. and after the end point snap displays. 35 Use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom out the view. and drag it to the larger open area. click Move to Space. click to specify the start point for the first space separation line segment. and after the end point snap displays. Notice that the Open 104 space adjusted its boundaries so that it is not in the new area. 38 Draw the line down 32' 0". 37 Move the cursor to the right to draw a horizontal line 32' 0". The Draw tool remains open. 36 Draw the line up. Placing Spaces | 85 . and type 4' 0" (notice the text entry box called a dimension listener that pops up). and click to specify the end point of the third line segment. click to specify the end point for the last line segment. NOTE If the space or the space tag is inside the smaller area. select and drag both of them. select the space (reference line) or the space tag. If you see a warning that the space tag is outside of its space. 34 Place the cursor over the upper-corner of the radius wall.■ Verify that Radius is cleared. and click to specify the end point for the second line segment. 39 Move the cursor to the left 4' 0" (which is located over the lower-end of the radius wall). If the space and space tag are inside the new area. and press ENTER to specify the end point for the first line segment. The space separation line created a new fully-bounded area within the large open area.

do the following: ■ ■ For Number. 42 On the Options Bar. you place a space in the entrance area. verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box. After the areas are separated. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. select Level 1 Plenum for Upper Limit. spaces can be placed in them. enter Entrance. click Space. and verify that New is slected in the Space box. after the space reference lines highlight. 86 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .NOTE Space separation lines are MEP-specific room-bounding lines that separate areas where a wall is not desired or not possible. Although room separation lines are recognized in Revit MEP. 45 Place the cursor over the space. under Identity Data. For Name. enter 121. verify that Leader is cleared. 43 Place a space in the entrance area. enter 0 0 for Offset. 41 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 44 Click Modify. space separation lines are not recognized in Revit Architecture. right-click and click Element Properties.

53 Rename the space. 57 Place the cursor in the plenum area. Place a space in a plenum area 54 In the Project Browser. 52 Press Esc. click Space. click Space. The plenum space displays in the floor plan view. 50 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1 Plenum. and click to place a space. Chase 118. and select Interior and Reference. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. under Floor Plans. The offset places the space 2 feet above the roof. select Level 2 for Upper Limit. and enter 2 0 for Offset. Place a space in a chase area 48 Zoom in on the chase that is located to the right of the Mechanical room. Placing Spaces | 87 . 55 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 60 Click OK. This is because the walls prevent space placement. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. and enter 0 0 for Offset. expand Spaces. 59 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The space is renamed Entrance 121. 49 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.47 Click OK. 58 With the Level 1 Plenum view active. 56 On the Options Bar. Roof is specified for the upper limit because the chase area spans multiple levels and ends at the roof level. select Roof for Upper Limit. 51 Place a space in the chase area. Notice that the plenum space is not in the mechanical room or in the stairwell.

click System Browser.Mech to make it the active view. enter Spaces Training for File name. 2 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 62 In the Save As dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. Otherwise. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. navigate to the folder of your choice. you modified the spaces visibility for the views. that action removes the space from the Default zone. In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. 88 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Open the i Zones. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Finally. click File menu ➤ Save. click the Training Files icon. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. You used space separation lines to create a new fully-bounded area that was part of a larger area. Creating Zones After spaces are placed in the building.61 If you want to save your work. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. close the file. you can choose to save your work. you assign spaces to zones in the building. Zones allow you to control the spacial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and click Save. However.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you add spaces to zones in order to control the spacial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and verify the zones in the System Browser. You can click Reference under Spaces on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display space reference lines. and double-click 1 . NOTE After finishing each exercise. When you add a space to a zone.

4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. As you do this. This removes the space from the Default zone. and a new zone is created. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. and modify the zone properties. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. click Zone. Creating Zones | 89 . and click View ➤ Zones. This is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. NOTE The Zone toolbar provides zone tools and information. Next. 3 Right-click in Systems Browser. Using the Zone toolbar. you assign spaces to a zone. The title bar displays the name of the new zone. the Zone toolbar displays. After a space is placed in an area. The Zone tool opens. 6 On the Zone toolbar. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. place the cursor on Office 101 located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space highlights. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone.NOTE You can also press F9 (with the drawing area active) or click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. Assign a zone to spaces on the same level 5 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. You work with one zone until you click Finish. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 7 In the drawing area. it is automatically added to the Default zone. verify that (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected.

West Offices. 10 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. 90 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .8 Click the space to add it to the zone. Next. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. To view the zone in the drawing area. expand the new zone and notice that the Office 101 space is added to it and removed from the Default zone. under Identity Data. The new zone displays. 9 With the drawing area active. In the System Browser. 12 On the Zone toolbar. add the Office 102 and Office 103 spaces to the zone. you need to activate the zone visibility which you do next. click (Zone Properties). you rename the zone.West Offices zone in the System Browser to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. expand HVAC Zones. 14 Expand the 1 . enter VG. and click OK. and click OK. Notice that the zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. TIP You can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. for Name enter 1 . The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser. 11 With the Zone toolbar open.

Mech floor plan. 25 With the Zone toolbar open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 26 Add the L1 Plenum 122 space to the zone. Creating Zones | 91 . click in the Level 1 Plenum view to make it active. 22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.15 On the Zone toolbar. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. verify that ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. Next. expand HVAC Zones. you activate zones visibility for the view. 21 Zoom in on each floor plan. and click OK. 19 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan: 1 . 23 On the Zone toolbar. click Zone. Assign a zone for spaces on different levels 16 In the Project Browser. enter VG. 17 With the drawing area active. click Finish. and double-click Level 1 Plenum to open the view. add the following level 1 spaces to the zone: Open 104 Men’s Room 105 Mech/Elec 106 Ladies Room 107. click Finish. 20 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.Mech to make it the active view. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. 27 On the Zone toolbar. 24 On the 1 .

select the reference line to the zone that you created. However. enter 1 . 29 On the Options Bar. you cannot open the Zone tool as this will create a new zone. click Edit Zone.You need to rename the zone. under Identity Data. Notice that the Zone toolbar displays the name of the zone that you are editing. click (Zone Properties). 92 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . and click OK. 28 In either view. TIP You can also access zone properties by right-clicking the zone in the System Browser.Open Offices. and click Properties. you edit the zone to rename it. for Name. The Zone tool opens. Next. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 On the Zone toolbar.

You can expand the 1 . 212 Lounge 208.West Offices Stairwells 2 . Spaces Offices 111. close the file. proceed to the next step. 35 In the Save As dialog. All zones will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise. 109. enter Zones Training for File name. 120 Zones 1 . L1 Plenum 122 Offices 115. use the methods that you learned and assign zones for all the spaces in the building.Conference Room 2 . and click Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. 113 Entrance 121 Offices 108. 211. Men’s Room 105. 216 Offices 201.East Offices 2 . 119. 203 Chases 118. Men’s Room 205.East Offices 1 . Elec/Mech 206. Complete the zones for the building 33 For additional practice. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and Creating Zones | 93 . 117 Offices 101. click Finish. 110 Open 104. 32 On the Zone toolbar. 202. 213 Conference 214 Offices 210.North Offices 2 . Ladies’ Room 107. you assigned zones to the spaces that were on the same level and on different levels of the building. 116. Ladies Room 207. Make certain that you verify the spaces in the floor plan views and in the System Browser If you prefer not to continue with this practice. You activated zone visibility in the views. click File menu ➤ Save.West Offices Chases 34 If you want to save your work. 103 Stairwells 114. The table below lists all spaces and the zones.Open Offices 2 . L2 Plenum 217 Offices 215.North Offices 1 .South Offices 2 . 112. In this exercise.Entrance 1 . Elec/Mech 106. Otherwise.The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser.Open Offices 1 . Office 209 Open 204.Open Offices zone in the System Browser to view the 5 spaces in it.South Offices 1 . 102.

2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. NOTE All zone reference lines and shading have been hidden in this dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 94 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .Mech view. verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected. and click Drafting. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. click Color Scheme Legend. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select HVAC Zones for Space Type. Apply the color scheme 5 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view. The color scheme is applied to the zones in the 1 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the i Zone Color Scheme.in the System Browser. The zones are also listed in the System Browser. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise. You can click Reference Lines and Interior Fill under HVAC Zones on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display zone reference lines and shading. and click to place the legend. and double-click 1 .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. 6 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. click the Training Files icon. In the next exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar.Mech to make it the active view. right-click the Design Bar. you assign a color scheme to these zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system. Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using space schedules or accessing element properties. 7 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. Verify that Schema 1 is selected for Color Scheme. you apply a color scheme to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. 4 In the Type Selector.

space. and click OK. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. NH for City.8 For additional practice. enter 03101. use the method that you learned and add a color scheme for the zones on the 2 . 10 In the Save As dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 95 . and view the loads report. Specify Project Settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Office is specified for Building Type. click File menu ➤ Save As. and view the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. proceed to the next step. click the Training Files icon. 2 In the Element Properties dialog under Energy Analysis. you verify the building. enter Zone Color Scheme Training for File name. If you prefer not to continue with this practice. select Manchester.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis In this exercise. In the next exercise. click Edit for Energy Data. and on the Place tab of the Manage Place and Locations dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. All color schemes will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise. and Level 2 Plenum floor plan views. 9 If you want to save your work. and click Save. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Level 1 Plenum. and zone information. Open the i Energy Analysis. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. In this exercise. ■ Click for Location. For Postal Code.Mech. You then perform a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building.

Next. verify that <Building> is selected. For Building Construction. 5 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Verify that <Building> is specified for Building Construction. Verify that New Construction is selected for Project Phase. For Ground Plane. Revit MEP stores this information as project information.Single Duct is specified for Building Service. A preview pane displays the model and 2 tabs contain heating and cooling information for the building.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that VAV . NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. if you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. you need to select this option. Verify area and volume setting 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. For Place and Location. 7 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). 96 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Click OK twice. select Level 1. verify that Manchester.Single Duct is selected. IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). After opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. and click OK. click Edit for Energy Data. NH is selected. under Energy Analysis. and do the following: ■ ■ For Building Type. Verify that 1' 0" is specified for Sliver Space Tolerance. click Heating and Cooling Loads. Verify that Shading surfaces is selected. Then. verify that VAV . verify that Office is selected. Verify building information 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. (Building ■ ■ For Building Service (Default Space Service). Default Space Construction. You have verified the building information.

spin the model as shown. The space for Office 111 highlights in red. and select Office 111. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. 11 Expand the 1 . 13 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. 12 Click (Highlight). 9 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and zoom the model to better view the space. you isolate a space. TIP You can use the View Cube mouse to spin. Next. pan. The Spaces and Zones tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. NOTE Wireframe displays the analytical volume of a space. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 97 .East Offices zone. while pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel. click the Spaces/Zones tab. verify that Wireframe is selected (default setting). The Highlight tool allows you to verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. The analytical volume is bounded by the center plane of walls and the top plane of roofs and floors.View a space 8 In the preview pane. 10 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane).

click (Isolate). Below the list of spaces and zones. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces that normally would be obstructed by other spaces or by the architecture which would normally make it difficult to view. you verify space information. you view the volume of the space differently. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. select Office 111. Office 111. 15 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. click Shading. floors. 16 On the View Selector . 18 Next. 98 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Verify space information 19 On the Spaces/Zones tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden.14 With Office 111 selected. the space information displays for the selected space. highlight and isolate the space for Office 111 to view its inner volume. Next. roofs. 17 Using the methods that you learned. This space information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and other room-bounding components.

outdoor air per area. 70.00 °F : N/A for Cooling Information. This displays the analytical volume of the spaces in the selected zone. cooling air temperature. This specifies the outdoor air per person. Lighting Loads: <Default> : Power Loads: <Default> is specified for Electrical Data. heating air temperature. verify the following space information: ■ <Building> is specified for Space Type and Construction Type. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. 1 . 23 As you did earlier. Revit MEP stores this space and zone information as space and zone properties. and dehumidification set point. This zone information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the spaces in the zone. N/A : N/A : N/A is specified for Outdoor Air Information. and humidification set point. you verify the zone information.00 °F : 90. This specifies the cooling set point. and repeat the above steps to view the inner volumes of the spaces in the 1 -East Offices zone. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. 22 On the Spaces/Zones tab. ■ ■ View a zone and zone information 21 On the View Selector .00 °F : 54. Next. 74. <Default> is specified for People Data. 26 Verify the following zone information for the 1 . ■ ■ IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains space and zone information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. You can also click (Zone Properties) on the Zone toolbar to access the zone information. view other spaces and zones in the building model.East Offices. 25 Click 1 . the zone information displays for the selected zone.20 Under the list of spaces and zones. click Wireframe. select 1 . This specified the number of people or the area per person for the space. respectively. You can also access the space and zone information by selecting a space or zone in the drawing area or System Browser. right-clicking. and verify the space and zone information. use the (Highlight) and volume of the spaces in the selected zone. including Office 111. The space and zone information is located under Energy Analysis in the Element Properties dialog. This zone contains 3 spaces. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 99 . and clicking Element Properties. (Isolate) tools to view the analytical 24 Click (Shading).East Offices.00 °F : N/A for Heating Information. View other spaces and zones 27 Using the methods that you learned. and air changes per hour.East Offices zone: ■ ■ <Building> is specified for Service Type.East Offices. Below the list of spaces and zones. This specifies the heating set point.

if 2 spaces are selected each having different people data. you verified building. or import the IES model that has already been created. 30 If you want to save your work. Otherwise. 100 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 29 Review the loads report. and zone information has been verified. this report includes project. weather. 31 In the Save As dialog. or zoom the view to see the selected space or zone. TIP You can select multiple spaces or zones by pressing CTRL and selecting them. NOTE If you select multiple spaces or zones that contain different information. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 28 On the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. click File menu ➤ Save. Revit MEP performs a heating and cooling loads analysis using the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool that was developed in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions). pan. space. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and space information to the IES <Virtual Environment> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. the People Data option becomes blank. and click Save. or zone information. and zone information for the building model. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. navigate to the folder of your choice. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. you can perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. or make any changes to the model. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. or by pressing SHIFT to select a range of spaces or zones. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. You then performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. space. For example. close the file. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. This product is not included with Revit MEP.You may need to spin. space. and a loads report displays. that information does not display. In this exercise. In the next lesson. space. Various factors are analyzed including analytical and inner volumes of the spaces. and zone information. click Calculate. building. Now that the project. enter Energy Analysis Training for File name. You must have IES <VE> installed.

Modify a ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser. As you place the air terminals. you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added. You can also select the 1 . 2 Right-click in the drawing area. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. click the Training Files icon. After system creation. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Placing Air Terminals In this exercise. you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts. modify air terminal parameters.Mechanical Systems:Air 4 Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. and click View Properties. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. After completing the air systems lesson. adding AC units. In this lesson. and double-click 1 . You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes. Open the i Air Terminals.Ceiling Mech to make it the active view. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. and then you validate your air system design. sizing ductwork. Then.Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click (Properties). you will create supply air systems. 101 .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you create new views.

verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. 102 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7". under Graphics. NOTE The ceiling hosts the diffuser. ■ ■ TIP When entering a value.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. click Air Terminal. 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range. 10 On the Options bar. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. 11 Click to place the supply air terminal in the upper left office as shown. You specify 8' 7" so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 8' 6") and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level. and enter 8' 7" for Offset. for the Top parameter. do the following: ■ ■ Select Level 1 for Underlay. enter 0 for Offset. Under View Depth. specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the View Range dialog. make sure that Place on Face is selected. and enter 8 7 for Offset. 9 In the Type Selector. select Supply Diffuser . for the Level parameter. you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals.Ceiling Mech is the active view. Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 . separate the value with a space. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals. 6 Click OK twice. for the Cut plane parameter. Under Primary Range. Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation. For example. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2".3 In the Element Properties dialog.

the command in progress terminates. click to specify the move start point. TIP When you click Modify. and after the (geometry) end point snap displays. click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected. click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. enter 300 CFM for Flow. Placing Air Terminals | 103 . 19 On the Options Bar. and then click the midpoint of the Office 102 and then of the Office 103 ceiling grids to specify copy end points. and then click Modify. Notice that the selected air terminal turns red. you may have to move it to center it -. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed. verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected.12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination). Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 17 Move the air terminal to the location shown. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 101 air terminal selected.use the arrow keys for fine movement control. You can also press Esc to accomplish this result. Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 13 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed. 20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point. you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. then select Multiple. Since snaps are not available here. TIP To use the Move tool. 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar. Move the diffuser so that it fits squarely inside a ceiling tile.

104 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . select Exhaust Diffuser . Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. Notice that after you specify the copy start point. TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display midpoint snaps only.Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom).Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown. click Air Terminal. 23 Using the add-move-copy placement method. 22 In the Type Selector. listening dimensions display to aid placement. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection.

24 In the Type Selector. make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 250 CFM.Hosted: Workplane-based Return Diffuser. and specify a 325 CFM airflow for each of them.Before you copy the exhaust diffuser. place 3 return air terminals in the open space to the left of the restrooms. select Return Diffuser . Placing Air Terminals | 105 . 25 Using the same placement method.

and click OK. click Modify. 106 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol. right-click. Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 101 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area. under Mechanical. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. 28 Select the air terminal that you just placed. clear the UpArrow check box.

The next exercise starts with a completed drawing. create the level 2 supply system. remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. continue laying out the level 1 supply system. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. click on the Edit toolbar.Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. do the following for level 2: ■ Make 2 . Optional: Create the level 2 air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. 31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below. 30 Select the Office 101 air terminal. After you place the supply air terminals. Placing Air Terminals | 107 . 32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process.Ceiling Mech the active view. The next exercise starts with a completed drawing.

Specify 325 CFM airflow for the supply and return diffusers.Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters. In this exercise. You will be using different views to design the systems. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. and 250 CFM airflow for the exhaust diffusers. In the next exercise. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. 34 In the Save As dialog. you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project. In the next exercise. specify the same view parameters as 1 . and learned a method for precise placement. In this exercise. More importantly. enter Air Terminals Training for File name. collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. you create the air systems. modified the air terminal parameters. The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. and click Save. you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools.■ In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. 108 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . navigate to the folder of your choice. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save. 33 If you want to save your work. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click Schedule/Quantities. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow Space: Name Space: Number 7 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. 8 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Number Space: Name Mark System Type Flow Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field. select Air Terminals. select the field and click Remove. Click OK. select Space. 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Actual Calculated Airflow for Name. and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared.■ Open the i Air System Schedules. Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added. under Available fields.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 109 . do the following: ■ Under Category. Verify that Formula is selected. and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. Select HVAC for Discipline. 5 Under Select available fields from. 10 In the Calculated Value dialog. Create a calculated value parameter 9 Click Calculated Value. Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. 4 Add Mark and System Type. Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with spaces. Select Air Flow for Type. select Flow. ■ ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 6 While pressing Ctrl.

and Count and totals. Next. Organize the data 14 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.Space: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. Click OK. Verify that Grand totals is cleared. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and click Conditional Format. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Use the schedule as a design tool 15 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule. you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements. Select Footer. ■ ■ The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what rooms do not meet the design requirements as they are red in the schedule. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use.■ Use the button on the right to enter Space: Actual Supply Airflow . You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. equals. Select Blank line. Verify that Ascending is selected. On the Filter tab. Format the calculated value parameter 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Actual Calculated Airflow is selected for Field. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Space: Number for Sort by. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 11 Click OK. in the Fields list. and select Supply Air. Click OK twice. Enter -35 CFM and 35 CFM for Value. Click the Background Color and select Red in the Color dialog. and Itemize every instance is selected. 13 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. Select Not Between for Test. 110 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . select Actual Calculated Airflow. select System Type for Filter by. The red values in the Actual Calculated Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room does not yet meet the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 CFM.

and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. NOTE If a different project is also open. Optional: Modifying Other Parameters The drawing for the next exercise provides completed values. 17 Enter ZR. This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. and if you click in the floor plan to make it active. 22 Select By Category. TIP Editing diffuser tags in schedules. The Actual Calculated Airflow value displays in white indicating that it now complies with the Office 101 airflow design requirements. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 111 . These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. double-click 1 Mech to make it the active view. and draw a zoom region around Office 101 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan. 23 On the Options bar. Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. 18 Enter WT to tile the 2 views. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view.This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule. click Leader to clear this option. 16 In the Project Browser. the selected air terminal displays in red. Tagging an Air Diffuser 21 Select Tag from the Mechanical tab on the Design bar. speeds the design process. NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 24 Click on a diffuser to add a tag. and press Tab. 20 Delete 300 CFM enter 250. 19 In the schedule. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. select the 300 CFM Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 101 air terminal. 25 Modify the other supply air terminal Flow parameters for both floors so that the airflow design requirements are met. rather than one by one in a drawing.

During this exercise. Unlike logical connections. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing. After creating the logical connection. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. navigate to the folder of your choice. This is the power of BIM. A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. all Actual Calculated Airflow parameters display in white. and maximize the 1 . 26 Close the schedule view. enter an Offset value of 10 0. you also use the System Browser to validate your systems. In the next exercise. 28 In the Save As dialog. IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. In this exercise.NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. and double-click 1 .Mech floor plan view. you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Save. for the Top parameter.Mech to make it the active view. This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. 4 In the View Range dialog. and then create the logical connection between the system components. Open the i Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. 27 If you want to save your work. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters. Under Primary Range. However. click File menu ➤ Save. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis. you are changing the air terminal connector size. After you modify the airflow parameters. under Extents. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create air systems. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 112 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. enter Using Schedules Training for File name. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. 2 Right-click in the drawing window. click Edit for View Range. and click View Properties. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system.

This assignment occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 . TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 11 With the view active. right-click the title and select View ➤ Systems. Thus. notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. click in the drawing area to make it active. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 113 . You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Explore the System Browser 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. then press F9. enter ZR. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems. For now. and sketch a zoom region around Office 101 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. 9 If the System Browser title says Zones. So. As you assign diffusers to systems. You will learn more about systems in this exercise. 10 Expand the Unassigned systems folder. if all system components are assigned.5 Click OK twice. each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. If the System Browser does not respond. and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building. air terminals. 7 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides window. after you placed the diffusers. uncheck Air Terminal tags. click System Browser. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. 6 Type VG on the keyboard.Mech view. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated. and click OK. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems.

This VAV box services only Office 101 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal. ■ The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals). IMPORTANT After you select a system component. click Mechanical Equipment. 13 In the Type Selector. Click OK.TIP Although this view does not contain room tags. and select the VAV box. you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you add the VAV to this system. Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 17 Select the Office 101 rectangular diffuser. click to place the VAV box. click (Select Equipment for System). Modify VAV box parameters 15 Right-click the VAV box. 12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and click Element Properties. and press Esc twice. system specific tools display on the Options Bar. 114 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . You created a system that includes the air terminal. Note that the VAV will detect the downstream airflow when connected to diffusers. do the following: ■ Under Constraints. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. 19 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 9 6 for Offset. This is because you have yet to assign it to a system.Parallel Fan Powered : Size 3 . If desired. Next. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. click (Create Supply Air System). 14 Move the cursor to the right of the office door. select VAV Unit . 18 On the Options Bar.8 inch Inlet.

Create the ductwork 20 With the new system selected. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. select an air terminal that you added to the system. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned.Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool. The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. The organization is from upstream. the VAV (the parent) to downstream. Default Supply Air and Default Return Air. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 115 . place the cursor over the Office 101 air terminal and press Tab. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. This display indicates that the new system is selected. IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. They remain assign to their respective default systems. Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV). This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. and cleared from the Options Bar. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. and select the system. and click Select to select the system.

■ Click (Next Solution). refer to Help. 29 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For more information. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. 28 Click OK. NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. and select solution 2. Enter 9' 6" for Offset.Round for Flex Duct Type. select Main.The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. 25 Under System Type: Supply Air. 27 Under System Type: Supply Air. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. do the following: 22 ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 26 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. click Settings. click Finish Layout. 116 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Enter 9' 6" for Offset. 21 On the Options Bar. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. Verify that 6' 0" is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. Notice that Solutions is selected. select Branch.

On the View Control Bar. The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork. TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. and press Tab twice. select Medium for Detail Level. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection. a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added. thus it is not part of the system. Change the geometry display 30 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area. Check duct connectivity 31 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights.The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created. as was the elbow itself. NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. you can delete ductwork and the system remains. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 117 . For example. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct. and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line. For example. select Coarse detail level for single line.

fittings.The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Size the duct 32 Place the cursor over the duct. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal. 118 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Click OK. then you know that a disconnection exists. If the entire network does not highlight. 33 On the Options Bar. Under Constraints. Rerouting usually correct this issue. under Sizing Method. ■ The Office 101 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab. Verify that Only is selected. 34 In the Duct Sizing dialog. IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. click Sizing. and equipment.08 in-wg/100ft. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and click to select them. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. and enter . The first time you press Tab.

You can also right-click the second VAV box listed. 35 With the VAV selected. 36 Click Cancel. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 102 and 103 (the offices immediately below Office 101). Note that the airflow is set to 250 CFM . in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. click Mechanical Equipment. enter ZR. 38 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. right-click and select Element Properties. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. double-click the second VAV box listed. 40 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 102 door.8 inch Inlet. select VAV Unit . 39 In the Type Selector. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . and click Element Properties. 41 In the left column of the System Browser. click to place the VAV box. Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 37 Click in the drawing area. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 119 . the required airflow for the space and the airflow assigned to the diffusers.

If not. under Constraints. 45 Click (Edit System). The component highlights in the drawing area. and click OK. 43 Select the Office 102 rectangular diffuser. a new system is immediately created. Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. and number of elements in the active being edited. click Add To System. TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. 120 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 42 In the Element Properties dialog. 47 Place the cursor over the Office 103 rectangular diffuser. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar. click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. This system includes the selected system component(s). enter 9' 6" for Offset. System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out. right-click. TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser. NOTE After you select a system component. system equipment. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar. You can verify this new system in the System Browser. or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar. the selected component and its connector(s) highlight. right-click the component in the left column. The selected diffuser and its connector highlights. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. 44 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector. 46 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. and click Select from the context menu.

the number of elements has increased to 2. 52 Select the VAV box. 51 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 102. On the Options Bar.48 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. 50 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. 49 Select the Office 103 rectangular diffuser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 121 . click (Select Equipment). Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active.

click Finish. 54 Place your cursor over the Office 102 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system. a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2. If you leave the mouse stationary. The system displays in red. 122 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .On the Options Bar. 53 On the Edit System toolbar. the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment. 55 Click to select the system.

57 On the Options Bar. You can click in the drawing area to close the warning. click Finish Layout.Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 56 On the Options Bar. 58 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. 59 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. and select solution 3. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 123 . These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed. You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. click Layout Path. verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.

62 In the Type Selector. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct. Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct. click to place the endcap. 63 Move the cursor over the end of the main. click Duct Fitting. 61 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created. You can either relocate the VAV box. So. or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work. you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system. Add an endcap 60 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 102. it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. 124 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and after the end point snap displays. IMPORTANT When creating layouts. If a warning occurs. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. you can review it and take action if necessary. or modify the duct manually. select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. This was the reason for the warning message.

verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Notice the airflow value of 530 CFM. 66 Click Cancel.08 in-wg/100ft. 64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. Size the duct 67 Place the cursor over the duct. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. 69 In the Duct Sizing dialog. click Sizing. and enter . ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 125 . and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals. Verify that Only is selected.Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. Click OK. and click to select them. right-click and select Element Properties. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. 68 On the Options Bar. under Sizing Method. 65 With the VAV selected. Under Constraints. Do not highlight or select the VAV box.

126 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . air terminals. and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. The VAV box. and press Tab twice. Check duct connectivity 70 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights.The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 102 and 103 is sized using the Friction method at . IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct.

8 inch Inlet. select VAV Unit. this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created. 74 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 127 . Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 71 Right-click in the drawing area. click Mechanical Equipment. 73 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below. sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space).Mech view. However.Next. 75 In the Type Selector. 72 In the 1 . and click to place the VAV box.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . 76 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals.

77 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The new supply air system displays in red. You will add this later. and on the Options Bar. click (Create Air Supply System). 81 On the Options Bar. The selected diffusers highlight in red (shown here as circled). select the 4 air terminals above and to the right of the VAV. Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. 128 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 79 In the Element Properties dialog. 78 Select the VAV. 80 While pressing CTRL. under Constraints. click (Element Properties). and click OK. enter 9' 6" for Offset. and click again to deselect the VAV.

and select solution 1.The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. Then. ■ 86 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Click . and press TAB once to highlight the system. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. you create the ductwork to physically the system components. click to select the system. click (Select Equipment for System). You have logically connected the air system components. click Modify. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. 83 Select the VAV to add it to the system. Next. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 129 . Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 84 With the system selected. place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system. 82 On the Options Bar. and the red system display cleared. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 85 On the Options Bar.

89 Repeat this procedure and move the connection to the upper right branch. select the left section of the branch. The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction.87 In the drawing area. 88 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the branch to the right until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV. The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. 90 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. After you select the branch. click Finish Layout. 130 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout. notice that drag controls display. and then snap and move down the right section of the main to create a straight main to the VAV.

The ductwork is created. and (Edit) on the Options Bar. and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. Next. The system components are now physically connected. Notice that on the Options Bar. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 94 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. 95 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection. A change has occurred in the air system design. TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal. mechanical equipment. 96 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. select a system component that is already part of a system. The new system component is now part of the same system. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created. Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 91 Select the main duct. You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser. click Add to System. This number verifies the added diffuser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 131 . Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier. click Finish. you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. 92 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. VAV. you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar. Then. IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. the Number of Elements increased to 5. 93 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system.

97 While pressing CTRL. 101 On the Options Bar. ■ 102 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Click . 99 Zoom out the view. and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar. 132 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . The new ductwork is created. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. Check duct connectivity 103 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. right-click and select Delete to remove the unwanted duct work. 100 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. select the flex duct and the transition on the diffuser. Now that the duct work is in place. you need to check that all the parts are connected. click Finish Layout. and select solution 1. and working from the end of the main. 98 With the duct work selected. and press Tab twice.

The selection displays in red. TIP Depending on your ductwork layout. click Sizing.08 in-wg/100ft. 106 In the Duct Sizing dialog. you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. and enter .The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. and click to select them. Under Constraints. under Sizing Method. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 133 . Size the duct 104 Place the cursor over the main duct. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV. Verify that Only is selected. 105 On the Options Bar. Click OK. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing.

Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. Select and modify a Network layout path solution.) 107 In the Project Browser. Do not change the duct conversion settings. Reposition and rotate if necessary. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. If you receive errors. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. 108 Using the systems creation methods that you learned. you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1. see the note below. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. ■ ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at 0. complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit . select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. Verify that all Other options are cleared. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing.This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . So. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. If you receive errors. 134 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Next. double-click 1 . You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. modify the layout. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. Optional: Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems (See the next exercise for a completed drawing. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. an offset elevation is incorrectly specified. under Mechanical. or reinsert duct fittings. see the note below.Mech floor plan to make it the active view. You can either relocate the VAV box. Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . modify the duct manually.

Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. For VAV airflow.The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 135 . Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. Size the duct using the Friction method at 0. Do not change the duct conversion settings. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Reposition and rotate if necessary. If you receive errors. specify the air terminal airflow. see the note above. Next. see the note above. turn off Air Terminal tags. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1. 110 On the Annotations tab of the Visibility Graphics window. Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit . Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. If you receive errors. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters.Mech mechanical floor plan view. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. Verify that all Other options are cleared. set the Primary Range Top Offset to 10' 0" and the Detail Level to Medium.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset. Optional: Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 109 Use the 2 .Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow.

1 In the Project Browser. You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. Open the i Using Views for Duct Validation. and click Save. 112 If you want to save your work. After creating each system. it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent. Although you already checked duct connectivity. In the next exercise. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. sized the ductwork. you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. 136 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. You also specified VAV airflow. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and validated the systems in the System Browser. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry. You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system. checked duct connectivity. you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 113 In the Save As dialog.Mech to make it the active view. and double-click 1 . navigate to the folder of your choice.The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. click File menu ➤ Save. enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise.

click the section. right-click Section 1. 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area. click Section. After you add the section. 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right. and click Zoom to Fit. and click OK. enter ZR. and the second click specifies the section tail. The section relocates under HVAC. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). move the cursor down and click just below the Office 103 air terminal to set the end point. and click Properties. The selected section displays in red. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. 6 In the Project Browser. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. 5 Place the cursor just above the Office 101 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown. select HVAC for Sub Discipline.Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. This zooms the view to fit the drawing area. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 137 . 8 In the drawing area. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 101 103. The first click specifies the section head. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. under Graphics.

similar to the level heads in the elevation view. and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be. 12 On the View Control Bar. 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view. 10 On the Design Bar. All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view. 138 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . The section head displays in blue. 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 102 and 103. select Medium for Detail Level. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style.You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles. click Modify. The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges.

19 Right-click in the drawing area. select Section Box.14 Continue to validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. click Modify. and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. and click View Properties. select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 139 . Notice that in the 3D view. under Extents. A section box displays around the building model. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them. 15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. 18 On the View Control Bar. You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create. and click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design. 17 In the Project Browser. Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar.

102. 24 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that you can verify that the Office 101. click the section box and locate the top center drag handle.NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view. TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry. 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls. 22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed. 26 If you want to save your work. click File menu ➤ Save. You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. 25 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be. and 103 duct geometry is as you expected. 21 In the drawing area. 140 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space. Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts.Mech to make it the active view. Open the i Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 141 . ■ ■ ■ Verify that 12" is selected for diameter (D:). Verify that Auto Connect is selected.27 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. click the Training Files icon. you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser. and click to specify the start point. In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry. enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs. do the following. In the next exercise. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. 4 In the Type Selector.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the approximate location shown. 2 Enter ZR. and double-click 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click Duct. you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. navigate to the folder of your choice. select Round Duct : Taps.

you can select individual segments and use the arrow keys to adjust location. and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 101. and click Draw Duct. right-click on the air connection. 9 Click on the VAV. After placing the duct.7 Draw duct as shown in the following image. Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 8 Enter ZR. 142 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

10 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. When drawing duct. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. If you pause briefly. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 8" VAV primary connector diameter. 12 Move the cursor down and draw an approximate 8' 0" vertical second duct segment. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 143 . use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar. and click or press Enter to specify the end point. 11 Draw the first duct segment 2' 0" to the right. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type. TIP When drawing duct. and click to specify the end point.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary.

the duct run connecting the Office 101 VAV to the primary is complete. zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 102. 144 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .13 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct. 14 With the Draw tool open. After you click to specify the end point. TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct. and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment. the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy.

zoom the view to the right of the primary. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 15 Place the cursor over the Office 102 VAV box supply air connection. 18 Using the draw duct methods that you learned. click to specify the start point. 17 Connect the other three VAVs to the primary duct as shown.TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 145 . 16 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary. and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. Check connectivity 19 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. and after the connector snap displays. On the View Control Bar.

and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation. complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. Finally.) 21 In the Project Browser.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. 20 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D views. you will do that in a later exercise. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. Optional: Complete the level 1 primary duct (See next exercise for a completed drawing. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view. You will size the primary in a later exercise. and Angle is cleared. Check connectivity. On the Options Bar. 22 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise. but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system. Do not size the primary. 146 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct. ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct. you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space. NOTE Do not size the primary at this time. specify a 9' 6" offset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion.

and Angle is cleared. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. You will size the primary in a later exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. On the Options Bar. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". Do not size the primary. 24 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned.Mech to make it the active view. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps.The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below. Check connectivity. Optional: Draw the level 2 primary duct 23 In the Project Browser. and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation. ■ ■ Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 147 . specify a 9' 6" offset. and double-click 2 .

The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise. However. While drawing duct. click the Training Files icon. Open the i Duct Sizing . click File menu ➤ Save. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method. and click Save. you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork. 26 In the Save As dialog. you place an endcap where no further connections are planned. Finally. The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run. In this exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. 25 If you want to save your work. Considering that both ends of the primary are open.Velocity. you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct. you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes. 148 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . In the next exercise. In this exercise. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. This determines the airflow direction. you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct. Before sizing the primary. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views. but you have yet to size the primary. enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 149 . and after the end point snap displays. 2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located near the wall between Offices 117 and 116. click Duct Fitting. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. and double-click 1 . and click Mechanical. right-click the Design Bar. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately. 7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Mech to make it the active view.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser. click to place the endcap. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. 5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run. you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source.

and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. Verify that Only is selected. and enter 2500 FPM. ■ 150 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 10 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and click to select it. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity. Click OK. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. The selected primary displays in red. Under Constraints. click Sizing.Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes. under Sizing Method. 9 On the Options Bar.

You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. So.The sized left primary is shown below. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct. 11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run. You can either relocate the VAV box. or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. Next. 12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 117. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. or reinsert duct fittings. modify the duct manually. The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. modify the layout. and press TAB twice. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 151 .

the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. 14 Using the method you have learned. and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary.Mech to make it the active view. 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run. and double-click 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct. The sized right primary is shown below. 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run. place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run. As in level 1. 152 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run. Optional: Size the level 2 primary duct run (See the next exercise for a completed dawing.13 Using the process that you just learned.) 15 In the Project Browser. place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction.

enter Duct Sizing . First.Mech Duct Classes for Name. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 .Mech. 2 In the Project Browser. enter 1 . This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements.Velocity Training for File name.Mech. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 20 In the Save As dialog. and click Rename. 19 If you want to save your work. Then. and click Save. you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. navigate to the folder of your choice. In this exercise.Mech is created and becomes the active view. you sized the primary duct for the building. you assign a color fill to the ductwork. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary.The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below. Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. and click OK. right-click 1 . Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 153 . click the Training Files icon.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. right-click Copy of 1 . click File menu ➤ Save. Open the i Duct Color Scheme. you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise. Like room color scheme. duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Mechanical. 5 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays. 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. 8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK.

Next, you change the color scheme. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity. Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area, select the duct color scheme legend that you placed, and on the Options Bar, click Edit Color Scheme. 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Velocity for Color, and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved. Select By range. In the At Least column, click in the second row, and enter 2000 FPM. In the Caption column, delete the existing text, and enter low velocity for the first row, and enter high velocity for the second row. In the Color column, click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. In the Color column, click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box.

154 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box.

Click OK.

The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them.

Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 2 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 2 - Mech, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, enter 2 - Mech Duct Classes for Name, and click OK. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. 15 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK. The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct. Using the same color scheme allows you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 155

18 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 19 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. In the next exercise, you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method
In 2 previous exercises, you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. In this exercise, you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system. First, you split the duct main into multiple pieces, and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method. Finally, you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Duct Sizing - Equal Friction.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 In the System Browser, expand the Mechanical systems folder. TIP If the System Browser is closed, press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser, not ductwork (physical connections).

156 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

3 Right-click Supply Air, and click Expand All. Every supply air system that you created is listed. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number, such as Mechanical Supply Air 6, and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system, such as a VAV box and diffusers. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3, and click Show. The 1 - Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system, and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red. 5 In the Show Element(s) In View dialog, click Close to deactivate the Show tool. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size.

You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. To accomplish this reduction, you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment. Split the main

6 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Split).

7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers. 8 Watch the listening dimensions, and split the main about 11' 0" from the end of the main.

TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display, move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions. 9 With the Split tool open, split the main to the right of the second branch as shown.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 157

10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main, and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box, and click to select them. Note that the VAV box is not selected.

12 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Sizing Method, do the following:
■ ■

Select Equal Friction, and enter 0.08 in-wg/100ft. Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Click OK.

IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined, ignore this warning. You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it.

158 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at .08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.

Notice that as the airflow decreases, transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. Next, you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 15 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader. Click Tags.

16 In the Tags dialog, under Category, for Ducts, verify that Duct Size Tag is loaded, and click Cancel. 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main, and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment, and click to place each tag. TIP To reposition a tag, select the tag and drag it to a new location. You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement.

19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. 20 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Sizing - Equal Friction Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. First, you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments, and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method. Finally, you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 159

sizes. In the next exercise, you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized.

Inspecting Air Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. Using this tool, you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2.

You will inspect this system. 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. IMPORTANT To select a system, select any duct segment, duct fitting, diffuser, or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, select

(Inspect).

The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click , the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.

160 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector opens, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow, pressure, and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. A tooltip also displays the system information.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected, but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. These are not logically connected to this system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment, click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment.

Inspecting Air Systems | 161

10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system. 12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. 13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork, the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). For example, you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. The primary is physically but not logically connected. In a later exercise, you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. 16 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 17 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction, airflow, and pressure information for various systems in the project. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you place 2 AC units.

Placing Air Conditioning Units
In this exercise, you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units.

162 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing AC Units.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Create a new roof plan view 1 Click the View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 2 Select Roof and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Roof. 4 Right-click Roof, and click Rename. 5 Enter Roof Mech for Name, and click OK. 6 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. Ignore the warning about the name changing. 7 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view, and click View Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Mechanical for Discipline, and HVAC for Sub-Discipline. 9 Under Extents, click Edit for View Range and select Level 2 for View Depth: Level. Click OK twice. 10 Change the Graphics Style to Wireframe. 11 Set the Detail Level to Medium. This action specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay. Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser.

Add the AC Unit that services level 2 12 In the Roof Mechanical view, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room). You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room. 13 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 14 In the Type Selector, select Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 163

15 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room, and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top. 16 Place the unit in the approximate location shown below.

17 Click to place the AC unit, and then click Modify on the Design Bar.

Next, you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit. Create a new section view 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 20 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 203 VAV box, and click to specify the section start point.

21 Move the cursor to the right, and after the cursor is past the AC unit, click to specify the section end point.

164 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 22 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 2, and click Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline, and click OK. The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). 24 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. 25 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle.

The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. 26 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 27 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Medium for Detail Level. This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line. You may need to adjust the top border to see all of the AC unit.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 165

29 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators, notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface.

NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes, AC units are level-based components. Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. To place the AC unit on the roof surface, you must relocate it.

30 Select the AC unit, and click

(Move) on the Edit toolbar.

31 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the move start point.

32 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit, and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface, (1' 0" directly above the start point), click to specify the move end point.

166 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

This specifies the AC unit offset level of 1' 0" which moves the AC unit to the roof surface.

TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog. Place the level 1 AC unit 33 Using the methods that you learned, place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures (see the next exercise for approximate locations):

Work in the Roof Mech view, and place a Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top. TIP You can copy the first AC unit you placed. Copying eliminates the elevation adjustment. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below.

The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown.

34 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 35 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing AC Units Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. In the next exercise, you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 167

Completing the Supply Air Systems
In this exercise, you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. First, you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. Then, you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Completing Supply Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Modify the 3D view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, and double-click {3D} to make the view active. 2 Select the section box, and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof.

The entire building including the AC units display.

If you like, you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. Remember that, if you do this, you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later. 3 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that it displays as shown below.

168 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Next, you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. Tile the views 4 With the 3D view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 5 In the Project Browser, under Mechanical, double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view. 6 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 7 Zoom the view in both windows as shown.

You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 9 In the Type Selector, select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. 10 In the Roof Mech view, place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection, the connector snap displays.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 169

11 Click to specify the duct riser start point. 12 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Enter 68" for W: (width), and 20" for H: (height). This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Enter -2 6 for Offset, and press Tab.

■ ■

The -2' 6" offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system, 9' 6". Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components, Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location. If the 2 are different, connections are automatically created. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar. 13 Move the cursor up, and after listing dimensions display, enter 3' 6" and press Enter to specify the end point.

The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 9' 6" from level 2, and then the duct continues horizontally for 3' 6".

Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. 14 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 15 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

170 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted.

16 Close the Roof Mech view. You now switch to the 2 - Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser. Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 17 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 18 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views, and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 - Mech view. TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level, you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. On the View Control Bar, change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display.

Notice that only the duct riser displays. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 - Mech view. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit, but for this exercise you only need to see the riser. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 171

19 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment.

The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. 20 In the 2 Mech view, select the horizontal primary segment, and while pressing CTRL, select the adjoining elbow. The selected items display in red. 21 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow.

22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 23 In the Type Selector, select Round Duct : Taps. 24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter), select 9". Verify that Auto connect is selected. For Offset, verify that 9' 6" is specified.

25 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser, and after the mid point snap displays, click to specify the start point.

172 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

The left primary is connected to the AC unit. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 173 . click to specify the end point. and after the centerline snap displays. 28 Validate the geometry in the 3D view. 27 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool.26 Move the cursor over the primary.

30 In the 2 . You will also use this view to validate endcap placement. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point. 31 Select the right primary duct. 32 Drag the connector down and to the right.Mech view. and place the cursor over the end connector. 29 Spin the 3D view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection. and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall. 174 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .Next. pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment. you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit.

35 With the draw tool still active.33 Select the right primary duct. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 175 . 37 Validate the geometry in the 3D view. draw a horizontal run and connect it to the midpoint snap of the riser . 36 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw Duct tool. 34 Draw a short run of duct with a downward 30 degree angle and click to set the endpoint. right-click and select Draw Duct.

click Duct Fitting. 40 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar. you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected. place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice. 41 In the Type Selector. Check connectivity 38 In the 2 .Mech view. You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork. The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected. However. You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. zoom in on the duct riser.You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit.Mech view. 176 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Add endcaps 39 In the 2 .

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 177 . move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow.. TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement.Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. 44 In the Type Selector. click to add the endcap. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. 43 With the Duct Fitting tool open. after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays. The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement. 42 Place your cursor over the top edge.

verify the duct riser endcap. use the same method to validate the endcap geometry. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap. 46 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. 49 Using the 2 views. Verify endcap placement 47 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement. 48 In the 3D view. Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap. 178 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . click to add the endcap.45 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays. and then validate its geometry.

Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. and then select Mechanical Equipment.50 Press Tab to check connectivity. and click OK. 54 In the Filter dialog. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of Completing the Supply Air Systems | 179 . 52 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 51 With the 2 views tiled. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. Next. click in the 2 . 53 On the Options Bar. click Check None. All level 2 VAV boxes are selected.Mech view to make it active. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2. Create the high pressure supply air system. you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit. You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D view. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan.

57 Click the 3D view title bar to make the window active. You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. 180 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 55 On the Options Bar. all system components must be logically connected by a system. IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components. click (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the selected VAV boxes to it. However. ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. 58 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool.Mech view range. In this case. These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector. Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork.the current view are selected. only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 . or even without ductwork. 56 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system. and select the level 2 AC unit.

You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child). 66 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. 69 Make the 3D view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25. click Inspect. 65 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. In the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment. If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box. The System Inspector tool opens. notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector. diffuser. click Inspect.Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 25 system listing. and click Select. 68 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct. The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. duct fitting. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. and click Inspect. After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. you inspect the system. 60 In the System Browser. 63 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25. or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system. 67 Click a blank space in the 2 . and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed. Next. Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information. all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty.Validate the primary supply air system 59 Press F9 to open the System Browser. expand Mechanical. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 181 .Mech drawing area to make the view active. 62 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 25 to view the VAV boxes. Supply Air. 61 Expand Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton . This is the system that you just created. Inspect the primary supply air system 64 In the System Browser.

71 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. move the cursor down. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. and a 20" height. complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view. ■ ■ This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit. you complete the level 1 primary supply air system. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. Specify the offset to -14' 6". draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 68" width. and press Enter to specify the duct end point. 182 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D view. and enter 3' 6". This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement. Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air system 72 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. 9' 6". Next. Click the supply connector.

Watch for the centerline snap as shown. Instead of drawing duct. and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool.Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view. open the 1 . release the mouse button.Mech view. and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct.Mech view (if open). select the left primary duct segment. In the 1 . Completing the Supply Air Systems | 183 . ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 . and after the edge highlights. The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge. ■ ■ Connect the primary to the AC.Mech view. ■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser. and tile it to the left of the 3D view. select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow.

and inspect the system with the System Inspector. ■ In the 1 .The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit. Use Tab to check duct connectivity. and remember to zoom the view. Validate the system using the System Browser. Use Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. and validate the duct geometry in the 3D view. add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. ■ ■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system. and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it. ■ 184 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .Mech view.

you need to validate them. you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. you check the systems in your project. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. Open the i Checking Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. click the Training Files icon. click File menu ➤ Save.The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown. and validated these logical connections. As you view the warnings. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems. click Check Duct Systems. and quickly target those systems that need attention. Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. Revit MEP lists the system components Checking Air Systems | 185 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. Using tiled windows. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. In this exercise. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name. and for duct sizing. 73 If you want to save your work. and click Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. In this exercise. 74 In the Save As dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

that are associated with each warning. 186 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. In the System Browser. 3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. However. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems. Then. For example. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. thus assigning the components to a system. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. So. 5 Right-click Default Return Air. you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. as a tutorial exercise. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid. you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components. and for duct sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. After you assign the system components to a system. the duct is now associated with that system. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system.

In the next lesson. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name. TIP If you have multiple views open. In this exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. otherwise click Close. 9 Right-click a system. such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder. 10 If you want to save your work. and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment. Checking Air Systems | 187 . Depending on your air systems design. and click Save.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. 11 In the Save As dialog.The red lines represent the default logical connection. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. and click Select to view it and its assigned system components. You have completed the supply air systems for the building. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 6 Using the same methods. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. You now confirm the systems that you created. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. click File menu ➤ Save. you design a hydronic piping system for the building. You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. 8 Right-click Supply Air. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created.

188 .

circulator pump.Mech is created and becomes the active view. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. click the Training Files icon. You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. First. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems.Mech. a boiler.Mechanical Systems: Piping 5 Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. Then. A new view called Copy of 2 . you create new views in which to design the piping system. and the systems to logically connect the system components. After completing the air systems lesson. right-click 2 . designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. Open the i Creating Piping Views. In this lesson. you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. placing a circulator pump. In the left pane of the Open dialog. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems. Creating Piping Views In this exercise. and inspecting the piping system. you create hydronic piping systems. 189 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler. The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. pipes.

5 In the Element Properties dialog.Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. enter 2 . The 2 . you do not need to type measurement symbols. Under View Depth. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7".Mech. under Graphics. and click Rename. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2". and enter -11 6 for Offset. This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1. and enter 1' 0" for Offset. for Level. Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . Also notice that 2 . you change the view range. Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline. and click OK. Enter -3 1 for Cut plane Offset. and enter -11' 6" for Offset. This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view.Piping view selected in the Project Browser. 7 In the View Range dialog. Next. scroll down to the Extents category.2 In the Project Browser. just separate the value with a space. TIP When entering a value. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Piping for Name.Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems. right-click Copy of 2 . click view properties. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. 8 Click OK twice. 190 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and click Edit for View Range. For Bottom. do the following: ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. For example.

A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems. and verify that equals is selected.Piping view. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components. under Filters. click 13 Enter VAV Boxes for Name. On the Filters tab. You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings. system type. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type. 12 In the Filters dialog. click in the drawing area to make the view active. then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. However. the system filters are not used. Depending on the filter criteria. In this lesson. Creating Piping Views | 191 . however. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. (New). 11 Click Edit/New. you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run. you may want to select each component type separately. You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views. such as family name. common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). Next. Create and define filters 9 In the 2 . So the pipe will not interfere with the duct. Considering this. and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog.You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. they will not filter all system elements needed. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. you can add and activate filters. select Mechanical Equipment. Select VAV Unit . or even a description that you define. and enter VG. type name. Click Apply. it will be best to create filters. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. and click OK. However. click the Filters tab. IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria. 14 Under Categories. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria. 10 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. the pipe run will be located near the outer walls. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. Verify that none is selected for And. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated. Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. To do this. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. you need a define common filter criteria.Parallel Fan Powered for the family name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family Name for Filter by. 15 Under Filter Rules. Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. So.

28 Under Identity Data. NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals. click Edit/New. then the type parameters will not display. Next. you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. 23 On the Options Bar. Remember. select Supply Diffuser . Next. 18 Under Categories. . For Type. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 20 Enter Air Terminal for the description. This is the same rule for using formulae.Hosted. 31 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. otherwise the filter will not work. 29 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the Return air diffusers. and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter. 26 Click Apply. Next. 21 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. So. NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. 22 In the Type Selector. if differences exist in the selected elements. This is because the selected supply. click in the Value column for Description. click (Properties). select Description for Filter by.Piping view to make it active. 30 Click OK twice. you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. you can select it. Remember to click Apply. click 17 Enter Air Terminals for Name. and select Air Terminal. 32 Click in the 2 . do the following: ■ ■ For Family. you create a description as the common filter criteria. By selecting each air terminal type separately. under Filters. and enter VG. return. Because you already entered the description. select Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. This action adds a description for all Exhaust Diffuser air terminals. and click OK twice. you continue to create and define the filters. 192 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . you will not see the Description type parameter. 19 Under Filter Rules. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance). under Identity Data. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter. click Air Terminal. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. return. you add a description for the supply air diffusers. and click Apply. and verify that equals is selected. select Exhaust Diffuser Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. click Air Terminals. you must spell both verbatim. and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. and click OK.16 In the Filters dialog. enter Air Terminal for Description. You do not have common filter criteria for the supply.

you need a common filter criteria. Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs. You used this duct to create the duct riser. And: Type Name. and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name.Round. verify that equals is selected. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air . click Add. Filter by: Family Name. Next. 39 Under Visibility. Filter by: Family Name. click Edit/New. 34 On the Filters tab. Category: Duct Fittings. Add and activate filters 37 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. and select Round Duct for the family name. Filter by: Family Name. you activate the filters. Category: Ducts. verify that equals is selected. Round Ducts.Supply and Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. and enter Supply Air for system type name. All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them. verify that equals is selected. verify that equals is selected. you have 2 types of rectangular duct. Filter by: Family Name. And: Type Name. and click OK. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. Next. you filter duct fittings by system type. To filter multiple duct fitting types. Filter by: System Type. 36 Click OK. Creating Piping Views | 193 . You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. verify that equals is selected.Duct Fittings. you specify a family and a type name. and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name. Category: Ducts. verify that equals is selected. create the following new filters according to the specifications. you need to define the filter again. and select Flex Duct Round for the family name. you add and activate the filters. 40 Click OK twice. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler. If you did not click Apply. Flex Ducts . 35 Using the methods that you just learned. Category: Ducts. Next. 38 In the Add Filters dialog. verify that equals is selected. Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. This is because you have not added them. So. select all of the filters that you created. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. Category: Flex Ducts. Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog.33 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. clear all check boxes except for Mechanical . You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system. click the Filters tab. ■ ■ ■ ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter. So.

right-click 1 . scroll down to the Extents category. 44 Right-click in the drawing area. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. Create the level 1 piping view 41 In the Project Browser. Next. Next.Mech is created and becomes the active view.Mech. under Primary Range. under Graphics. you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click View Properties. you change the view range. 42 In the Project Browser. 43 Enter 1 .Piping for Name. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline.Piping view displays the new view settings. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You now define the view properties. and click Rename.All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance. this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level.Piping view.Mech. 47 In the View Range dialog. and click Edit for View Range. 48 Click OK twice. A new view called Copy of 1 . It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden. Unlike the 2 . The 1 . right-click Copy of 1 . 45 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer. and click OK. The 10 foot top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except 194 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 10' 0" is specified for Top Offset.

51 Enter 3D Piping for Name. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. click the Filters tab. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. If you turn off ducts visibility. 55 On the Filters tab. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. 59 In the Element Properties dialog.for the boiler pipe connection). The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab. ducts. As you create the pipe runs. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 56 In the Add Filters dialog. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser. and fin-tub radiators from displaying. 52 Right-click in the drawing area. click Add. and click OK. select all of the filters that you created. you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry. and click View Properties. You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. 58 Click OK. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. 50 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. right-click 3D. Next. you will be unable to view the duct riser. Creating Piping Views | 195 . clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. right-click Copy of 3D Mech. you will want to validate the geometry. and click OK. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and click Rename. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. such as halftone architecture. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. You used this duct to create the duct riser. and to create the level 1 piping system. clear Section Box to turn it off. 57 Under Visibility. Create the 3D Piping view 49 In the Project Browser.

navigate to the folder of your choice. 196 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. and click Save. 6 Zoom in on Office 201 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.Piping to make it the active view. In this exercise. You also created filters to display certain system components. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. select Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : 1" NPT. click File menu ➤ Save. 1 In the Project Browser. This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. Open the i Placing Radiators and Boiler. The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. click the Training Files icon. 5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall. 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Type Selector. In the next exercise. you place the radiators and a boiler. 61 If you want to save your work. 62 In the Save As dialog. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.60 Click OK.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and double-click 2 . NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name. right-click the Design Bar. and click Piping. This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall. click Mechanical Equipment. The duct risers and AC units display in the view.

7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall. To place the radiator precisely under the window. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 197 . 8 Click to place the radiator. and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown. 9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown. and notice that the connectors display. select it and use the arrow keys to move it into position. except for the windows on the radius wall.

You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator. Next. 12 On the Options Bar. If so. The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1. 14 Enter 4 for Flow. 198 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. 13 In the resulting dialog. you place the boiler.Piping to make this the active view. Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 4 GPM for all fin-tube radiators in the building. under Mechanical Loads. and you do not want to include it. If the same type of component exists on another level. double-click 1 . Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser. TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. drag the section tail. Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area. then these are different across the selected objects. verify that 20 GPM is specified for all of the selected radiators. and click Select All Instances. click (Element Properties). you modify the radiator flow rate. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed. If parameters are blank. Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson. IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties. Next. and click OK. then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box. right-click a radiator. the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects. for Flow. All level 2 radiators display in red. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify.

Next. Notice that the connectors display after you place the boiler. and click to place the boiler approximately as shown. you verify the boiler flow rate. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. click Mechanical Equipment. watch the listening dimensions.16 Enter ZR. and select Boiler : Standard from the Type Selector. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. 18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 199 .

22 Click OK. and click Save. 1 In the Project Browser. If the System Browser does not respond. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. click System Browser. analyses cannot be performed. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 24 In the Save As dialog. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications. Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. you create the systems to logically connect the system components. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1. navigate to the folder of your choice. TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. During this exercise. In this exercise. You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Save. then press F9. and click Element Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components. 21 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. click the Training Files icon. under Type Parameters. you create the supply and return piping systems. It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection. Unlike logical connections (systems). and then create the logical connection between these system components. 200 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name. 23 If you want to save your work. right-click the boiler. The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification. and double-click 2 . verify that 230 GPM is set for Max Flow. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation.Piping to make it the active view. Open the i Creating Piping Systems. In the next exercise.20 In the drawing area. click in the drawing area to make it active. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. After creating the logical connection. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.

Thus. the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. (Select Equipment for System). click it to the supply system. click (Create Hydronic Supply System). each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. 7 On the Options Bar. As you assign radiators to systems. right-click. So. Notice that after you click . Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator. 6 On the Options Bar. the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. after you placed the radiators and boiler. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. All level 2 radiators display in red. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. and select the boiler to assign Creating the Piping Systems | 201 . Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and click Select All Instances. if all system components are assigned.

TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Thus.TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. Next. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler. and select the system. press Tab. click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. you create the return piping system. the boiler (the parent) to downstream. 202 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . all other components are unavailable. The organization is from upstream. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. This display indicates that the new system is selected. and click Select to select the system. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. Notice that you can select only valid system components.

Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator. select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools. Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. These listings represent the systems that you just created. and cleared from the Options Bar. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children). and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators. click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. Creating the Piping Systems | 203 . expand Piping. 14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 9 On the Options Bar. and select the boiler to assign TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. 13 Right-click each category. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 The return system displays in red. (Select Equipment for System). So. Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser. click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. right-click. and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed. Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. Notice that (Create Hydronic Supply System) does not display because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them. and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings. click it to the return system.

drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan. you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts.Piping to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. Now that you logically connected the piping system components. or even without pipe being drawn. Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection. The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. 17 If you want to save your work. Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. Open the i Creating Pipe Runs. and click Select. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. In a later exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Save. click the Training Files icon. 204 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems. 18 In the Save As dialog. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components. enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. and double-click 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler.15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators. in the next exercise.

press Tab to highlight the system and select it.Piping view). click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. Creating Pipe Runs | 205 . the return system that logically connects the components display in red. and click OK. you can place the cursor over a radiator. You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it. The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. and then select Mechanical Equipment. Then. click Check None. you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar. Notice that the radiators.Piping view range highlight. the boiler. 5 On the Options Bar. This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components.Notice that all components that are in the 2 . (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 . 3 On the Options Bar. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. 4 In the Filter dialog. click Layout Path.

6 In the Select a System dialog.IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). and select solution 4 of 4. do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type. You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators. The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools. You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. ■ Click (Next Solution). You will need to select a system to create the layout. ■ Verify that 0" is specified for Slope. NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. This option slopes the entire pipe layout. Enter 1 0 for Inset. select Hydronic Supply 1 and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. It does not reference the architecture. ■ 206 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . You can select each system in the dialog to view it. 7 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. The system displays in red. then the Select a System dialog will open. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. verify that Solutions is selected.

The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 14 Click OK. For more information. structural beams. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. you create the supply pipe run 1 foot from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall). do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. Enter -1 3 for Offset. Later in this exercise. you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run. Using this inset. you now modify the layout path. This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 10' 9" in the level 1 plenum space. duct. NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view. Creating Pipe Runs | 207 . verify that Main is selected. you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall. 11 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. Next. 9 On the Options Bar. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). Enter -1' 3" for Offset. 10 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and other obstacles. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 12 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 13 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. click Settings. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. refer to Help. or architecture. select Branch. After configuring the pipe conversion settings.

The layout path is located under the radiators. 17 Using the drag control. 208 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall. zoom the view. A drag control displays.Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 15 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as the layout path. and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall. 16 In the drawing area.

Ignore the no auto-route solution warning. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise.18 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall. The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings Creating Pipe Runs | 209 . TIP Use the Ctrl key to select both the main and the branch line. 19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Layout.

210 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . or manually modify the pipe. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Either relocate the system components. Change the geometry display 20 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 201. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected. and is not part of the system.are automatically inserted. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components. For example. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution. or offset elevations are incorrect.

22 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. To turn off hidden lines.Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. select Fine for Detail Level. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser. Some pipes are hidden causing a gap. 21 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area). Creating Pipe Runs | 211 . If a pipe is hidden by an object. This is caused by the hidden line setting.

you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. 25 Press Delete to delete the selection. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. Additionally.TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later. Modify the pipe run 23 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings. On the View Control Bar. select Coarse for single line display. The design requires 2 zones. 212 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Instead of moving the pipe. Medium for 2-line duct display. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. So. or Fine for 2-line pipe display. and click to select them. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red. 24 Place the cursor over the pipe. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 1 inch diameter. Next.

and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). 29 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter. If the pipes had different diameters.Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted. 27 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe). 28 On the Options Bar. width. select 1" for D: (diameter). The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 1" indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. the diameter Creating Pipe Runs | 213 . 26 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. and click to select it. Next. NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. and click Modify on the Design Bar. The diameter of the main and branches change to 1 inch. you modify the supply pipe run diameter. the logical connection (or system) is still intact. 30 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight.

Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment.would not display. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. 32 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights. IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. Check connectivity 31 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. The first time you press Tab. If the entire network does not highlight. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. fittings. then you know that a disconnect exists. you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators. 214 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Next. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection. and equipment. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. press Tab 3 times.

create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system. Verify that 0" is specified for Slope.After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted. This allows you to better see disconnects. Create the level 2 return pipe run 34 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run. 33 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run. and enter -1' 9" for both the main and branch offsets. This places the pipes at a 10' 3" elevation in the level 1 plenum space.Piping view. verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. Creating Pipe Runs | 215 . Select Perimeter solution 4. For pipe conversion settings. you create the return pipe run. create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 . Next. Enter 2' 0" for Inset. you can click to select them.

enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name. Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects. 216 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path. The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides. Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 1". navigate to the folder of your choice.■ In the Layout Path tool. Remember. do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs. click File menu ➤ Save. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The level 2 return pipe run is as shown. Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view. 36 In the Save As dialog. 35 If you want to save your work. and click Save. Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. Use the same method to correct any disconnects.

1 In the Project Browser. converted fittings.In this exercise. you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. In the next exercise. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it. corrected disconnects. Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the i Resolving Pipe Interference. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. click the Training Files icon. You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building. and double-click 2 .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. You checked connectivity. Resolving Pipe Interference | 217 . You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators.Piping to make it the active view. you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs.

you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. The first click specifies the section head. 218 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell.Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. click Zoom in Region. and the second click specifies the section tail. Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Section. After you add the section. You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. 5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. 4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell and click to specify the section head location.

7 On the Design Bar. NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above.A new section view named Section 3 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. click Modify. 6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell. Resolving Pipe Interference | 219 .

11 On the View Control Bar. 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. 10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 3 view.The section head and tail display. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. 220 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections. select Piping for Sub Discipline. The section relocates under Piping. 8 In the Project Browser. select Fine for Detail Level. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Graphics. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). and click Properties. right-click Section 3.

17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active.The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase.Piping to make it the active view. mechanical equipment placement. TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs. you modify the pipe runs around the staircase. 15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs. 16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting. and after the connectors display. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run. and other aspects of your systems design. These connectors connect to the tee fittings. They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas. Resolving Pipe Interference | 221 . 14 Zoom in on the stairwell. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs. place the cursor over the top connector. Next.

and click to split the pipe approximately as shown. release the mouse button to reconnect it. and after the fitting end point snap displays. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap. you split the supply pipe segment. Next. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays. click (Split). 21 On the Edit toolbar. fittings. 22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell. The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open.18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting. This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe. Remember to always check connectivity after connecting. 23 Watch the listening dimensions. always connect to pipe segments. If you split the pipe. You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting. You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to the area outside the stairwell as shown. 222 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . NOTE When modifying pipe. 19 Zoom out. a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed. and select the return pipe segment again.

This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split. You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting. and press Delete to delete it. 24 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. and draw the pipe around the stairs. Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted. you convert a tee fitting. 25 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase. Next.Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. Zoom out the view. 26 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs. Resolving Pipe Interference | 223 .

verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. and then click Modify. 32 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted.27 Select the tee. right-click and select Delete. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and then select the two adjacent pipes to add an elbow. orientation. 33 Zoom out the view. 31 In the Type Selector. The new tee has a horizontal. and after the end point connector snap displays. 224 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 28 Select Trim. 29 Select the elbow and click on the upper plus (+) sign to convert the elbow to a tee. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. not vertical. and move the cursor to the left. click Pipe to open the Draw tool. 30 Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting.

click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment. 35 Draw the pipe down. NOTE When drawing pipe.34 Draw the pipe 12’ 0" to the left outside the stairwell. always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment. Resolving Pipe Interference | 225 . and after the connector snap displays. and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. click to specify the segment end point. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing. especially when connecting to mechanical equipment. 36 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right.

37 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool.The return pipe run is connected as shown. 226 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 39 Right-click the lower connector. 38 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu.

Optional: Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 42 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building). you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. However. If necessary. NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu. and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe. or width and height. The section displays in red. and adjust the view clip planes as shown. the pipe diameter.This activates the Draw tool. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 40 In the Type Selector. The amount of movement that these keys provide depends upon the zoom factor. draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown. Resolving Pipe Interference | 227 . 41 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned. 43 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell. use the arrow keys to move pipes to the exact location required. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector.

48 Zoom in on the stairwell.Piping to make it the active view. 44 Press ESC. you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. 52 Using the methods that you learned. select Fine for Detail Level. 51 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 5' 0" from its left connector. you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section. and split the supply pipe at 12' 0" from its left connector. 228 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 45 On the View Control Bar. 46 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs. Otherwise. you may get a false positive result. 47 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . 49 On the Edit toolbar. modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown. click (Split). 50 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe.Although this section was used for air systems. NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference. and double-click the section head to open the section view. watch the listening dimensions.

using the methods that you learned. 53 Again. Resolving Pipe Interference | 229 .You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them. draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown. Remember to watch for connector snaps.

navigate to the folder of your choice. You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height). the pipe type is also matched. Using these 2 methods. In the next exercise. 230 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 1 In the Project Browser. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. (2) Connect to a snap. always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. you used the Split. Then. 55 If you want to save your work. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. Using Create Similar. the start point. and offset are automatically specified. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). Draw. and click Save. Open the i Connecting Boiler. IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. diameter (or width and height). and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection.54 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. preferably a connector snap. enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. click the Training Files icon. click File menu ➤ Save. 56 In the Save As dialog. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. Remember that after you create pipe.rvtfile located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. In this exercise. and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar.

and double-click 2 . 7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown. Connecting the Boiler | 231 . the active view is tiled to the left. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. You will design in the 2 . 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active.Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. 3 In the Project Browser. the active view is the only open window. Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler. Note that if this option is unavailable. You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs. TIP When tiling 2 views.Piping to make it the active view. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session.

Enter -5 0 for Offset. 11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. watch the listening dimensions. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 14 Move the cursor to the left. click Pipe. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 12 Draw the pipe to the left. and click to specify the pipe segment end point at approximately 1' 6" from the boiler connection. and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector. and after the connector snap displays. 9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. click to specify the first pipe segment start point. This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 7 feet from level 1. 13 On the Options Bar. 232 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .8 Zoom in on the boiler.

TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display. and click to specify the end point. zoom the view and try again.) to separate snap increments. In a later exercise. 16 On the Options Bar. after listening dimensions display. you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active. you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment. You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). 15 Draw the pipe up to 3’ 0". 10' 9" from level 1. TIP After entering a value in Options Bar. TIP When drawing pipe. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension. Remember to always use a semi-colon (. enter -1 3 for Offset. Connecting the Boiler | 233 .A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser.

18 Click Modify on the Design Bar. click to specify the pipe segment end point. and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. 234 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . The boiler supply connector pipe is created. 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe.17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. 20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors. and after the connector snap displays. 21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe. release the mouse button to connect to it.

The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab. Connecting the Boiler | 235 .The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run. 23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

Next. 236 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler. 26 Use the selection tool to draw a box around the tee to select it. 27 Click on the lower of the two plus (+) signs to convert the elbow to a horizontal tee. click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 24 With the windows tiled. you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run.

select the tee to display the connectors. Verify that -5' 0" is specified for Offset. 29 Click in the 2 . verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 32 On the Options Bar.Piping view to make it active. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu.28 In the 3D Piping view. enter 3 0 and press Enter. 33 Draw the pipe 2' 0" to the right and click to specify the segment end point. Connecting the Boiler | 237 . and the start point is automatically specified. Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view. 30 Zoom in on the tee. 31 In the Type Selector. 34 Draw the pipe up. right-click the right connector. and after listening dimensions display.

In a later exercise. click to specify the end point. enter -1 3 for Offset.This creates a 1 foot pipe segment. draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. you will place a circulator pump on this segment. 37 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. 36 With the Draw tool activated. 35 On the Options Bar. 38 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run. connect the right supply pipe run. 238 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and after the intersection and centerline snaps display.

40 Validate the pipe geometry.The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler. 39 Check connectivity. Connecting the Boiler | 239 .

Next. and the 2 . verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. and that Auto Connect is selected. 44 On the Options Bar. 43 In the Type Selector. 42 Select the boiler. zoom in on the boiler. 47 Draw the pipe to the left. you draw a 6 inch pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser. enter -1 9 for Offset. and enter 0 4 and press Enter. Optional: Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 41 With the windows tiled. 240 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 10' 3" from level 1. 45 Move the cursor up. 46 On the Options Bar. click the specify the end point.Next.Piping the active view. Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -11' -2" from level 2. verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter). and click Draw Pipe. you connect the boiler to the return pipe run. and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. and right-click the return connector. This places the return connection 10 inches above level 1.

and after the connector snap displays.48 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run. click to connect to the left return pipe run. Connecting the Boiler | 241 .

right-click the right connector. convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation.The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run. and click Draw Pipe. and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls. 50 Zoom in on the boiler. and click to specify the end point. 53 Draw the pipe 1' 0" to the right. 242 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 52 Select the tee fitting. 51 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned. 49 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool.

54 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run. click to specify the end point. Connecting the Boiler | 243 . and after the intersection and centerline snaps display.

The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed. 56 Click Modify on the Design Bar.55 Using the method that you learned. drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe. 244 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe. The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 57 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting.

Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes. click to specify the alignment reference point. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes. and after highlights. and then you select the point to align. in the 2 . Connecting the Boiler | 245 . you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes.Piping view. Next. 60 On the Tools toolbar.Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. 59 With the 2 . If the Tools toolbar is not available. First. IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process. click (Align).58 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. select the reference point where you want to align. 61 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe. click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools.

246 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return. 62 Move the cursor over the left return pipe. click to specify the point to align. and after the centerline highlights.

The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts.

63 Using the alignment method you just learned, align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe.

64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool.

Connecting the Boiler | 247

The aligned return pipes are as shown. Notice that the return pipe runs also are parametrically adjusted. This situation results because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that you aligned.

65 Place the cursor below the tee fitting, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.

66 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

248 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. 67 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 68 In the Save As dialog, enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. Finally, you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes. In the next exercise, you size the supply and return piping runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods
You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. Next, you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler, and after it highlights, press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler, and click to select them.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 249

The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red.

3 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sizing Method, select Friction, and enter 2.50 FT/100ft. Select And, and enter 8 FPS for Velocity. Under Constraints, select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Size is cleared. Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. Click OK.

The sized pipe runs are sized. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing.

250 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe. This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry.

8 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 9 In the Save As dialog, enter Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. In the next exercise, you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 251

Placing Circulator Pumps
In this exercise, you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing Circulator Pumps.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view.

Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.

You place the pumps in the 2 - Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view. Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 - Piping view, zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler. 7 On the Edit toolbar, click (Split).

8 Watch the listening dimensions, and make 2 splits on the left pipe 0' 3" from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown.

252 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting.

9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. 10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits. The selected pipe segment displays in red. 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment. Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted.

12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 13 In the Type Selector, select In-line Circulator : Standard. 14 Place the cursor between the pipe openings and click to place the circulator pump. 15 Select the pump and click Rotate on the toolbar. 16 Flip the pump so that the motor is on the left. 17 Click Align on the toolbar and select the middle of the pipe above and the middle of the circulator connector. NOTE You must align the pump correctly in order to connect it to the pipes above and below.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 253

18 TIP If you need to reposition the circulator pump, drag the pump away from the pipe, and then move it over the pipe opening, and watch for the centerline snaps. You can also use the cursor keys or the Move tool for precise placement. 19 Press ESC twice. 20 In the 3D Piping view, notice that the pump is not located near the selection point.

Actually, the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. You need to specify the pump offset. 21 In the 2 - Piping view, click the pump. The selected pump displays in red. 22 On the Options Bar, click .

You can also right-click the pump, and select Element Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter -5 0 for Offset. This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump. TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value, click the pipe segment. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset.

254 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

24 Click OK. The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment.

If the pump remains selected, click in the drawing area to clear the selection. Next, you connect the pump. TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. To clear the selection, you can click in the drawing area, click Modify on the Design Bar, or press ESC. 25 In the 2 - Piping view, click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. 26 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump, and after the connector snap displays, release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump.

Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump. 27 Press ESC to clear the selection.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 255

28 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above.

After connecting the pump, you need to check connectivity. 29 Place the cursor over the pump, and press TAB. The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

30 Using the methods that you just learned, connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe, and check connectivity. Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.

Next, you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top.

256 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

31 With the 2 - Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled, click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 32 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view.

33 Click the left pump to display rotation controls.

34 Click the rotation control on the right.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 257

The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right.

35 Using the method that you just learned, rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top. The in-line circulator pumps are rotated.

Assign the pumps to the supply system 36 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser. You can also press F9. 37 In the System Browser, do the following:
■ ■

Expand the Unassigned folder. Expand the Piping folder, right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system.

Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. As you learned in previous exercises, you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment, and so on) that you placed to a system. Immediately after placement, Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations. These unassigned components are located

258 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. After you assign the components to a system, they move to their respective system folder. You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system. 38 In the 3D Piping view, select the left supply pipe riser.

System tools display on the Options Bar. TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar.

39 On the Options Bar, click

(Edit System).

The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.

NOTE Do not click . You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system, such as VAV boxes, boilers and AC units. If you use this tool, the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder. 40 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System. System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 41 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 259

Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. 42 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System. 43 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 44 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar, and by clicking the rotation controls. Finally, you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. In the next exercise, you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure.

Inspecting Piping Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector, you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. You will inspect the hydronic supply system. 4 Select the boiler. System tools appear on the Options Bar. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system. NOTE To select a system, select any pipe segment, fitting, mechanical equipment, and so on that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, click

(Inspect).

6 In the Select a System dialog, select Hydronic Supply 1, and click OK. The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar. IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler, the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect.

260 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector activates, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number, flow, and pressure information including pressure loss. A tooltip also displays this system information. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. As you inspect, notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information. Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump, and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment.

Inspecting Piping Systems | 261

11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps, click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected, double-click the 3D Piping view, and inspect a fin-tube radiator.

Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector.

262 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 16 Using the methods that you learned, use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe, the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 17 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 18 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction, flow, and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you check the piping systems.

Checking Piping Systems
Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure, and for pipe sizing. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design, you need to validate them. In this exercise, you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project, and quickly target those systems that need attention. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Checking Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, double-click the 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Check Pipe Systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. A warning appears, but does apply to the piping system. The piping system is logically and physically valid. However, check system warnings may occur. As a tutorial exercise, you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Check Duct Systems. Warnings display. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty.”

Checking Piping Systems | 263

4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system, the pipe is now associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations, and for pipe sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators, all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system, Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them, thus assigning the components to a system. After you assign the system components to a system, Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors), and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. For example, you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. In the System Browser, the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. Next, you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. Then, you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems. Next, you confirm the system component assignments. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. Because you assigned all piping components, you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. 9 Right-click Default Return Air, and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components.

264 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The red lines represent the default logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.

TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views, otherwise, click Close. 10 Using the same methods, confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems, you confirm the piping system assignments. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 12 In the System Browser, collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply, and click Expand All. The supply system that you created, Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler, fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number.

Checking Piping Systems | 265

The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings. 17 In the Save As dialog. a boiler. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. In the lesson.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created. For additional practice. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. click File menu ➤ Save. Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe 266 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building. 3D. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system. the creation and modification methods remained the same. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. and section views. navigate to the folder of your choice. specify 9' 9" for the supply and 9' 3" for the return pipe offset elevation. 16 If you want to save your work. In this tutorial. Finally. circulator pumps. 15 Using the methods that you learned. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. and click Save. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan. In this exercise. Design the system in the 1 . it is a valid system without problems. For pipe offset. and fin-tube radiators. Depending on your air systems design.14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1.

Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems. and see the results dynamically in views and design documents. This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2009.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. Explore different system designs. parametrically modify those designs. Checking Piping Systems | 267 . The completed mechanical systems are included in the i Completed Mechanical Systems. This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling).connections and creating logical systems.

268 .

To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson.autodesk. and select i Office Building.rvt. However. go to http://www. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. If the tutorial datasets are not present. 269 . with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. After finishing each exercise.Electrical Systems 6 In this tutorial. In this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. if the link is lost. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. you learn to create electrical systems using a linked architectural model of a building project. and create schedules that you will need to design the electrical systems for your project. and select the component families that you will use in the plan. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. click Reload From. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you can choose to save your work. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. However. Planning Electrical Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. In this lesson you specify electrical settings. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings.The electrical settings determine the voltages. and in the right pane. has been set to 10' 6" for the building used with these exercises. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels. in the Element Properties dialog for Spaces. and demand factors that you will use in your project. Lighting. For example. the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in spaces are above the ceiling level. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families. power distribution systems. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. click the Training Files icon. click Add (below the table). power. Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Insulation Max Size Value CU-THWN Copper 75 THWN 500 270 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . distribution systems. 3 Click Wiring Types. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and demand factors that are applied in the design. Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. expand Wiring. Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits. in the left pane. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog. wiring. and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design. Later. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. and ceiling plans for each have been prepared by duplicating architectural views. wiring. Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages. the Limit Offset. For this reason. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Electrical Views. then applying the appropriate template to each plan: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits.

00V 260. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition.00 V 250. many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V. Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 240 277 480 Value 120.00 V Maximum 130.00 V 220. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions.00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 271 .00 V Minimum 110.00 V 240. click Voltage Definitions. By specifying a range.00 V 480.00 V 490.00V 280.00 V 460.0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view.00 V 220.00 V 200.00V 277.Parameter Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value 1. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. For example.00 V 208.

Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system. 8 In the right pane. you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480. 7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. click Distribution Systems. verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 120/240 Single 480/277 Wye Phase Three Single Three Configuration Wye None Wye Wires 4 3 4 L-L 208 240 480 L-G 120 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices. 272 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . For example. even though this is physically impossible. NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values.

9 Click Demand Factors. The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3. Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that. You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range. at any given time. leave the default settings as shown here.000VA 10. More Than and Less Than values define the range for the associated Demand Factor: ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads. Power.NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4. For example.000VA.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA. 10 Click OK. or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage.000VA. applying different Demand Factors to Lighting. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range. this type of system (High. Red. Preparing the Electrical Plan | 273 . HVAC. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads. or Other systems in your project based on their load.000VA 3. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10. For this exercise. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load. You can specify one or more Demand Factors.000VA 10.

In this exercise.rfa.rfa. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Panelboard folder. in the Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise. and established the parameters for your wiring.Surface. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and click Open.480-208Y120 . and so on). you can load from the components from that location. its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project.NEMA Type 2. 16 In the Project Browser.Surface.rfa Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . As an alternative. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.rfa family. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. 13 Select Lighting Switches. and load the following families: ■ ■ Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . expand Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Devices. conference rooms. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. voltages. Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building.Load component families 11 NOTE The components used throughout this tutorial have been copied from the Imperial Library to the i families sub-folder.rfa 18 Using the same method. selected components for your electrical systems. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. and demand factors. Later. containing several switch types. 14 Using the same method. you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. expand Families. 19 Open the Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Fixtures folder and load the Troffer Corner Insert. has also been added under Lighting Device. An Electrical Fixtures ➤ Duplex Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design. restrooms.480V MCB .208V MLO . and load Dry Type Transformer . distribution systems. 12 In the Open dialog. As you loaded each of the component families. 17 Using the same method. Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of spaces (offices.rfa. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. and load Duplex Receptacle. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Transformer folder. 274 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Defining Required Lighting Levels on page 274. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. In this case the key style is the type of space and. 15 Click Open. A Lighting Devices ➤ Lighting Switches folder.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. as described below. select Electrical. 4 Click OK twice. double-click 1 . For Discipline. move the cursor over the office in the upper-left corner. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser. you can look at the properties for one of the spaces. Under Parameter Data. select Electrical-Lighting. click the Training Files icon. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Spaces under Electrical . click Add. click to select the space. enter Required Lighting Level for Name. and when the cross-hairs display. select Illuminance. To verify this. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type.rvt. Under Categories. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement. For Type. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the spaces within your project. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 275 . Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Lighting Levels. 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan.Lighting in the Space Element Properties dialog. select Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. For Group. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog.Lighting to make it the active view. Select Instance.Open the provided dataset. The new parameter you have just created applies to all spaces in the project.

Lighting category. The new rows are added with 1 through 8 as the default Key Names. You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each space. 8 Click Cancel. You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical . Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar. enter Space Lighting Requirements. there are many spaces in this project that have similar lighting requirements. and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on space type. select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list. 276 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Spaces for Category. Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. ■ ■ ■ The Shedule Properties dialog displays. In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. For Key Name. Click OK. 12 Click OK. However. and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list. This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. enter Lighting Levels. Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the space component. one for each type of space in the building. NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components). click New 8 times to add 8 rows in the key schedule. 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width.7 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can double-click column dividers to auto-fit column width to its content. Click Schedule keys. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each space type. click (Properties). For Name. The key schedule displays in the drawing area.

and for Lighting Levels parameter. click View Properties and. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 277 . the Key Schedule should looks like this: TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. then right-click. click .Enter a space type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of spaces in the project. Assign space keys to the spaces in the project 15 In the Project Browser. and select Open Office. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. 16 Zoom in on the large open area (not the main entrance) in the center of the floor plan.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. in the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. You can change the sort keys for the schedule. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click the 1 . scroll down to the Identity Data category. In the Project Browser. and click Element Properties. under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter. according to the values in the following table: Space Type Private Office Open Office Main Entrance Lounge Restroom Conference Elec/Mech Stair/Circulation Required Lighting Level (fc) 30 45 45 25 30 35 20 20 When completed. right-click in the Space Lighting Requirements schedule. 17 Move the cursor over the space until a cross-hair displays.

and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected spaces.Lighting 1 . While pressing Ctrl.Lighting 1 . and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 45 fc.Lighting 1 . 20 Click OK. Office).Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .19 Scroll up to the Electrical .Lighting 1 .Lighting. select multiple spaces of the same type (for example.Lighting 1 . 21 Using the same method. continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in 1 .Lighting Number 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 Name Office 101 Office 102 Office 103 Open 104 Mens Room 105 Elec/Mech 106 Ladies Room 107 Office 108 Office 109 Office 110 Office 111 Office 112 Office 113 Stairwell 114 Office 115 Office 116 Office 117 Key Name Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 278 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Lighting and apply Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple spaces of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . the value that you entered for this space type in the key schedule. then open 2 . then right-click one of the selections.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . Level 1 .Lighting category.Lighting 1 . The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Space Lighting Requirements key schedule.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .

Lighting 2 . and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . For example.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the spaces in your project. Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values Defining Required Lighting Levels | 279 .Lighting 2 . You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component.Lighting Number 121 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 Name Main Entrance 121 Office 201 Office 202 Office 203 Open 204 Mens Room 205 Elec/Mech 206 Ladies Room 207 Lounge 208 Office 209 Office 210 Office 211 Office 212 Stairwell 213 Conference Room 214 Office 215 Office 216 Key Name Main Entrance Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish.Lighting 2 . Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels on page 280.Level 1 .Lighting 2 . if required.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. you could create a key schedule named Space Variables.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .

as described below. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. selecting a space type for your new Space Variables parameter in a space’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule. In this exercise you will create a space color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. For Color Scheme. select Spaces. for Name. The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below. Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. 280 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. select Required Lighting 10 Click OK.according to space type. and click 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click Edit/New. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. 7 Click OK. 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ (Duplicate). 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Title Text. click the Training Files icon. and click Element Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the space components.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. click Color Scheme Legend. Open the provided dataset. Space color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document. specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. double-click the 1 . and click OK to dismiss the alert message. 15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. select Show Title. For Space Type. Consequently. select Underline. and place it in the drawing. 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Color Fills. 14 Click OK twice. 6 For Color. enter Required Lighting Levels. select Required Lighting Level. select Spaces for Category. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Title. enter Required Lighting. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click OK.

19 Click File menu ➤ Close. or for any parameter that you want to create for a space (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise). You can have more than one color scheme in the project. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you create a space lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/.Lighting floor plan the active view. This is because the color scheme is a type within the project. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 281 . activate the color scheme as you did for 1 . 17 Using the same method. 18 You can save the open file if you wish.5 fc range specified in the schedule. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for spaces. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281.Lighting. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each space against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases. as described below.16 Make the 2 . Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. but only one per view. Open the provided dataset. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 20 Proceed to the next exercise.

5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Spaces. For Type. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. For Discipline. For Formula. select Electrical. double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane Create a new schedule parameter 4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog.Required Lighting Level. Verify that Ascending is selected. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Illuminance. enter Lighting Delta. enter Average Estimated Illumination . 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Schedule Lighting Requirements.rvt. 2 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select Number. click the Training Files icon. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK. click Calculated Value. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. scroll down the Available fields list. 282 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Create space lighting analysis schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Space Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Name.

For Rounding. click the red color chip. 16 Click OK. For Units. 18 Click OK. 11 Click the Background Color chip. under Fields. 19 You can save the open file if you wish. under fields. 17 Using the same method. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Field. For Test.8 On the Formatting tab. under Basic colors. 12 In the Color dialog. verify that Fixed is selected. select Ceiling Reflectance. and click Field Format. select Not Between. 14 On the Formatting tab. select 2 decimal places. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 283 . select Lighting Delta. For Value. specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields. enter -5 fc and +5 fc in the text boxes. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 15 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select Lighting Delta. 9 Click Conditional Format. 13 Click OK twice.

and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each space’s lighting requirement. Place the initial lighting fixture 1 In the Project Browser. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each of the occupied spaces. expand Schedules/Quantities. Name. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. This is because the value is not within the +/. and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. 284 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . As a result. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the spaces as 0. However. 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column. Wall Reflectance. and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column. electrical equipment. there is no required lighting level specified. click the Training Files icon. Open the provided dataset. these spaces appear in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.20 Click File menu ➤ Close. and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. and double-click Space Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. Once the equipment is in place. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Adding Lighting Fixtures. and make connections to electrical equipment. As you select and place lighting fixtures.5 fc range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. NOTE Space components are placed in chases and plenums to permit reliable heating and cooling load analysis. Adding Lighting Fixtures In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project. In this exercise. and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. Floor Reflectance. you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. NOTE Right-click a heading. Average Estimated Lighting. Designing the Electrical System In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.rvt. as described below. and these areas will not be lighted. you will create power and lighting circuits. Designing the Electrical System on page 284. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the spaces. Only the Number. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance.

It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location. You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid. In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection. NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. double-click 1 . click Lighting Fixture. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. 10 In the Type Selector. and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. click Tile.Ceiling Elec view. select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 3 Lamp. and arrange the windows as shown. 9 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 8 In the 1 . Adding Lighting Fixtures | 285 .Ceiling Elec to make it the active view. 11 With the cursor in the space in the upper-left corner of the plan. click Close Hidden Windows. click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown. 7 On the Windows menu. under Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans.4 On the Windows menu. and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view.

286 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture. select it. click to specify the start point.12 Click Modify. and when Endpoint displays. click (Move). 14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture. and on the Toolbar. 15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture. and click when Intersection displays.

select Multiple. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 287 .5 fc.In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of level 1. (Copy). as shown. the Lighting Delta for Office 101 is closer to the required +/. and on the toolbar. Copy and place additional lighting fixtures 16 Select the lighting fixture. This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point. click 17 On the Options Bar. 18 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point.

288 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . The Average Estimated Illumination for Office 101. press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection.Ceiling Elec. but is still not within the +/.5 fc range. you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each space with a 2-lamp fixture. 102. TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. Point by point analysis is not currently supported. and 103 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 30 fc. so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these spaces. If you select a component inadvertently. and in the Type Selector. select one of the lighting fixtures in each space. select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 2Lamp. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations.Check the illumination levels against the Space Lighting Analysis schedule 19 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. Change lighting fixture type 20 In 1 . To adjust the illumination level downward.

check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. Use the Space Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 should appear similar to those shown below along with the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.21 Again.Ceiling Elec views. 22 Using the same method. placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset. and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range. Plenum and chase spaces will be blank. Level 1 NOTE Lighting fixtures were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical spaces.5 fc range. You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise. only the Mechanical/Electrical spaces (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. When you are finished. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset. and go on to the next exercise. continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1 . Adding Lighting Fixtures | 289 . The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/.Ceiling Elec and 2 .

Level 2 23 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. 290 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . right-click one of the headings. and click Unhide All Columns.

verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 5 Using the same method. 4 Click OK twice. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. Open the provided dataset. and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281. 11 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the space as shown. your Lighting Delta column for all of the spaces should be white. as described below. click the Training Files icon. 8 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Lighting. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans. and click to place the switch. click Device. under Instance Parameters. under Schemes for the Spaces Category. Placing Lighting Switches on page 291. click (none). Place switches in spaces 6 In the Project Browser. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. 9 On the Options Bar. Placing Lighting Switches In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. turn off the color scheme on level 2. 24 You can save the open file if you wish. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Switches. In this exercise. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click 1 . 10 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of space 101.rvt.With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces. double-click 1 . and click Properties. Turn off the color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. Placing Lighting Switches | 291 . click in the Value column for Color Scheme.Lighting to make it the active view. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.

and in the Type Selector. and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown. Level 1 13 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.Lighting view as shown.12 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining spaces in the 1 . 292 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 14 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. click Device. select Lighting Switches : Three Way.

17 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown. 16 In the Type Selector.15 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan. and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office. and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. Placing Lighting Switches | 293 . select Lighting Switches : Four Way. as shown.

294 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . double-click 2 .18 In the open office area. 20 In the Project Browser. 22 Place a 3-way switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown. select Lighting Switches : Three Way. click Device. 19 Click Modify.Lighting to make it the active view. and in the Type Selector. place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown. 21 On the Design Bar.

On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown. and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office. click Device. Placing Lighting Switches | 295 . placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset. as shown. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset.23 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan. and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. in the Type Selector. and go on to the next exercise. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. 24 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 296 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Power to make it the active view. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Placing Power Receptacles on page 296. 1 In the Project Browser. as described below. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. Hide lighting components and specify view ranges 2 Right-click in the drawing area. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Placing Power Receptacles In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. and double-click 1 .rvt. Open the provided dataset.Level 2 25 You can save the open file if you wish. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Receptacles. and click View Properties. click the Training Files icon. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

and edit the View Range to select Associated Level (Level 2). select Duplex Receptacle : Standard. Place wall-hosted receptacles 11 In the 1 . 15 In the left side of the plan.3 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. clear Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 4 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. edit the Visibility/Graphics Overrides for the view to hide lighting fixtures and lighting devices. right-click 2 . 10 Using the same method. under Primary Range. click Edit. on the Model Categories tab. and specify the top of the view range as 10' 0". place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown. and for Offset. 8 Click OK twice. for Top. Placing Power Receptacles | 297 . and click Properties. 9 In the Project Browser. under Instance Parameters. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll down and. select Associated Level (Level 1). zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. and click Edit. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. 5 Click OK. click Device. enter 10' 0".Power plan view. 13 In the Type Selector. including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas. under Instance Properties.Power. 7 In the View Range dialog. 16 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown. scroll down to View Range.

1-Power 298 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

click Device. and place a receptacle on the floor as shown. Placing Power Receptacles | 299 . 20 On the Options Bar. click for Plane. and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. double-click 1 . The current level is selected by default. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard.Power. 19 In the Type Selector. (Place on Work Plane).2-Power Place floor-hosted receptacles 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office. 18 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.

select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure. Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures. 23 Select the receptacle and click plane (within the space). it is important that the connector be within the space to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design. 24 On the Toolbar. 27 Draw a pick box around the 4 floor-based receptacles. place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles along the right side of the Level 1 open office. 300 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor. click (Copy). 26 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point. This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. In the next steps. as shown. you will flip the work plane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the work plane. select Multiple.22 Click Modify. its connector is located below the level of the work plane. When placing a receptacle on a work plane. click . as shown. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles. (Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the work 25 On the Options Bar.

Placing Power Receptacles | 301 .28 Draw a pick box around the 2 floor-based receptacles. place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles below. select Multiple 29 Using the previous procedure. as shown. and click on the Options Bar. and to the left of the men’s restroom. as shown. .

302 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.Power. open 2 .Power floor receptacles.Power view. Select all 1 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports on page 303.30 Using the same procedure. then copy and paste them in the 2 . place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2 . 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.Power view. TIP You can select all of the floor-hosted receptacles in the 1 . 31 You can save the open file if you wish. and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View.Power as shown.

5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and select Spaces. the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design. you can refer to this report rather than having to measure spaces and count fixtures. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Power & Lighting Usage. It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components. as described below. 4 Click OK. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Open the provided dataset. A schedule is created similar to the one shown. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Usage Reports. select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area 6 Click OK. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports | 303 . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. With the introduction of local energy codes.rvt. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Name. scroll down the Category list. click the Training Files icon.In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. under Available Fields. because it is quite common in Revit MEP.

8 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review. Placing Electrical Equipment on page 304. The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model. Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 304 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). and work toward the higher voltage.7 You can save the open file if you wish. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 9 Proceed to the next exercise.

Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Placing Electrical Equipment | 305 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. select Electrical Equipment. select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types.Open the provided dataset. 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical space between the 2 restrooms. select 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : 45kVA. under Instance Parameters. This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building. click Modify and select the panel you just placed. and double-click 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Loads. Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector.Power. as described below.Loads category. click . 5 On the Design Bar. and click to place the panel as shown. Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected. scroll down the Instance Parameters and. under Electrical . Add a transformer 10 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.Surface : 250A. and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical space to the right of the panel as shown. select 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 6 On the Options Bar. and for Panel Name. click Electrical Equipment. 11 In the Type Selector. for Distribution Sys. Right-click the panel. TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Electrical Equipment. scroll down to the Electrical . 3 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. click Element Properties. enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel. click the Training Files icon. select 480/277 Wye.rvt. 9 Click OK.

21 On the Options Bar. Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar. under Instance Parameters. Since this is a transformer. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System. under Instance Parameters. select Electrical Equipment. enter L-1. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and place the panel to the right of the transformer. for Distribution Sys. 18 In the Type Selector. 23 Click OK.12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. enter T1. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 16 Click OK. and for Panel Name. select 120/208 Wye. 19 Click Modify. 20 Select the panel you just placed. select 120/208 Wye. scroll down to the Electrical . scroll down to the Electrical . you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter.Surface : 100A. select 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . click . For Panel Name. and on the Options Bar.Loads category. 306 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 14 On the Options Bar. select 480/277 Wye. for Distribution Sys.Loads category. and on the Options Bar.

because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel. and select panel H-2 for Panel. select panel L-2. 28 On the Options Bar. 27 Click (Select Panel). select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer.Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method.Surface : 100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component. In this case you are going to select something other than a panel. click (Create Power Circuit). . The temporary circuit displays Placing Electrical Equipment | 307 . click as shown. The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer.Surface : 250A named H-2 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: 45kVA named T2 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . . 29 Select the transformer T2. Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view. A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit. including the Secondary Distribution System for T2. and click 30 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical space in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

and select the T1 transformer as the panel. 36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. 37 Close the 2-Power view.31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area. select the H-2 panel. 308 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . . click 35 On the Option Bar. and on the Options Bar. and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with. A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. 34 In the 2-Power view. click . 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces side-by-side. 38 On the Options Bar. and click 39 Click . and select the MDP panel. . select the L-1 panel. indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. The temporary circuit is displayed as shown.

Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). as described below. Creating Power Circuitry on page 309. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the provided dataset. lighting. click the Training Files icon. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Power Circuitry | 309 . click . Circuits are used for power. and click 41 On the Options Bar. and select the MDP panel. and data systems. . 42 You can save the open file if you wish. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.40 Select the T1 transformer. You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

Power to make it the active view. Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. load (180 VA). The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit. 2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. 4 On the Options Bar. select all the receptacles in the corner office. 3 While pressing Ctrl. You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise. The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. click . and double-click 1 . For now. 5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner office. leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit. Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit.rvt.■ Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Power Circuitry. 1 In the Project Browser. and voltage (120 V). 310 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1).

6 Click Modify. click for this circuit. and select panel L-1 as the panel NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar. The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit. 8 On the Options Bar. You use the Specify Circuit Information to specify the distribution system parameters for the circuit. You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types. Creating Power Circuitry | 311 . press Tab. NOTE When all of the devices for the circuit have their distribution system specified as instance parameters. and press Tab.A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type. 7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner office so that it is highlighted. 9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the office. and click to select the circuit again. the Specify Circuit Information dialog is displayed. Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. (Select a Panel for the Circuit).

The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components. 12 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. Wire Type and Rating. all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter. 312 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 11 On the Options Bar. click (Edit Circuit). will be discussed in a later exercise. When editing a circuit. Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. neutral. The editable parameters. and ground wiring. and then scroll back down to Wire Size. 1-#10. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit. respectively for this circuit. click (Circuit Properties).10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. 1-#6. 1-#12. The currently specified values are 1-#12. The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit. In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. 14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter. 1-#12. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. which are the wire sizes for the load. change the value from 20A to 50A. notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group.

click . 25 On the Options Bar. click . 22 Click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. click . If you select L-1 in the drawing. Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. as previously described. zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again. 17 Continue selecting receptacles. Creating Power Circuitry | 313 . 16 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. and add it to panel L-1. 26 Continue creating circuits. click The circuit is created. and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18.15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes. Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1. 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well. 24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. These will be connected in a later exercise. and try to select panel L-1. You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell. . 19 Close the warning message.Loads category. creating power circuits. and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown. click . and click Element Properties. click Cancel. and then select panel L-1. and select panel L-1. scroll down to the Electrical . and assigning them to panel L-1 on a space-by-space basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building.

In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits. you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits. As you saw in the previous exercise. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires on page 314. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click (Edit Circuits on Panel). 29 Select the L-1 panel. 28 Double-click 1 . 314 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . In the Edit Circuits dialog. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel. Adding wiring to a project is optional. You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project. These will be connected in a later exercise. you have assigned only 17. 30 Click OK. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. create circuits in the 2 .Power view and assign them to panel L-2. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Increase the number of circuits on panel L-2 to 18. notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves. you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project. and on the Options Bar.Power to make it the active view. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close.27 Using the same procedures. Finally.

re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. click Check None to clear all the check boxes. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires. Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected. select Electrical Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. for View Range. select Associated Level. 12 On the Options Bar. click the Training Files icon. enter Electrical Lighting Plan. 7 In the Project Browser. in the Value column. and for Offset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and in the New View Template dialog. 6 Scroll down to Sub-Discipline.Lighting. and for Offset. 13 In the Filter dialog. Create lighting circuits 9 In the Project Browser. under View Properties. Create an Electrical Lighting Plan template for Lighting Views 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates.Lighting to make it the active view. double-click 1 . and click OK. as described below. select Electrical Lighting Plan. 8 In the Apply View Template dialog. Click 3 In the right pane.rvt. for Top. 2 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ For Show Type. select Level Above. for Level. enter -1' 0" For Bottom. as shown. select Associated Level. select <all>. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 315 . 10 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible. click (Filter). enter 3' 0" Under View Depth. For Names. enter 3' 0" 5 Click OK. 4 In View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Lighting. click Edit in the Value column. and for Offset. and click OK. 11 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything. and click OK. and click Apply View Template. right-click 1 . under Names.Open the provided dataset.

14 On the Options Bar. click . 15 Close the message window and. click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation. This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A). 316 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 16 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown.

lighting fixtures. Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 19 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall. click circuit. Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls. you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. Later. when you create wiring manually. This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown. click (Filter). move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches.17 On the Options Bar. or floors. select Wires. 18 On the Options Bar. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 317 . ground) in the wire run. Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches. The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog. ceilings. 20 On the Options Bar. In this step. and then select panel MDP as the panel for the . you can specify splined wiring. and click the switch to select the switches. press Tab. and click OK. In the next steps. Splined wiring is similar to arc. click . When creating wires. you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. you created arc type wiring. click Check None. click . You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex. neutral. 21 In the Filter dialog. as in this step. but with an additional vertex.

right-click the MDP panel. for Hot Conductors. enter 2. under Instance Parameters. and click OK. change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 22. click . 25 In the Mech/Elec space. NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the open office and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. 26 In the Element Properties dialog.22 On the Options Bar.Loads category. and assign each circuits to panel MDP. under Instance Parameters. one neutral conductor. and click OK. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors. and click Element Properties. When this occurs. 24 Using the same method. 28 Create permanent wiring for each circuit. scroll down to the Electrical . and click OK. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 318 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . enter 2 as the value. and one ground conductor). 27 Create lighting circuits for the private offices. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.

31 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2. under Instance Parameters. conference room. 32 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices. change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit. lounge. and in the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 319 . close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. and restrooms in the 2 .Lighting. These will be connected in a later exercise. Creating Switch Systems on page 320.Lighting view.Loads category. Otherwise. continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1 .29 For more practice. and assign each circuit to panel H-2. scroll down to the Electrical . assign the circuit to panel H-2. then creating lighting circuits in 2 .Lighting view. 30 Right-click panel H-2.

a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Switch Systems.rvt. In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2.33 You can save the open file if you wish. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit. and panel information. Open the provided dataset. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Switch Systems on page 320. fixtures. you will create a space schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires.Lighting to make it the active view. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Training Files icon. Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project. After creating the switch systems on Level 1. but does not prevent you from doing so. as described below. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and specify switch IDs for switches. assign lighting fixtures to switches. and double-click 1 . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 320 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 35 Proceed to the next exercise.

and click to select everything in the system. After creating the switch system. press Tab. you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area. click (Filter) to select only the lighting fixtures.2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). click The Switch System toolbar is activated. 4 Click (Select Switch for System). 3 On the Options Bar. When you have selected as many fixtures as you want. click (Create Switch System). (Remove From System). (Edit Switch System). and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures. you can highlight one of the lighting fixtures. With Multiple selected on the Options Bar. Then. TIP Because all of the lighting fixtures in the open office are part of the same lighting system. on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. select The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system. ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding switches). click Finish to confirm your selections. Creating Switch Systems | 321 . click Multiple. 6 On the Switch System toolbar. 5 With the switch system still selected.

enter North Stairwell . under Instance Properties. 12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. 8 On the Options Bar. click Finish. 322 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and click OK. click Finish. and click OK. for Switch ID. (Switch Properties). click outside the ladies’ restroom. 13 On the Options Bar. 9 Click (Switch Properties).1st Floor. under Instance Properties.West. The Number of Fixtures field now displays 27 fixtures remaining in the system. enter Main Entrance . 15 Click 16 Click . click . The Switch ID is updated on the Options Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. for Switch ID. 11 On the Switch System toolbar. and select the switch on the wall 14 On the Switch System toolbar. (Select Switch).

select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. and restrooms in the 1 . and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office. 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties. Click OK. scroll down the Available fields list. stairwell. Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. click . and for Heading. select Number. 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. and on the Options Bar. enter Switch Systems. create switch systems for the remaining private offices. 20 Click . click Finish. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 21 Using the same method. select Number from the Fields list. enter Space Number.Lighting view. 27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories. 26 On the Formatting tab.18 On the Switch System toolbar. Verify that Ascending is selected. For Name. Creating Switch Systems | 323 . select Spaces. Verify that Schedule building components is selected.

The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. Specify Open Area . The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Create separate systems for the lounge. and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities. Otherwise. scroll down the Available fields list. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice. restrooms. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the space containing that system. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. and private offices. 324 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325.Lighting view. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. conference room. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close.2nd Floor for the switch ID. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. 30 For more practice. continue creating switch systems in the 2 .

3 In the corner office.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. as described below. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 325 . You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run. generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining spaces along the left side of the plan. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring.Power to make it the active view. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325. and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Using the same method. click the Training Files icon. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it. 2 Zoom in on the office at the upper-left corner of the plan. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the provided dataset. and double-click 1 . click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit.

verify that (Arced Wire) is selected. click Wire. and delete both home runs. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top office to specify the start point for the wire.6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper offices. 8 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper offices are visible. 326 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

11 Click in the open area near the door for the office to specify the second point for the wire. 12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle office to specify the endpoint for the wire. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 327 . as shown.

Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run. create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower offices. your layout should look similar to the following: Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel. Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run. When completed. 13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower offices are visible.NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run. The direction will be corrected. if necessary. As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run. when the wiring is completed. and using the same method. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the 328 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

select Insert Vertex. and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. and a shared safety ground). the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors. and click. a shared neutral. as the circuits in each office was added to the wiring run. In the previous steps. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 329 . 18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom. and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. 14 Click Modify. 17 Right click the wire run. drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector.number of hot conductors. 16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower office as shown. Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower office.

19 For additional practice. Completed 1-Power 330 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . adjusting its shape according to the vertex location. The wire behaves like a spline. you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1 . or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise.Power and 2 .Power views.Vertices let you route wires in your project views. Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected.Power to make it the active view. Checking Your Design | 331 . click the Training Files icon. Checking Your Design on page 331. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. as described below. and double-click 1 . In this exercise. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Checking Your Design. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the provided dataset.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows.

4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser.2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner office is visible. and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline. 6 Right-click a column heading in the System Browser. 5 Right-click a column heading. expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. 8 In the System Browser. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area. 332 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 7 In the System Browser. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser. release the mouse button. and click Select. each with a load of 180VA. and when the preview expands to the width of the window. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1. drag it to the bottom of the drawing area.

Lighting views and close any windows. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown. Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser. and expand Unassigned. and 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 2. The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP).Lighting and 2 . 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 1. collapse Power.Power. 10 Open the 1 . Checking Your Design | 333 . 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area.The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1 . a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell.

In the System Browser.Lighting view. click . You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level. and on the Options Bar. (Add to Circuit). 17 On the Edit Circuits toolbar. 16 Click the title bar of the 2 . the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2.Lighting view have not yet been connected. click Finish.Lighting view. and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. clear Multiple. click 15 On the Options Bar. to 334 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . until the power circuit is previewed.The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2 . select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell. 18 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. 14 On the Edit Circuits toolbar. and on the Options Bar. Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. click create permanent wiring. click to select the circuit. 13 In the 1 . press Tab several times.

In the System Browser. 25 In the drawing area. click Check None. under Instance Parameters. 21 In the Filter dialog. select Wires. . 20 On the Options Bar. arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible. Checking Your Design | 335 . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. select the 3-way switch in the stairwell. select the unassigned receptacles in the open area. enter 2. and in the Mechanical/Electrical space. the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas. and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches.Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit. Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 24 In the Project Browser. click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. 22 Click . and click OK. click . select panel L-1. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. for Hot Conductors. 19 In the 1 . 26 On the Options Bar.Lighting view. click 27 On the Options Bar. press Tab. highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell.Lighting view. and click OK. click the title bar of the 2 .

28 Click to create permanent wiring. 336 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

Checking Your Design | 337 . The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category. 32 Click to view details of the warning. 31 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 33 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel. click Check Circuits.29 Using the same method. Check Circuits 30 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. create a power circuit for the 6 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view.

This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 36 Click File menu ➤ Close. 35 You can save the open file if you wish. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Finally.Power. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. click the Training Files icon. Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Circuit Loads. In the Project Browser. Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. Open the provided dataset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 34 Close the Warning dialog. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected. In this exercise. 338 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. and double-click 2 . Defining Circuit Loads on page 338. as described below.

and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 5040 VA on Phase B. and Phase C provides 3780 VA. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . Defining Circuit Loads | 339 . click Rebalance Loads.4500 VA. 4 In the Edit Circuits dialog.2 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. B. while Phase A provides 4860 VA. 5 Click OK. select panel L-2. click . and Phase C . Phase B 4860 VA. 3 On the Options Bar. Examination of the loads on Phase A.4320 VA).

enter 40A for the Trip value. H-2 is a 100A panel. 9 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 10 Select panel MDP. the H-2 panel. the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. the actual load connected to it (12960 VA) is less than 15kVA. and present a load of 12960 VA. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. Therefore. Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. and for T1. NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. enter 100A for the Trip value. and present a load 6496 VA. in the Mechanical/Electrical space. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. for panel H-2. you may see different values for the loads. After the loads are balanced. click 8 In the Project Browser. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. the 3 circuits feed transformer T1. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. 13 In the 1 . select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. you can use a 30kVA transformer. Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. so no further changes are required.Power view. 14 In the Type Selector.Power. Therefore. The remaining circuits feed the lighting circuits on Level 1. 12 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. The 3 circuits that feed panel H-2 present a load of 18844 VA. and the T1 transformer. 7 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. double-click 1 . 340 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . select the T1 transformer. click . .6 Select panel H-2. and on the Options Bar. L-1 and MDP. The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1.

100. 21 Scroll down. in the Mechanical/Electrical space.Power to make it the active view. 27 In the 2 . you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly. on the Options Bar. Verify/adjust wire sizes 15 Right-click panel L-1. 1-#8.00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. 1-#12. enter 100A for Rating. 24 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. double-click 2 . and notice that the current value for Mains is 100. 17 Click OK. scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. enter 40A for the Trip value. and click Element Properties. 28 In the Type Selector. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 18 With panel L-1 selected. 19 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. 22 Click OK. 1-#1. Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1. for transformer T2. 26 Click OK. under Instance Parameters. click (Circuit Properties). and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. select the T2 transformer.Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit.Power view. select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA. and on the Options Bar. Notice that it changes to 3-#1. click .00A. select panel H-2. 1-#12. 23 In the Project Browser. Defining Circuit Loads | 341 . 25 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 20 Under Electrical-Loads. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category.

A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and verify that the current value for Mains is 100. you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly.00A. Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately. 29 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties. This completes the Electrical Tutorial.Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. 31 Click OK. 342 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . under Instance Parameters.Power to make it the active view. double-click 1 . click . under Electrical Loads. 36 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. click . 33 With the MDP panel selected. 34 Close the Warning. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Size the service entrance conductors 32 In the Project Browser. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. enter 225A for the Rating parameter. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads. 37 You can save the open file if you wish. 35 On the Options Bar.

In this tutorial. and select i Office Building. By following this workflow. click Reload From. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. However. As you create the plumbing system. At the end of this tutorial. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. hot and cold water piping. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you will understand the process. you can choose to save your work. if the link is lost. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2009.rvt. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. methodology. navigate to Training Files ➤ Architectural.autodesk. 343 . NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. go to http://www. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model.Plumbing Systems 7 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. However. If the tutorial datasets are not present. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. In this tutorial. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. and sanitary piping. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. including plumbing fixtures. After finishing each exercise.

Flush Valve . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa 5 Click Open. you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families. Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.rfa Urinal . planning is critical to a successful design. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system.Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Wall Hung.rvt. 3 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems. click the Training Files icon. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Loading Plumbing Parts. In this lesson. Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.Floor Mounted. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. click the Training Files icon. 344 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Water Closet .

PVC: Standard Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 345 .Glued.Sanitary . click Rename. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Properties. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. click the Training Files icon. 3 Right-click PVC 2. and click Duplicate. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems on page 345. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. select Pipe Short Tee . select None For Cross. expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. 6 Under Mechanical.6 In the Project Browser.Sanitary . select Pipe Cross . select Pipe Bend .Glued: Standard For Transition. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Configuring Plumbing and Pipe Systems. are added under Families in the Project Browser. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise.PVC: Standard For Tap. Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa Pipe Reducing Short Tee . 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon.rvt. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.DWV . 5 In the Rename dialog. 12 You can save the open file if you wish.Floor Mounted and Urinal . select Pipe Transition . 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser.Wall Hung.Glued.PVC: Standard For Preferred Junction Type. The selected component families are loaded into the project.PVC .rfa 11 Click Open. you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them. and click OK. enter PVC Sanitary. All of the loaded families. 2 Right-click PVC. Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: Water Closet . In the left pane of the Open dialog. for New. select Tee For Tee. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.Flush Valve . 10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Pipe Bend .

Vent . then click Duplicate. Add Plumbing Fixtures on page 346. Finally. Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK.PVC . You then modify the piping. 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut. select Pipe Coupling . Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. verify that Pipe Coupling .PVC: Standard 7 Click Apply. select None For Cross.Glued: Standard is selected For Transition. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. 11 You can save the open file if you wish. for Name. verify that Pipe Bend . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room.PVC: Standard is selected 10 Click OK to close the Type Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ZR (Zoom Region).PVC: Standard For Tap. 3 sinks.rvt. In this lesson. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 8 In the Name dialog. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view.■ For Union. verify that Pipe Transition . 9 Under Mechanical. 346 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . verify that Pipe Cross . you create systems to logically connect the fixtures. and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room.PVC: Standard is selected For Union. 3 urinals. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. click the Training Files icon. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.PVC: Standard is selected For Preferred Junction Type. select Pipe Tee . Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Adding Plumbing Fixtures. Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. you add 2 toilets. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. enter PVC Sanitary Vent. verify that Tee is selected For Tee.

6 gpf in the Type Selector. 3 wall-mounted urinals.Floor Mounted : Private 1. and 3 sinks. 4 Select Water Closet . click Dimension.Flush Valve . click Plumbing Fixture. 6 Click Modify. and click to place the toilet in the approximate location shown. 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room.The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. and 1' 6" from the right wall. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 347 . a On the Design Bar. Position the first toilet 7 Position the toilet 6" from the upper wall.

enter 0' 6". h Click the value for the blue dimension below the toilet. j Delete both dimension annotations. i Click Modify. and click. and Individual References is selected for Pick.b On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. d Move the cursor down. verify that (Aligned) is selected. The toilet is placed 1' 6" from the right wall. Wall faces is selected for Prefer. do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Copy). click 9 On the Options Bar. click the value for the blue dimension to the right. Add a second toilet 8 Select the toilet. e Using the same method. The toilet is placed 6" from the upper wall of the toilet stall. f Click Modify. enter 1' 6". move the cursor over the center of the toilet. Clear Constrain Verify that Copy is selected Clear Multiple 348 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and press Enter. c Click the face of the right wall. place a dimension annotation between the upper wall and the back of the toilet. and press Enter. g Select the toilet. and click to place the dimension annotation.

19 Using the same method. and when the alignment snap displays and the preview is from the original toilet. click Dimension. 13 Select Urinal . 15 Click Modify. and place 3 urinals approximately as shown. and click. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. click Plumbing Fixture. do the following. and click to place the dimension annotation. 11 Move the preview of the toilet 5' 0" to the left (into the left stall). ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer. move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal.10 Click the center line of the toilet to establish a start point. place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. and on the Options Bar. 18 Move the cursor down. and on the Options Bar.Wall Hung : 3/4 Flush Valve in the Type Selector. click to place the toilet as shown. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 349 . 14 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room. 16 On the Design Bar. Place wall-mounted urinals 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. select Wall centerlines Verify that Individual References is selected for Pick 17 Click the centerline of the left wall.

27 On the Options Bar click (Place on Face). 28 In the drawing area.Island . and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog. click the value for the blue dimension. place the leftmost urinal 1' 8" from the left wall. click the centerline of each urinal in succession. and in the Type Selector. and click the blue above the dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall. select the counter top. select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. (Equal Control) 24 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing.Single : 18"x18". Place sinks 26 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.20 Working from left to right. 22 Using the same method. and click to place the dimensions annotation. click Plumbing Fixture. 23 Select the dimension annotation above the urinals. 25 While pressing Ctrl. 21 Select the rightmost urinal. 350 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . The urinal is placed 1' 8" from the wall of the toilet stall. select Sink . and enter 1' 8". and press Delete. then move the cursor up.

and for Plane. and click to place the floor drain.29 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. specify the distance between the drain center line and the lower wall as 1' 6". 34 Using the same method specify the distance between the center line of the wall below the sinks and the center line of each sink. then equalize the space between sinks. select Floor Drain . 33 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals. and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation. 37 On the Option Bar click (Place on Work Plane). Place the floor drain 36 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Dimension. specify the distance between the center line of the outer sinks and the center line of the walls as 1' 10". 38 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet. 31 Click Modify. 32 On the Design Bar. click Plumbing Fixture. 30 Place 3 sinks. as shown. approximately as shown.Round : 5" Stainer .3" Drain. and in the Type selector. 35 Delete the dimension annotations. select Level : Level 2. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 351 .

you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. scroll down to View Range. You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 6 On the View Control Bar. Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Bottom Offset Under View Depth. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. verify the view range settings: ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view. Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Level Offset 5 Click OK twice. and click View Properties. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.39 Click Modify. 4 In the View Range dialog. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Starting the Sanitary Piping System. specify Fine for Detail Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Edit. urinals. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. 40 You can save the open file if you wish. In this exercise. and floor drain.rvt. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. under Extents. Begin Creating the Sanitary System on page 352. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 352 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

specify -1' 0" 13 Click OK. click Mechanical Settings. specify -1' 0" 11 In the left panel. toilets. and select Sanitary from the System Type list. select Sanitary from the System Type list. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 15 Click the title bar for the browser. 19 On the Options Bar. Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. as shown. 18 Zoom in on the men’s room.The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. 16 Right-click in the system browser table heading. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 353 . 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. The urinals. and click Main. click View ➤ Piping. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Branch. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols. toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser. 9 In the right panel. and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. click (Create Sanitary System). and floor drain. TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut. Click Window ➤ System Browser.

specify -4' 0" and for D. click Place Base. 28 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. click (Layout Path). and click to place the base approximately as shown. and on the Options Bar. click Sanitary 1. 27 On the Design Bar. 21 Click (Thin Lines) on the toolbar. and click OK. 26 On the Options Bar. 354 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . for Offset. 24 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar. select 4". click Solutions. and a preview of the piping layout displays. 23 In the Select a System dialog. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system.20 Zoom out to include the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room in the view. and on the Options Bar. enter 1/8" for Slope. 25 Move the cursor over the chase. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 22 Select one of the components in the newly created sanitary system.

and on the Design Bar. Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines. as needed. Review the following steps prior to using them to customize the layout. 29 Select solution 1. Customize the layout 30 The alignment of segments is critical when customizing a layout. click Modify. to view them.Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. and do the following: a Use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment down into the middle of the chase above the urinals. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 355 . You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution). It’s easier if each segment can be moved to a snap.

c Using the same method. d Move the cursor to the right to locate the snap above the center urinal. This makes it easier to locate a snap. and drag the segment down into the chase. Snap the main in the middle of the chase. and click to align the branch to the main segment.b Move the cursor to the left to the junction between the main and the branch to the rightmost toilet. 31 Click Finish Layout. select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal. 356 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . NOTE You press Ctrl to select multiple segments when you want to move more than one segment to the same location.

Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 357 . The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch. The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. checking for the proper connectivity. as shown. The third tab should highlight the entire system. slope.32 Examine the piping that was automatically created. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. When a fitting is reversed. The second tab highlights the fixture. and check the slope control. b Select each pipe segment in the system. c Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. and orientation of fittings: a Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it.

and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 36 Click OK. 37 On the View Control Bar. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. Enter the keyboard shortcut. VG (Visibility/Graphics). 358 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 34 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view.33 In the Project Browser. and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. and double-click 3D Plumbing. 35 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Show categories from all disciplines. specify Fine for Detail Level.

39 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. adding the sinks in the men’s room. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Connecting Sink Drain Lines. 2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. click the Training Files icon. 1 In the Project Browser.38 You can save the open file if you wish. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 359 . and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System on page 359 to continue creating the sanitary system. 3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet.rvt.

and on the Options Bar. press the Space Bar once. 6 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall. Pressing Return completes the dimensioning. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. verify that 1/8" /12" is specified for the slope. When you press the space bar. 360 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 7 Click Modify. and press Enter. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. enter 13. right-click the connector on the open leg. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click Draw Pipe.4 Select the tee.

click Pipe Fitting. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye. and press Enter. and select Pipe Reducing Wye-DWV-Glued : Standard in the Type Selector. 10 Click Modify. and select Pipe Plug-PVC : Standard in the Type Selector. click Pipe Fitting. you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet. enter 2". click to place the fitting. and when the extension snap displays. and when the snap displays. 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.If you select the pipe. click to place the fitting. 11 Select the fitting. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 361 . click the blue size control for the wye leg. 9 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.

and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. 362 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and on the Options Bar. 17 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. verify that Auto Connect is selected. and that 1/8" /12" is specified for slope. and when the end of the pipe is even with wall centerline. 16 Select the wye fitting. 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down to a point approximately even with the centerline of the wall below the sinks. right-click the connector on the open leg. click to specify the end of the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. 19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. 15 Using the method learned earlier. and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays. click to specify the end of the first segment of pipe.14 Click Modify. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. highlight the wye.

press Space. check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. and in the Type Selector select Pipe Double Wye . click Pipe Fitting. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described in the previous exercise. If necessary.20 On the Options Bar. Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment. In this case. and click Modify. and click to place the fitting. click Apply. 22 In the 3D view. enter 0' 6" for Offset. 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink. 24 On the Plumbing tab. 21 In the Project Browser. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 363 . 25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe.Glued : Standard. the vertical pipe extends above the level of the floor. and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue.DWV .

30 Double-click the head of the section to open the section view. 364 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . If necessary. In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. in this step you can enter 0 8 (zero space eight) to specify 8". TIP When entering dimensions. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. and in the drawing area.The double wye is added to the vertical segment. specify Fine. for Detail Level. click Section. specify 0' 8" for Offset. 26 Click Modify. specify Hidden Line. 29 On the View tab Design Bar. as 27 Select the double wye fitting. and on the Options Bar. to orient the fitting. For example. click shown above. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 28 Double-click 2 . and for Model Graphics Style. 32 Enter the keyboard shortcut. VG (Visibility/Graphics) to hide architectural components that will interfere with selecting plumbing components. place a section below the sinks as shown. without having to enter ' and " symbols. 31 On the View Control Bar.Plumbing to make it the active view.

then to the right when pipe is connected to the right leg. and on the Options Bar. and click All again d Select any category. in line with the angle for the leg. 37 Using the same method. 41 Click Modify. 36 Click Modify. click None. then clear the check from Lines e Click OK 34 NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the double-wye. specify 0' 6". press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 1 0 and press Enter. draw the pipe up. it is necessary to restore the offset for the fitting. click Pipe. and clear the check from any category c Clear Show categories from all disciplines. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 365 . The fitting moves to the left when pipe is connected to the left leg. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg. 38 Click the connector snap on the center leg. for Offset. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 0 6 and press Enter. 39 Click Modify. After adding the piping to the right and left leg. draw the pipe up to the left. do the following: a Click Show categories from all disciplines b Click All. 40 Select the double-wye fitting again. draw a 1' pipe from the right leg of the double-wye. On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.33 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 48 Using the same method. 50 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting. enter 1' 6". and on the Options Bar. and double-click 2 . 47 Click Modify. 49 In the Project Browser. and select the leftmost sink. 43 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks. and click Draw Pipe.Plumbing. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain. and click to specify the end of the pipe. do the following: ■ ■ For Offset. 45 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. double-click 3D Plumbing. and in the Type Selector. and click Apply Verify 1/8" /12" is specified for slope 46 Drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall. 44 Right-click the connector for the sink drain.42 In the Project Browser. 366 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary.

You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments.Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 51 Routing Solutions works best when the segments being routed are the same size. specify 2". and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. select the pipe from the left sink and the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 9 of 16. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. 52 Click Modify. Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. While pressing Ctrl. select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink. for D. 57 Select solution 7of 7. click Routing Solutions. and select a proposed solution. You use the proposed solutions. click Routing Solutions. 61 Select the double-wye. 59 Using the same method. for D. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 367 . select the double-wye and the 3 short segments of pipe connected to it. 53 While pressing Ctrl. 56 While pressing Ctrl. specify 1 1/2". 60 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points). 54 On the Options Bar. 58 Click Modify. (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through 55 Select solution 9 of 16.

for Slope. 368 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 65 On the Options Bar. This is to be expected. and click Finish. Close the warning. 64 On the toolbar. 63 Click Window ➤ Toolbar ➤ Routing Modify to place the Slope and Justify tool on the toolbar. A warning displays and the pipe from the leg of the double-wye is highlighted to indicate the segment where the slope could not be applied. enter 1/8" / 12". click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar.Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown.

and under Instance Parameters. Since the routing solution applied to the middle sink used the existing pipe (without adding a segment). click Finish on the Options Bar. then click Finish on the Edit System toolbar. The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser. 72 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location. 68 On the Options Bar. and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. When zoomed in close. (Add to System).66 Using the same method. the piping to the middle sink is already sloped. modifying offset values. 70 In the drawing area. and click Select. Then. 67 In the System Browser. and on the Options Bar. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. there is a smaller movement. This will set the elevation for the pipe’s reference end without changing the slope. right-click Sanitary 1. The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. specify the exact Offset. you can specify the elevation of a pipe’s reference end in the Element Properties for the pipe. while pressing Ctrl. click Element Properties. click Multiple. click 69 On the Edit System toolbar. With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined. Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 71 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke is proportional to the zoom level. click to select the reference end of the pipe. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 369 . You can move fixtures by dragging. If necessary. click (Edit System). right-click the pipe. specify the slope for the piping to the left sink. expand Sanitary. select all 3 sinks. you can make minor adjustments to the system. NOTE In applications where the elevation of a sloped pipe is critical.

and select Pipe Bend .) 370 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . the entire system should be highlighted. select Pipe Bend . you can change these to the more commonly used Pipe Bend . 73 While pressing Ctrl. Now that the routing is completed. Pipe Bend .Glued : Standard.PVC : Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions.When the piping was created for the sink drains.Glued : Standard in the Type Selector.DWV . 74 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye. select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments.DWV . 75 Using the method learned earlier. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.Glued : Standard.DWV . highlight the leftmost sink. and in the Type Selector. (After the third tab.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow. and select the horizontal pipe. adjusting the sanitary stack. click File menu ➤ Save As. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 371 . skip the next 2 steps. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 79 Proceed to the next exercise. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 77 You can save the open file if you wish. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 78 Click File menu ➤ Close. Refining the Sanitary Stack on page 371 to continue creating the sanitary system. and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. while maintaining the same angle.76 If you want to save your work. otherwise. and carefully drag it away from the elbow. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Waste Stack Connection. 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

Add a reducing wye to the stack 6 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 5 Select the vertical pipe segment. 7 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe. and on the Options Bar.4 Select the elbow. press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe). and when the Extension snap displays. 372 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .DWV . specify 6" for D (diameter). click Pipe Fitting. and press Delete. and click to place the fitting. and select Pipe Reducing Wye .Glued : Standard.

and press Enter. click the value for the 45 degree leg.8 Click Modify. 11 On the View tab on the Design Bar. enter 4 to change its size. and zoom in on the sanitary outlet. The wye is added to the vertical segment. draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 373 . If necessary. and click Modify. to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward 9 Select the wye. click Section. Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 10 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. select the wye.Plumbing. and click the sanitary piping. double-click 2 .

specify Fine. and draw the pipe in line with 45 degree leg and when the center line for the main segment displays. click to specify the end of the pipe. for Detail Level. 374 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and press Enter. 13 On the View Control Bar. enter -2' 6" for Offset.12 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view. press Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. click Draw Pipe. This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment. 14 Zoom in. and select the reducing wye fitting. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Right-click the connector on the 45 degree leg.

when the location is critical. This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye). and in the Type Selector select Pipe Bend .DWV . and on the Options Bar. then enter 4 0 and press Enter to add a 4' 0" vertical vent pipe. 22 Move the cursor up and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the fitting. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. select the short pipe segment and the main pipe. 21 Right-click the open connector on the reducing wye. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. it will be necessary to move the piping after making the connection. 18 While pressing Ctrl. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 375 .Glued : Standard. click Draw Pipe. 19 On the Options Bar. However. 23 Click Modify.NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the reducing tee. and in the Type Selector. 17 Click Modify. The fitting moves toward the pipe being added after the pipe is drawn. 20 Select the bend created by the routing solution tool. select solution 3 of 3. 24 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. The exact position of the riser is not critical in this application. click Routing Solutions.

and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown. running it inside the wall. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.25 You can save the open file if you wish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then down to connect with the sanitary main. 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals. Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.) 376 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. (If necessary. 1 In the Project Browser. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Urinal Waste Lines. Refining the Urinal Lines on page 376 to continue creating the plumbing system. use the Filter tool to select only piping and fittings.

press the Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. and on the Options Bar. and when the snap for the center line of the leftmost urinal displays. and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector For D. click the connector snap. 10 Click Modify. 5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe. click the pipe above the urinal. The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments.3 Press Delete. 11 Select the leftmost urinal. then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 0' 6". enter 0' 6" and press Tab. click Connector 2 : Sanitary Round : 2" Out. click to specify the end of the pipe. specify 1/8" /12" 7 Drag the preview to the left approximately 8". 8 On the Options Bar. (Connect Into). 12 In the Select Connector dialog. 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet. 9 Continue drawing the pipe run to the left. 6 On the Options Bar. Refining the Urinal Lines | 377 . starting at the level of the original pipe. and click OK. for Offset. and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal. click 13 In the drawing area. and click to specify the end of the pipe. click Draw Pipe. specify 2" Click (Auto Connect) ■ ■ For slope.

14 Using the same method. 17 On the Routing Modify toolbar. double-click 3D. 378 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . connect the remaining urinals to the sanitary main. and click Finish. Do not include the riser and fitting. clear Plumbing Fixtures and click OK. click (Filter Selection). (Slope). 16 In the Filter dialog. click The slope is applied to the selected piping. and check the slope and connectivity as described previously. 15 Draw a pick box around the 3 urinals and the horizontal 2" piping just added as shown. 19 In the Project Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. verify that 1/8" /12" for Slope.Plumbing to make it the active view. 18 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar.

you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal. and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 4" segment) as shown.Resize pipes 20 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals. Refining the Urinal Lines | 379 . double-click 2 . 22 On the Options Bar. However. In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. So. specify 3" for D (diameter).Plumbing to make it the active view.

31 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ North. click Pipe Fitting. and in the Type Selector.Add a cleanout 23 Select the pipe between the 3" elbow and the left urinal. 25 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. and on the Options Bar. and when the extension snap displays. 29 Select the 2" pipes connecting the urinal drains to the main. 30 In the Project Browser. and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees. 380 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . verify that Pipe Reducing Short Tee . and on the Options Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 32 Select the vertical pipe segment between the toilets and the urinals. 27 Select the pipe to the urinal again. select Pipe PVC Plug : Standard. specify 3" for D (diameter).Plumbing to make it the active view. double-click 3D. click to place the plug on the tee. 24 Select the elbow. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. and in the Type Selector. for D. 26 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal. select 3". Redefine fittings 28 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals. then select 2".Glued : Standard is selected. specify 2" for D. and on the Options Bar.Sanitary . and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout.

Refining the Urinal Lines | 381 . 34 Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe.Glued : Standard. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal.DVW . and select Pipe Bend . 33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 35 Check slope and connectivity as described previously.This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow.

clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described previously. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. If necessary. Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 382 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Adding Vents to the System on page 382 to continue creating the plumbing system. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.rvt. adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee.36 You can save the open file if you wish. click the Training Files icon. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added.

8 Click Modify. do the following: a Click Edit/New. Apply a filter to the vent piping 9 Enter the keyboard shortcut. click Pipe. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. Adding Vents to the System | 383 . specify 2" for D (diameter). and specify 14' for Offset. specify 0" for Rise/12". 7 Click Apply. 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. NOTE You must press Tab or move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. 6 On the Options Bar.4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. VG (Visibility/Graphics). and in the Type Selector. 10 On the Filters tab in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

rename the filter Sanitary Vent. for Pattern. and click (Duplicate). and click OK. Vent piping throughout the plan appear as dashed green lines. Create additional vents 11 Double-click Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 2 .b In the Filters dialog.Plumbing to make it the active view. and click OK. click Rename. f In the Add Filters dialog. select Sanitary from the Filters list. 12 On the View tab on the Design Bar. and click OK. select (green). 384 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . select Sanitary Vent. and click OK. i In the Line Graphics dialog. and click Override. and place a section above the urinals and toilets as shown. d Under the Filter Rules. e In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click the Color button. g For Sanitary Vent. click Add. c Right-click Sanitary 1. click Section. specify Filter by as System Type ➤ contains ➤ Sanitary Vent. and zoom in to view the urinals and toilets. and in the Color dialog. click the Lines column. h In the Line Graphics dialog. select IMPORT-DASHED (2) j Click OK twice.

13 Double-click the section symbol to open the section view. Adding Vents to the System | 385 . for Detail Level. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. specify Wireframe. 15 On the View Control Bar. 18 Click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe. click to specify the end of the first pipe section. click Pipe. and enter the keyboard shortcut VG. click to make the connection to the vent as shown. 16 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and enter 1/8" /12" for slope. and on the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. and for Model Graphics Style. verify the (Auto Connect) is selected. 20 At a point above the toilets. 19 Begin drawing the vertical pipe. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. specify 2" for D (diameter). specify Fine. then drag the preview to the right and when the center snap for the previously created vent displays. clear unwanted architectural components from the view as described previously.

press Tab to display the connector. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 Place another vent between the two rightmost urinals: a Click the midpoint of the pipe between the urinals. f Click Modify. and click the + control to update the tee to a cross. for Offset. e If necessary. The vent is automatically created and connected with the earlier vent pipe. 24 Select the tee that was inserted when you connected the vents. enter 9' 6" to specify the elevation for the reference end of the pipe. specify 2". under Instance Parameters. c For D. draw the pipe to the left to the open leg of the cross. 22 Right-click the new horizontal pipe.21 Click Modify. b Begin the vertical pipe. and click Element Properties. d When the snap for the center line for the cross displays. and click to make the connection. 386 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .

Adding Vents to the System | 387 . use the Flip control to make the adjustment. 27 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping.26 Double-click 3D .Plumbing to make it the active view.

and specify 9' 6" for Offset. 29 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink. verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. click Draw Pipe. specify 2" for D (diameter). specify 2" for D (diameter). and begin drawing a vertical vent pipe.Add a vent to the sinks 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 31 Right-click the tee. 30 While pressing Ctrl. and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. 33 Click Modify. 32 On the Options Bar. select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye. and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks. and on the Options Bar. 388 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . move the cursor into the drawing area. then click Apply.

click 39 Enter 1/8" /12" for slope. 36 On the Options Bar specify 0" /12" for slope. while maintaining a 90 degree angle. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. 37 Drag the pipe preview.34 Zoom out to view the vents from the toilets and urinals and the new vent from the sinks. and on the Routing Modify toolbar. and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe. Adding Vents to the System | 389 . toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals. 35 Select the vent. right-click the connector at the open end. (Slope). 38 Select the horizontal vent pipe. A tee is automatically inserted at the joint. and click Finish. click Draw Pipe.

43 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Duplicate. click Properties. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. for New. 42 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon.rvt. Create the Cold Water System on page 390 to continue creating the plumbing system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. click Rename. 4 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. right-click Standard. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Cold Water Piping. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 41 You can save the open file if you wish. enter Cold Water.40 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 390 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 2 Right-click Standard 1.

and in the Name dialog. and in the right pane. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. The default fittings for the hot water pipe are the same as those specified for the cold water pipe. and avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector. then click Duplicate. and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. click Branch. for Name. Create the Cold Water System | 391 . then select Plumbing Fixtures. Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.Plumbing to make it the active view. 11 In the left pane. specify Pipe Tee: Standard For Tap. You now have the cold water piping at 9' 3" and the hot water piping at 9' 0". and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type. and click OK twice. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. click (Create Domestic Cold Water System). in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. specify Pipe Elbow : Standard For Preferred Junction Type.5 In the Type Properties dialog. click View ➤ Piping. 12 In the table. 10 In the left pane. and double-click 2 . in the right pane. Create the cold water system 15 In the Project Browser. click Main. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. specify Pipe Transition : Standard For Union. click the floor drain. and on the Options Bar click (Filter Selection). click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and click OK. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. in the right pane. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. 19 In the Filter dialog. specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. 21 On the Options Bar. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. 13 In the left panel. specify None For Cross. click Mechanical Settings. 16 Press F9 to open the System Browser. specify Pipe Straight Coupling: Standard 6 Click Apply. which places the piping above the ceiling. 18 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Main. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. specify Tee For Tee. 14 Click OK. 17 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. click Check None. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. enter Hot Water. and in the right pane. specify Pipe Cross: Standard For Transition. 9 In the table. 20 While pressing Shift. click Branch. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.

29 Click Modify. and click to end the run as shown. select Pipe Types : Cold Water. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 392 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 24 On the Option Bar.The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. 23 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink. click Pipe. 26 On the Options Bar. click Show categories from all disciplines. 35 On the Plumbing tab. 32 Select the middle sink in the view. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. click OK. Piping is added to connect the sink to the cold water system. clear Casework. 34 Zoom in on the area between the middle and rightmost sink. 30 Enter the keyboard shortcut VG. click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. click (Connect Into). and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks. click Pipe. and click to specify the end the segment. and click OK. select the domestic cold water connector. 31 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. and on the Options Bar. specify 0" /12" for Slope. 25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. 33 In the Select Connector dialog. Create piping for the cold water system 22 Zoom in on the area below the sinks. specify 2' 6" for Offset. and in the Type Selector.

and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe. select the cold water pipe. just above the wall. press Tab. 38 On the Options Bar.36 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the sinks. press Tab to avoid connecting to the sanitary piping. and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent. 40 Zoom in on the area between the toilets.) 41 On the Plumbing tab. specify 9' 3" for Offset. click Pipe. 37 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown. and click Apply. click the snap on the cold water pipe. click to specify the end of the pipe. 44 On the Options Bar. drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room. and click to end that segment. 39 Click Modify. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. drag the preview into the center of the wall behind the sinks. Create the Cold Water System | 393 . specify 1' 2" for Offset. (If necessary. 42 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe in the chase. 43 Drag the preview to the left.

click Draw Pipe. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture. right-click the open connector. and click the + control to change it to a tee. and then click the vertical cold water pipe. click to specify the endpoint as shown. click Pipe. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and when the center line for the left toilet displays. select the rightmost toilet.45 Click Modify. double-click 3D. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 51 Select the tee. 50 On the Plumbing tab. 46 In the Project Browser. 49 Select the elbow behind the toilet. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 47 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets.Plumbing. 52 Drag the preview to the left while maintaining the same angle. 48 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into). 394 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .

55 Select the rightmost urinal.53 Click Modify. connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe. and click the vertical cold water Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. 54 Select the leftmost toilet. and on the Options Bar click water pipe that you added to the tee. and on the Options Bar click pipe. and click the horizontal cold Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. . 56 Use the same method. Create the Cold Water System | 395 . .

58 Select the main cold water piping from the mechanical room. 396 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .Plumbing view as shown. and the horizontal segment to the sinks. the tee. Adjust cold water pipe sizes 57 Use the View Cube in the upper-right corner of the view to spin the 3D . as shown. The final steps in this exercise adjust the size of several sections of the piping.All of the cold water piping is in place.

specify 2" for D (diameter).59 On the Options Bar. but leaving the branch to the urinals as is). Create the Cold Water System | 397 . feeding the toilets and urinals (including the tees. as shown. 63 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink). specify 1 1/2" for D (diameter). 60 Select the cold water branch piping from the main. 62 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks. 61 On the Options Bar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom in on the sinks. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Hot Water Piping.Plumbing. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater. Create the Hot Water System on page 398. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.64 On the Options Bar. 65 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously.rvt. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 66 You can save the open file if you wish. specify 3/4" for D (diameter). create the hot water system. click the Training Files icon. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click 2 . 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. 398 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .

click Mechanical Equipment. click (Edit System). click Check None. 5 In the Filter dialog. click Finish. 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser. and click Select. 10 Double-click Water Heater. and click Select. select Plumbing Fixtures. 12 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. 13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room. (Add to System). expand Domestic Cold Water. Create the Hot Water System | 399 . and click to place the water heater as shown. and click View ➤ Piping. click (Filter Selection). 16 On the Edit System toolbar. select Water Heater : 40Gallon. click the title bar for the browser. 14 In the System Browser. press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left. click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room. and in the Type Selector. 6 On the Options Bar. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and on the Options Bar. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room. The Edit System toolbar is activated. and on the Edit 17 In the System Browser. to the left of the main cold water pipe. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area.rfa. and click OK. 15 On the Options Bar. click the water heater. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system. right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. expand Domestic Hot Water.2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. click the Training Files icon. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click System toolbar.

click Draw Pipe. 24 Move the cursor over the water heater. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. 25 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the water heater in the view. and in the Type Selector. and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase. specify 8' 6" for Offset. A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system. click OK. 22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe. click (Connect Into). click (Edit System). add the water heater to the cold water system. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. click Pipe. and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. 400 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right.18 On the Options Bar. and click the main cold water pipe. and on the Options Bar. click when the hot water connector displays. right-click the connector. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 23 On the Plumbing tab. 19 Using the same method. select the domestic cold water connector.

select Pipe Types : Hot Water. drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. Create the Hot Water System | 401 . 33 Click Modify. 32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown.27 Click Modify. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. and click to specify the end of the segment. click Pipe. specify 2' 8" for Offset. 28 On the Plumbing tab. and in the Type Selector.

click Pipe. and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. 41 On the Plumbing tab. click Draw Pipe. and click to end that segment. 39 Click Modify.Plumbing. click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe. 36 Right-click the open connector. click Apply. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and In this case. click click the hot water pipe below the sinks.34 Select the middle sink in the view. and on the Options Bar. specify 2' 8" for Offset. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. (Connect Into). 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks. 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater. 402 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 38 On the Options Bar. double-click 3D. click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system. 40 In the Project Browser.

42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle. 45 Highlight a fixture in the view. This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems. Create the Hot Water System | 403 . 44 In the Project Browser. 47 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 43 Click Modify. press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. double-click 2 . and click.Plumbing. 46 You can save the open file if you wish.

404 .

navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural.Fire Protection Systems 8 In this tutorial. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. click Reload From. methodology. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. At the end of this tutorial. In this tutorial. you can choose to save your work. you will understand the process. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. manually modify the pipes and fittings. insert fittings. Designing Fire Protection Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms. By following the recommended workflow. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. go to http://www. After finishing each exercise. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. if the link is lost.rvt. However. In this lesson. Then.autodesk. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2009. you create views and pipe types. create schedules. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. However. If the tutorial datasets are not present. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. During the fire protection design process. and select i Office Building. you create a wet and dry fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and size and tag the pipes. 405 . As you create the systems. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and finally. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems.

Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. for New. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Next. You create new pipe types. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings. and click Fire Protection. 2 Right-click Standard. 13 Under System Type. right-click the Design Bar. 7 With the Type Properties dialog open. for Material. 5 In the Rename dialog. Create new pipe types 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. enter Fire Protection Wet. click Mechanical Settings. including the new material property. do the following: ■ For Pipe Type. 12 For System Type. Configure pipe conversion settings 10 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click Rename. you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. under Mechanical. you modify the pipe type properties. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 406 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 11 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Next. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Right-click the copy.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. Open the i Starting the Fire Protection Project. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. Next. click Duplicate. select Carbon Steel. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 9 In the Type Selector. click the Training Files icon. you create another pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. and click OK.Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise. select Fire Protection Wet. you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems. and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. and click OK. and click Duplicate. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. select Main. and click Properties.

To remove a field. ■ ■ Define columns 21 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. verify that 9' 0" is specified. under Available fields. 20 In the New Schedule dialog. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. do the following: ■ Under Category. verify that 9' 0" is selected. and click Add. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 23 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list. 14 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. and click Remove. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 17 Using the same method.■ For Offset. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 18 Click OK. select it. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. select Spaces. 16 Under System Type. duct. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select Area. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. select Branch. select Fire Protection Wet. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. So. for Offset verify 9' 0". the pipe main will be offset from level 2. and specify Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry for the Main and Branch piping. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 22 While pressing Ctrl. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. or architectural components. However. Create a Space Schedule 19 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. structural beams. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. click Schedule/Quantities. For Offset. for System Type Fire Protection Dry. 15 For System Type. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 407 . select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.

verify that Common is selected. 29 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Organize the data 28 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. For Discipline. Verify that Ascending is selected. For Formula. select Number. verify that Number is selected. 26 In the Calculated Value dialog. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes. 27 Click OK. Verify that equals is selected. do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. For Type. For Field formatting. click Field Format. enter Area/130. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. select Level. select Minimum Sprinklers.24 Select a field. select Level 2. Under Level. verify that (none) is selected. For And. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Then by. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected. Create a calculated value parameter 25 Click Calculated Value. 30 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). verify that (none) is selected. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. 408 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . enter Minimum Sprinklers. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 130 square feet. Verify that Formula is selected. you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each space.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select 2 decimal places. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. In the next exercise. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. sorted according to space number. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. A new view called Space Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. As a result. you created a Space Schedule for fire protection systems. you created new views and modified view properties. you place the wet system sprinklers. 32 You can save the open file if you wish.31 In the Format dialog. Finally. Next. For Units. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Click OK twice. you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 spaces. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). select Fixed. Although you rounded the data to 2 decimal places. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. For Rounding. In this exercise. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per space data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. Notice that only the data for the level 2 spaces displays. Placing Sprinklers on page 410. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 409 . You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Type Selector. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. When there is a small misalignment. click Sprinkler.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. click the Training Files icon.Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. Open the i Placing Sprinklers.Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view. 5 On the Options Bar. When this happens. 2 Enter ZR. and sketch a zoom region around Office 201 (located in the upper-left corner of the building). you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the spaces on level 2. select Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 1/2" Pendent. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. After placing the initial sprinkler. and double-click 2 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. Place a sprinkler 1 In the Project Browser. You will use the schedule that you created in the previous exercise to identify the required number of sprinklers per room. 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. As you place the sprinklers. 410 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion or a layout path to physical piping in later exercises.

select the sprinkler that you placed. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tile as shown. 11 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid. verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared. and after the intersection snap displays. The selected sprinkler displays in red. TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. click to specify the copy start point. and that Copy is selected. 10 On the Options Bar. Continue placing sprinklers 8 In the drawing area. click (Copy). You copy this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. 7 Click Modify on the Design Bar. Placing Sprinklers | 411 .6 With the view zoomed. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and click to place the sprinkler. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination). Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool.

and after the intersection snap displays. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). click to specify the copy end point.12 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown. The copy selection border follows the cursor. TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. 412 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and listening dimensions display to aid in placement. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection.

verify Constrain is cleared. place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected. you copy and array sprinklers in Office 202. and select Multiple. 14 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 201. Placing Sprinklers | 413 . Copy is selected. 17 In Office 201. 15 On the Edit toolbar. This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point. click (Copy). and after the intersection snap displays. 16 On the Options Bar. Copy and array sprinklers 13 Zoom out to view the region around Office 201 and Office 202 (Office 202 is located immediately below Office 201). Next. click to specify the copy start point.

18 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 202. and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. 414 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

19 Move the cursor directly down. click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. Placing Sprinklers | 415 . and after the intersection snap displays.

416 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .The sprinklers are placed.

21 While pressing CTRL. Clear Group And Associate. Next. Placing Sprinklers | 417 . Verify that Constrain is cleared. click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array.20 On the Design Bar. For Move To. select Last. because all of the sprinklers in Office 202 are equally spaced. A border displays around the 2 sprinklers. it is an ideal situation to use an array. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays). 23 On the Options Bar. you array the other Office 202 sprinklers. 22 On the Edit toolbar. TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool. Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. click (Array). you can use the Array tool to finish the job. select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 202. Furthermore.

and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the array end point as shown. 25 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid. 418 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . You first specify an array start point. creating an array is a 2-step process. click to specify the array start point. An outline follows the cursor to aid in placement. then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). 24 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 202 sprinkler.NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool. and after the intersection snap displays. to specify array end point.

The Office 202 sprinklers are placed. Placing Sprinklers | 419 .

Next. click (Copy). clear Multiple. 28 On the Edit toolbar. A border displays around the selected sprinklers indicating the copy selection. 30 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border. you place sprinklers in Office 203. 27 While pressing Ctrl. select both sprinklers in the corner office (Office 201). 420 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 29 On the Options Bar. 26 Zoom out to view all 3 offices along the left wall. and after the mid point snap displays. click to specify the copy start point.

Placing Sprinklers | 421 .31 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 203. click to specify the copy end point. and after the mid point snap displays.

NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap. 422 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps.

Next. click (Copy). 36 On the Options Bar. Open 204. 32 Click Modify. you place sprinklers in the large common space. 35 On the Edit toolbar. Placing Sprinklers | 423 . verify that Multiple is cleared. Create multiple sprinkler arrays 33 Zoom in to view Office 203 and part of the adjacent common area. Open 204. 34 Select the lower-right Office 203 sprinkler.You have now placed the sprinklers for 3 offices. 37 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler. You copy this sprinkler to Open 204 and use it to create a sprinkler array.

For Number. Verify that Constrain is cleared. you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 204. 424 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 42 On the Options Bar. 41 On the Edit toolbar. For Move To. enter 6 for the number of arrays. select 2nd. You could copy sprinklers. 39 Click Modify. and after the intersection snap displays. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. click to place the sprinkler. The Office 203 sprinkler is copied to Open 204. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. but creating an array is quicker.38 Move the cursor to the right into Open 204 as shown. Next. click (Array). 40 Select the sprinkler that you copied. 43 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point.

Zoom out to display the array.44 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right. and after the intersection snap displays. Placing Sprinklers | 425 . click to specify the array end point as shown. The array is created.

undo the step and try again. verify that 2nd is selected. click to specify end point for the second array. click (Array). If you make a mistake placing the array.IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately. Next. 47 On the Options Bar. enter 4 for number of arrays. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. you create multiple arrays based on this array. 45 While pressing CTRL. 49 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid. 46 On the Edit toolbar. and after the intersection snap displays. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. Verify that Constrain is cleared. Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. 426 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . For Move To. For Number. select all the sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler in the Open 204 space. 48 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler as shown.

Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 204 is complete Placing Sprinklers | 427 . and click Delete Checked to delete the 3 sprinklers. Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. 50 In the Revit MEP 2009 dialog. click Expand. 51 Expand the 3 Warnings. and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles). click the check box associated with each warning. You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors.The arrays are created.

select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright. click to place the sprinkler. and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical space (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms). 59 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. select an instance of the family type in the drawing area. Because this space does not have a ceiling. 57 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes. and then to edit the family in the Family Editor. To modify a family type. click Sprinkler. you place a sprinkler in the Mechanical/Electrical space. 58 In the Type Selector. The sprinkler family loads into the project. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). and click Modify. 54 Open the Sprinkler -Upright. 53 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit Family on the Options Bar. click the Training Files icon. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser. However. first. 56 Enter ZR. 428 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . you need to load them in the project. Load a new sprinkler family 52 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. you will use a non-hosted sprinkler. and double-click 2 .Fire Prot to make it the active view. and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file. move the cursor to the approximate center of the space.Next.rfa file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder. Place non-hosted sprinklers 55 In the Project Browser.

click Dimension. 63 In the Project Browser. then click the wall face of the lower wall. and because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. enter 10' 6". 61 In the Element Properties dialog.The sprinkler is added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". and click Element Properties. and move the dimension to the left. click the center of the sprinkler. 64 On the Design Bar. select Wall Faces 65 Click the upper wall face. double-click 2 . 60 Right-click the sprinkler. Unconstrain the sprinkler when deleting the dimension. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer.Ceiling Fire Prot view. and notice that the sprinkler displays in the Mechanical/Electrical space. 62 Click OK. Next you adjust the offset. Placing Sprinklers | 429 . 67 Select the dimension. for Offset. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and on the Options Bar.Ceiling Fire Prot. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the 2 . under Instance Parameters. NOTE Click the center of the sprinkler. and press Delete. and when a dot displays click to specify the center. 66 Click to center the sprinkler between the upper and lower wall. Do not click the vertical line that displays as the reference. as shown.

Click to place the sprinklers on ceiling tile faces. ■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers. You will create a Fire Protection Dry System in Server Room 215 in a later exercise. Round decimals up to the next whole number. then click Modify. center the sprinkler between the right and left walls. NOTE Do not place sprinklers in the stairwell or Server Room 215. Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 69 Using the placement methods that you have learned.68 Using the same method. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. Use sprinkler type: Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 1/2" Pendent for all rooms. complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. 430 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

71 Draw a pick box around the entire model.70 In the Project Browser. (Pin) 72 In the Filter dialog. and click (Filter).Fire Prot. 73 You can save the open file if you wish. Placing Sprinklers | 431 . double-click 2 . click Check None. and on the toolbar. then select Sprinklers. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click to prevent further movement of the sprinklers that would cause misalignment.

piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. Open the i Connecting Sprinklers. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 432 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. and then creating the logical connection between these system components.Fire Prot to make it the active view. and physically with piping. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. In this exercise. Then you simplify the layout using tools from the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar to modify pipe branches after converting the initial layout to piping.74 Click File menu ➤ Close. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Unlike logical connections (systems). you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. Connecting the Sprinklers on page 432. you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system. click the Training Files icon. However. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. and double-click 2 . 1 In the Project Browser. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. After creating the logical connection. In the next exercise.

TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. Connecting the Sprinklers | 433 . and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. click in the drawing area to make it active. click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. click Check None. and display pinned and in red. Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. If the System Browser does not respond. 7 In the Filter box. and assign the selected sprinklers to it.Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. and click OK. then press F9. select Sprinklers. You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable. As you assign sprinklers to systems. 8 On the Options Bar. All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected. 4 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 203 and Office 211. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. click System Browser.

right-click Fire Protection Wet. expand Piping. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. place the cursor over a sprinkler. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. and click Select. named Fire Protection Wet 1. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers. select an initial piping layout. 434 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . The Layout Paths tools are activated on the Design Bar and Options Bar. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. and select the system or select the Fire Protection Wet 1 again in the System Browser. In the System Browser. under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. all of the sprinklers in the system have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected.The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. and a piping layout preview displays. 11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. Next. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. press Tab. and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears.

20 Zoom in on the stairway at the right side of the model.NOTE The is selected. 21 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the stairwell. 18 Click OK. click Settings. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. click Place Base. (Layout Path) button is available on the Options Bar whenever a system component 13 On the Design Bar. click Solutions. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. For Offset. click Solutions. verify that 6"150 mm is specified for D. 17 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 15 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. and on the Options Bar. these settings will convert the base component to a 6" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 435 . The layout path solution displays. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. Click (Previous Solution). and click to place the base component as shown. verify that Main is selected. 19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right keyboard arrow keys. verify that 9' 0" is specified. 22 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. enter -12' 0". 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and for Offset. and on the Options Bar. select Branch. and select solution 4. When the layout is finished. 23 On the Design Bar.

Next. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 436 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . you modify the selected layout. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. A (parallel movement control) displays. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. 25 Zoom in on the vertical main. Modify the layout 24 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. In general. 26 Select the vertical layout path segment.

and midway between the sprinklers above the office as shown. 28 Select the horizontal branch pipe to the lower sprinkler in Office 211.27 Drag the parallel movement control to the left to a point to the right of the doorway for Office 216. Connecting the Sprinklers | 437 .

(tee junction control) down to the intersection with the main piping just below 32 Scroll to the left. select the horizontal branch again. and drag the down to merge it with the horizontal piping below. 30 Select the horizontal branch pipe. 31 Drag the it. 438 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . feeding the sprinkler in Office 203. as shown. (elbow junction control) The piping for Office 203 is reconnected to the branch in the open area.29 Drag the parallel movement control down until the pipe merges with the horizontal piping to the left.

35 On the toolbar. However. you have been using parallel movements to combine piping. Connecting the Sprinklers | 439 . Thin lines make it easier to see the various drag controls when using junction and elbow controls.33 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model. as shown. In general. it is an opportunity to merge the piping into a shared branch. 37 Drag the (tee junction control) up to the intersection of main and the branch above. You can make many of these modifications using the Layout Paths tools. Drag the lower branch piping up to merge it with the branch piping. there are situations where you must make modifications outside of the Layout Paths. Next you combine the piping for the sprinklers in Office 216 by dragging each end of the pipe separately. 36 Select the horizontal branch feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. So far. 34 Select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in the left office. click (Thin Lines). whenever there is a branch feeding a single sprinkler.

IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. (elbow junction control) up to combine 39 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 440 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and drag the the branch piping. or manually modify the pipe. Either relocate the system components.38 Select the horizontal branch again. click Finish Layout. select a different layout solution. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. or that offset elevations are incorrect. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.

46 Select the sprinkler that was disconnected in the open area when the piping was deleted. Connecting the Sprinklers | 441 . draw a pick box to select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. clear Sprinklers. and verify that (Auto Connect) is selected on the Options Bar. then continue drawing the pipe up to connect the sprinkler. as shown. and click the horizontal pipe feeding the sprinkler 47 Drag the open end of the main piping up to connect with the horizontal piping as shown.Continue combining piping 40 Zoom in on Office 211. click to specify the end point. (Connect Into). 41 On the Options Bar. 43 Press Delete. 42 In the Filter dialog. including the cross and transitions from the main piping. as shown. right-click the connector at the open end. on the Options Bar. 45 Draw the pipe to the right and when the snap below the sprinkler in Office 211 displays. click draw pipe. and click OK. click (Filter). 44 Select the horizontal pipe. click in Office 211. and the sprinkler in the open area.

50 While pressing Ctrl. 51 Press Delete. Reconnect the sprinklers in Office 214 and 216 52 Select the vertical pipe in Office 216. as shown. 49 Draw a pick box around the horizontal piping and fittings between the sprinklers in Office 216 and the main in Server Room 215. 53 Select the horizontal pipe in Office 216. and press Delete. select all the piping to the 2 lower sprinklers in Office 214. and drag the connector to the right to connect with the vertical pipe as shown. 442 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . including the pipe and the tee as shown. and drag the top connector up to connect with the horizontal piping in the open area.48 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model.

click to specify the end point for the pipe. 55 On the Design Bar. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 443 . ■ Continue dragging the preview down until aligned with the 2 lower sprinklers. then drag the preview to the connector snap on the right-most sprinkler. and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the horizontal pipe. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click Modify. Drag the preview down. and click to make the connection to the sprinkler.54 Zoom in on the office in the lower-right corner. Click the horizontal pipe between the left wall of Office 214 and the upper-left sprinkler. click Pipe. verify that (Auto Connect) is selected.

and click the horizontal pipe as shown.■ Select the sprinkler to the left. click (Connect Into). On the Options Bar. ■ Reconnect the piping for Office 214 to the main 56 Zoom in on the open piping above Server Room 215. (Trim/Extend). 444 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and on the toolbar click 57 Click each of the open-ended pipes.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 445 . and double-click the 2 . You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. indicating connectivity throughout the system.An elbow is inserted to complete the connection. click the Training Files icon. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System on page 445. Check pipe connectivity 59 Highlight a pipe in the main for the system.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. In the next exercise. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create the dry fire protection system. 58 Click Modify. Open the i Completing the Wet System. In this exercise. 60 You can save the open file if you wish.Fire Prot view. you add the sprinklers in the upper half of the model to the existing wet system. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 61 Click File menu ➤ Close. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. After creating the system. The entire system should be highlighted. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. and select the tee fitting connecting the main to the upper horizontal branch piping. and converted pipe fittings. checked connectivity. and then you create piping to physically connect them. Next. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. and press Tab twice. expand Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in.

Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 4 In the 2 . and number of elements in the system. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 446 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). such as VAV boxes. fitting. and AC units. select a pipe segment. NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). The Edit System toolbar displays providing system editing tools. radiators.Fire Prot view. System tools display on the Options Bar. or sprinkler in the current wet system. or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar. and pipe or duct is created. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 5 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system. air terminals. system equipment.3 Click the plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a cross. mechanical equipment. The cross provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the upper half of the model. you can select the pipe or duct. boilers.

verify that 30 is specified. You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. Select Multiple. verify that None is specified. For System Equipment.6 On the Edit System toolbar. For Number of Elements. This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 447 . click 7 On the Options Bar. You cannot select them. Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out). Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. 8 Place the cursor outside Office 201 in the upper-left corner of the building. For System Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add To System). 9 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected. verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified.

11 On the Edit System toolbar. Number of Elements now displays as 65 (sprinklers) in the system.The selected sprinklers display in red. On the Options Bar. This is separate from the Finish for the System Editor. select Network. 13 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. verify that Solutions is selected. 14 On the Options Bar. The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay. and on the Options Bar. for Solution Type. solution 1 3. click Finish to finish your selection of the sprinklers being added to the system. you must click Finish on the Options bar to complete the selections. click Paths). You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 10 NOTE When you use multiple selections. (Layout 448 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click Finish to finish editing the system. and click Modify. 12 Select a sprinkler in the upper half of the model. On the Options Bar.

and drag the tee junction control to the intersection to the left as shown. and drag the elbow junction control to the left to combine the branch piping as shown. 16 Select the vertical pipe to the lower sprinkler in the corner office (201). Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 449 .The layout automatically provides a path from the upper layout to the cross created earlier. 17 Select the vertical branch again. 15 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the model.

The piping for the upper half of the model displays. 19 Using the same method. 20 On the Design Bar. drag each end of the branch to the left to combine it with the piping to the sprinkler just to above. as shown. Click the tee junction control again and continue the adjustment.18 Scroll to the right and select the branch to the lower-right sprinkler in Office 208. 450 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . The tee junction control will stop at the junction of the tee from the main piping. click Finish Layout.

indicating connectivity throughout the system. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. In an actual dry system. After creating the system. and press Tab 3 times. As with the wet system. 22 You can save the open file if you wish. In this exercise. a valve would isolate the dry system from the wet system. For this exercise. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise. The entire system should be highlighted. In the next exercise. The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment.Check pipe connectivity 21 Highlight the pipe from the riser in the stairwell. it is enough show how the system is created without adding a valve. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System on page 451. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers. you added the remaining wet system sprinklers and logically connected them to the existing system. you create the dry fire protection system. and the pipes for this system would not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and checked connectivity. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 215. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 451 .

Open the i Creating the Dry System. In the left pane of the Open dialog. press Tab until the sprinkler displays on the status bar at the lower left corner of the window. Be careful to select only the sprinkler. If necessary.Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active. 452 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 1 In the Project Browser.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 2 . click the Training Files icon. 3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 216. Place sprinklers 2 Zoom in to view the 3 spaces at the bottom of the model.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling. 5 On the Options Bar.4 On the Edit toolbar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared. The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling. then move the cursor diagonally to the upper-right. 8 Click Modify. click (Copy). Verify that Copy is selected. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. as shown. along the same horizontal ceiling grid. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 453 . TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. click to specify the copy start point. and click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. 7 Move the cursor to the right into Server Room 215. 6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays.

Create the dry system 9 While pressing CTRL. expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry. 19 On the Options Bar. 14 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). you change the sprinkler type. click System Browser. verify that 1/2" is selected.Pendent . enter 1/8" / 12".Dry . 11 On the Options Bar. click Pipe. 454 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. 18 In the Type Selector.Fire Prot to make it the active view. 16 Zoom in on Server Room 215. 13 In the System Browser. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry.Next. For Slope. 10 In the Type Selector. and click Select The selected system displays in red. 17 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign the sprinklers to it. select both Server Room 215 sprinklers. The System Browser opens. select Sprinkler .Hosted : 1/2" Dry Pendent. The system is created and listed in the System Browser. verify that 9' 0" is specified. Create the dry system piping 15 In the Project Browser. double-click 2 . Confirm and validate the system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. For Offset.

20 Click the horizontal pipe directly above the upper-right sprinkler. as shown. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 455 . to specify a starting point for the piping 21 Draw the pipe preview straight down to a point even with the lower-left sprinkler. click to connect the pipe. 22 Continue to draw the pipe to the left and. when the snap for the lower-left sprinkler displays. Do not connect to the upper right sprinkler. and click.

you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe. 24 In the Project Browser. Next. click None. All categories are selected except the Lines category. and zoom in on the dry fire protection system. and click View Properties. select Show categories from all disciplines. and double-click 3D. on the Model Categories tab. 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. The pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper-right sprinkler. 25 Right-click an empty area in the drawing area. Click OK twice. select any category. and clear the Lines category. under Instance Parameters. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Clear Show categories from all disciplines. 456 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click All. expand Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 3D Views. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. You can confirm this in the 3D view or by checking connectivity. as shown. All categories are cleared. click All.23 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. Only the sprinklers and piping are visible in the view. click Edit. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and clear a check mark from any category.

Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 457 .30 Select the unconnected sprinkler. To follow good design practice. and all pipe fittings are automatically added. and select each pipe segment to verify the slope. 32 Zoom the view. the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes. click . and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler. The slope value displays next to the slope control. 31 On the Options Bar. You can click the slope control to change the reference end for the slope. The sprinkler connects into the pipe.

you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. the active view is tiled to the left. 2 If necessary. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. 458 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 36 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. Open the i Modifying Pipe Diameters. and press TAB 3 times. you placed dry system sprinklers. and double-click 2. and double-click 3D to make the view active. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. TIP When you tile 2 views.Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 33 Zoom out to display the entire model. highlight a pipe segment in the dry system. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.Fire Prot to make the view active. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. First. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 215. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. You have completed the dry fire protection system. checked pipe connectivity. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. Modifying Pipe Diameters on page 458. Then. indicating that they are connected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. Additionally. 3 In the Project Browser. In this exercise.

and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. click Check None. 7 On the Options Bar. This selects the entire level 2 pipe run. Changing the diameter. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. click . and click OK. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. width.Fire Prot view. it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 6 The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers.You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. width. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 459 . or width. or height. starting at the upper-left corner of the building. draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection piping. height. In the 2. 8 In the Filter dialog.

and while pressing SHIFT. zoom in on the supply pipe in the stairwell. 11 Select any pipe segment and verify the 1 inch diameter on the Options Bar. for D: (diameter). verifying that it is connected.9 Click in the 3D view to make it active. The entire fire protection pipe run highlights. select the supply pipe in the stairwell. 10 On the Options Bar. and press TAB twice. 460 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 1 inch diameter except for the supply piping. 12 Place the cursor over a main pipe segment. select 1". the elbow and the horizontal pipe to the main piping to remove them from the selection.

and on the toolbar. click (Pin) to prevent the linked model from moving.Modify the diameter of the main 13 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe. select the model. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 461 . TIP If you have difficulty selecting piping segments without moving the linked architectural model. If branch segments are selected. NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection.

draw a pick box around the horizontal main. 462 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .14 With the main selected. and the supply pipe. while pressing CTRL. the pipe fittings.

select 4". The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. and for Model Graphics Style. Sprinklers Serviced 1. The following table shows the pipe diameter that will be used for each branch in the fire protection systems. select Shading with Edges. select Fine. use the pipes and pipe fittings. 15 On the Options Bar. NOTE If you select sprinklers with the pipes and pipe fittings. 19 Validate the pipe run geometry. 18 On the Options Bar. for D: 6". and on the View Control Bar. 2 3 4. for Detail Level. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 463 .The main piping is selected and displays in red. select the tee connecting the supply piping to the main. Modify the diameter of branch pipes 20 The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 17 In the 3D view. especially around the pipe fittings. (Filter) to select only 16 Double-click the 3D view. for D.

and the 2 dry sprinklers in Office 215). 464 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Be sure to include the tee at the right end of the pipe run in your selection. Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers. 26 Select the next pipe segment and tee to the right. The specifications requires a diameter of 2" for this pipe segment. The pipe diameter is modified. select Fine and for Model Graphics Style. 22 Enter ZR. This piping services 6 sprinklers (4 in the corner office. for D:. select Shading with Edges. You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the requirements. and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 offices in the building. 25 On the Options Bar. for Detail.21 Click in the 2 . 24 Select the pipe segments and fittings that connect Office 214 and 215 directly to the main as shown. select 2".Fire Prot view to make it active. 23 On the View Control Bar.

27 On the Options Bar. select 1 1/2". 29 Select the pipe and tee that connects the first sprinkler on the branch. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 465 . for D: select 1 1/2". you continue to modify the pipe branch. for D:. and on the Options Bar. 28 Double-click 3D to make it the active view. It’s easier to select the fitting above the first sprinkler in this branch from a 3D view.This segment services 4 sprinklers. Next. zoom in on the piping to Office 216.

Click Tags.30 Select the segment and fitting to the remaining sprinklers on this branch. Tag the pipes 31 In the 2 Fire Prot view. Next. They display only in the view in which they were placed. and on the Options Bar. Clear Leader. 32 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. for Pipes. 33 On the Options Bar. press Tab until the pipe is highlighted place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell. for D: select 1 1/4". 38 Place the cursor over the vertical supply pipe in the stairwell. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. and after the segment highlights. 35 Click OK. you place a tag and include a leader line. select Leader. 37 On the Options Bar. 34 In the Tag dialog. NOTE Tags are view specific. 36 Place the cursor over the first pipe segment that connecting the branch to the main. under Category. Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. zoom in on the branch that you modified in the preceding step. 466 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click Tag ➤ By Category. click to place the tag. verify that Pipe Size Tag is loaded.

Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 41 For more practice use the methods that you learned in this exercise to finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 467 . and finish tagging the pipes.39 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows). Sprinklers Serviced 1. and finish placing the pipe tags. 40 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag. 2 3 4. Next. you finish modifying the pipe run diameters.

Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. 468 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system.42 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. For additional practice. You added tags the pipes. and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. In this tutorial. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe. The completed fire protection system is included in the i Completed Fire Protection System. You can save the open file if you wish. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. In this exercise.

Pipe connectors are used for piping. but also to understand how the settings in the Family Editor affect the family. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. Revit MEP Content The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. you use the Family Editor to modify and create tags and annotation symbols. it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline. including power. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. ■ Duct connectors are associated with ductwork. you should have a working knowledge of Revit MEP and experience with the actual components that you will be modeling. you create a new lighting fixture and 2 pipe fittings. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family. Family Editor Creating a family requires careful thought. pipe fittings. After learning to modify an existing family. The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. ■ ■ NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. as after this selection is made. and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. duct fittings. alarm systems and others. In the third lesson. Revit MEP operation and the behavior of your components depends to a great extent on how you create specific components.Creating Revit MEP Content 9 This tutorial expands your knowledge of the Family Editor by introducing several unique features in Revit MEP. Although the exercises in this tutorial describe settings that are specific to a particular 469 . telephone. not only for the geometry. Steam. Before using this tutorial. you begin by modifying existing families to create new types. In this tutorial. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections. and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids.

you may want to create multiple types within the existing family instead of creating a new family. 470 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 2 In the Save As dialog. click the Training Files icon. 5 In the Format dialog. You can modify an existing component. Map parameters Create multiple types within a family.Downblast . and save the family as Exhaust Ventilator . Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor Exhaust Ventilator . click the Format column. There are several ways to create a family with the Family Editor. and click OK. Modifying a Fan Family In this exercise you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Modify an existing family. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Set project units 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Save a copy of the family 1 Click File ➤ Save As. and for Current. for Rounding.rfa.Downblast. Modifying Families In this lesson. it is easier to modify a component. If you can find a component that is similar to the family that you want. for Discipline. The process you use to create the family will determine how a part flexes as geometric parameters are modified. and then load it into the project. 6 Click OK to close the Project Units window. instead of creating a new one. In the left pane of the Open dialog. navigate to a folder of your choice. select Electrical. the heat released by a light fixture affects the cooling requirements for a space. there are times when it is best to create a new family instead of attempting to create a single family with types to address every application. select 1 decimal place. Define shared parameters. If a family you are creating is very similar to an existing family. Finally. For example. 4 In the Project Units dialog.rfa. Place connectors. you modify existing components to create new types and build custom component families. open it in the Family Editor. At times. You can create a component from scratch. Create formulas for parameters. although it may be easier to modify an existing family. it is important to recognize how components interact to affect the overall design. 7 Save the family. modify it as needed.mechanical. or plumbing component. electrical.

Create Shared Parameters 8 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Fan Family | 471 . 13 Browse to a folder. and click Select. 23 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. Add shared parameters to the Family Type 21 In the Shared Parameters dialog. NOTE The parameter values stored in the shared parameter file will remain after completing this tutorial. Click Yes. and click OK. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select the Type option. click New. under Groups. and click Save. for Group parameter under. you will be prompted to choose a file from another project or to create a new file. click Family Types 9 In the Family Types dialog. 17 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click New. 12 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. The new parameter is added to the Family Types dialog under the Electrical Engineering category. click Add. click Add. enter Common For Type. enter Motor HP For Discipline. select Motor FLA. 11 If you have not already created a shared parameter file. and click Select. under Parameters. 16 Under Parameters. create additional shared parameters with the following properties: Name Voltage Motor FLA Power Phase Number of Poles Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Electrical Type Electrical Potential Current Power Integer Number of Poles 20 Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter MEP. and click OK. To reuse this tutorial. 24 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 19 Using the same method. Shared_Parameters) for the shared parameter file. enter a File name (for example. select the Shared parameter option. and click Create. click the Shared parameter option. 14 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select the Electrical Engineering. you must remove the shared parameter text file created in the previous step. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. under Parameters. 15 For Name. enter Text 18 Click OK.

460 V . create additional Family Types with the following parameter values: Name 1 HP .1 Ph. 30 For Name. as defined below: Parameter Phase Number of Poles Motor HP Power Group Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Mechanical Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Type Type Type Type Create a parameter formula to calculate power 28 In the Formula column for Power. under Parameters. 33 Using the same method.3 Ph 3 HP . enter the following formula: Voltage * Motor FLA * sqrt(if(Phase = 3. under Parameter Data. for Group parameter under. Create New Family Types 29 Under Family Types. for Parameter Group. 3. select MEP.8 Motor HP 1 2 3 34 Click OK. enter 1/6 HP . 27 Using the same method. 32 Specify the following values for the shared parameters in the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Voltage = 115 Phase = 1 Number of Poles = 1 Motor FLA = 4. click New. 1)) NOTE Formulas are case sensitive… make sure you use the same case as the names of the parameters you created. select the Type option. 26 In the Parameter Properties.208 V .4 Motor HP = 1/6 The value for Power is calculated from the parameter values specified.208 V .1 Ph 2 HP . select Voltage.3 Ph Voltage 208 208 460 Phase 1 3 3 Number of Poles Motor FLA 2 3 3 8. 472 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .25 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 31 Click OK.5 4.115 V . 35 Save the family. add the following shared parameters to the family type. and click OK. select Electrical Engineering. and click OK.8 7.

38 On the Options Bar. NOTE If necessary. Click and drag the View Cube at the upper right corner of the view to spin the ventilator as shown. alarm systems and others. click Electrical Connector. 39 Highlight the narrow face at the base of the fan housing and click to place the connector on the center of the face.Balanced. including power. telephone. number of poles and the same voltage specified.Add an electrical connector 36 Electrical connectors are used for a variety of electrical systems. press Tab to cycle through the active faces until the narrow face at the base of the fan is highlighted. 40 Click Modify Modifying a Fan Family | 473 . Connections between components in a power system must have connectors with the same. and dragging the cursor to spin a model. select Power . The electrical connector that you add here will ultimately be used in a power system. 37 On the Design Bar. See Connector Placement on page 567. and verify that is selected. Connectors can be placed on a Face or on a Work Plane. system type. TIP You can also hold the right mouse button. See Connectors on page 561. while pressing Shift.

(It is not necessary to save the i Sample Project. and observe the values in the Type Parameters 62 For Type. for Load Classification. 55 On the Design Bar. and in the Type Selector. select 1 HP-208V-1 Ph. 64 Save the family.Mech. for Voltage. 49 Click OK. click list. 54 Click Window menu ➤ Exhaust Ventilator .) Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family This exercise demonstrates using various settings on the electrical connector to define a fan powered box with variable power requirements for electric heat and motor size. select Voltage. 61 Select the fan. 59 Move the cursor into the drawing area and click to add the Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph.3 Ph.rvt file.rfa to make the family the active view. and again observe the Type Parameter values. (The exact location is not important. It also demonstrates the use of shared parameters and parameter mapping. 42 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. click Mechanical Equipment. click Family Types. for Name. select Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph. Flex the part 51 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt displays in the drawing area. 47 Using the same method. 63 Click OK. 56 The i Sample Project.Map Parameter Values to Connector 41 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.Downblast. and double-click 2 . click .rvt. and on the Options Bar. 43 Select the Electrical connector created in the previous section. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 50 Save the family. select 3 HP . in the = column. click the Training Files icon. . 57 In the Project Browser.460 V . 474 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click OK. 53 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. 58 On the Mechanical Design Bar. specify an associated family parameter for the following parameters: Parameter Number of Poles Apparent Load Associated (shared) Parameter Number of Poles Power 48 Under Electrical Loads. click Load into Projects. The values should correspond to the values entered when you created the new family types. 52 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select HVAC. click 46 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog.) 60 Click Modify.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. See Modifying a Fan Family on page 470. for Parameter group. For Discipline. and click Select. click the Training Files icon. 9 Click Edit. select the Shared parameter option. click New. 4 Click Yes when prompted to open the family for editing. 3 On the Options Bar. under Parameters. 2 Select the VAV box. enter Apparent Power Phase 1. Open the family and create parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. you will need to complete that exercise to create shared parameters that are used in this exercise. and double-click 1 . for Parameter group. The MEP group was created in the Modifying a Fan Family exercise and the parameters created in that exercise are listed under Parameters. 5 Click Family Types. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. For Type. select MEP. go back and complete the previous Modifying a Fan Family exercise.rvt. click Add. 8 In the Shared Parameters dialog.Power. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. It this is not the case. 11 Under Parameters. select Electrical. select Power. NOTE If you have not already completed the previous exercise. click Edit Family. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 475 . 6 In the Family Types dialog. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. select MEP.

select Electrical Engineering. and click OK.13 Using the same method. verify that Size 2 . 17 In the Family Types dialog. 476 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 15 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 21 Using the same method. click Add. For Phase. create the following additional shared parameters as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 2 Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor On Phase Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Type Power Power Power Integer 14 Click OK. and click OK. 19 In the Shared Parameters dialog. add the following shared parameters to the family type. select Electrical Engineering. for Group parameter under. as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor FLA Motor HP Motor On Phase Number of Poles Phase Voltage Group parameter under Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Instance Instance Type Type Instance Type Type Type 22 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 23 In the Formula column. specify formulas for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Voltage. select the Shared parameter option. enter 480. Instance parameters have (default) appended to the parameter name. select the Instance option. select the Instance option.6 inch Inlet is selected for Name. Apparent Power Phase 1 is added as an instance parameter under the Electrical Engineering group in the Family Types dialog. under Parameter Data. for Group parameter under. and click OK 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Apparent Power Phase 1. under Parameters. under Parameter Data. select Apparent Power Phase 2. and click Select. enter 3.

For Apparent Power Phase 3. For Motor HP. For Motor On Phase. Motor FLA * 277 V.6 inch Inlet VAV: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles. Place connector and map parameters 31 Click and drag the view cube to spin the model around so you can see the controls box as shown. create additional types. enter 1. enter 1/6.rfa. click new. 27 In the Family Types dialog. Use the same case for the names in formulas as the names entered when you created the parameters. Motor FLA * 277 V. 0 VA). specify the following parameter values for the Size 2 . enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 1. ■ ■ NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. and click OK. Motor FLA * 277 V.■ For Apparent Power Phase 1. For Motor FLA. For Motor On Phase. 0 VA).3. 28 Using the same method. and specify the parameters for each size listed below: Name Number of Poles 3 3 3 Motor On Motor HP Phase (Default) 1 1 1 1/3 1/2 3/4 Motor FLA Size 4 – 10 inch Inlet Size 5 – 12 inch Inlet Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet 2. For Apparent Power Phase 2. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 477 .2 5. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 3.8 inch Inlet. enter Size 3 . For Motor FLA. 25 Under Family Types.8 inch Inlet type: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 2. in the Value column. 30 Save the family as Parallel Fan Powered VAV. 26 In the Name dialog.2. enter 1. enter 1/4. enter 2. enter 3. For Motor HP. specify the following parameters for the Size 3 .9 3. enter 1. 0 VA). 24 Under Electrical Engineering. enter 3.4 29 Click OK to close the Family Types dialog.

37 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 On the Options Bar. click in the column. 35 Click Modify. and verify that is selected. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog.32 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click . select Apparent Power Phase 1. column. and click OK. For Apparent Load Phase 2. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. specify values for the following parameters: ■ For Number of Poles. and click to add the connector on the face.Unbalanced. ■ 478 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click in the Voltage. select Apparent Power Phase 2. click in the column. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. For Voltage. select Power . 36 Select the connector. select Number of Poles. and click OK. click in the column. 34 Highlight the large face on the controls box. select ■ ■ For Apparent Load Phase 1. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. click Electrical Connector.

For System Type.6 inch Inlet is selected in the Type Selector.Unbalanced is selected. and click OK. and click . and on the Options Bar. enter HVAC. 41 If prompted. select Apparent Power Phase 3. and on the Options Bar. Flex the family 40 On the Design Bar.Power. and double-click 1 . and 1000. ■ ■ 38 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog. 1000. click (Edit Circuit on Panel). verify that Power . click Load into Projects. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Project Browser.■ For Apparent Load Phase 3. 43 Select the VAV box. 51 Click OK. 39 Save the family. For Load Classification. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 479 . and on the Options Bar. The loads on phases A. select Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet. and click . and click Yes. enter 3000. B. 47 Verify that Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 2 . select Override parameter values of existing types. enter 2. 46 Select the VAV box. for Type. 48 In the Element Properties dialog. click 44 Click (Create Power Circuit). 50 Select panel HA. 49 Click OK. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. 45 Click Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. respectively. for Panel. select panel HA. and C are 2512. enter 1. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. For Electric Heat Power. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ For Motor On Phase. click in the column. . and specify the following parameters: ■ For Motor On Phase. 52 Select the VAV box.

as shown. enter 11000. 67 On the Options Bar. click . 55 Click Modify. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the aggregate air flow for the downstream components. 60 Select the supply air connector. 66 Select the 4 supply air terminals in the left room. and click Yes. 56 Select panel HA. verify that Calculated is selected for Flow Configuration. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. 63 On the Design Bar. and in the drawing area. select 480 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click Load into Projects. 54 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. click the VAV box. Create a supply air system 65 In the Project Browser. respectively. 62 Click OK.■ For Electric Heat Power. and 3667. 59 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so you can see the air supply connector.Mech. under Mechanical. When the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. and on the Options Bar. click . Specify Flow Configuration for the VAV 58 Click Window menu ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV. 57 Click OK. B. and double-click 1 . The loads on phases A. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.rfa. (Create (Select Equipment for System). and C have updated to 4819. 64 If prompted. 4027. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar click Supply Air System). select Override parameter values of existing types.

69 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. For Offset enter 9' 0". Ductwork is created for the selected solution. For Flex Duct Type. verify the following Main and Branch settings: Main ■ ■ For Duct Type.Round is selected. verify that Flex Duct Round : Flex . 70 Click OK 71 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. and on the Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 481 . click Finish Layout. and click Settings. Branch ■ ■ ■ ■ For Duct Type. enter 6' 0".68 Click (Layout Paths). to select layout 6 of 6. click Design Bar. For Offset enter 9' 0". verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected.

74 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1.6 inch Inlet VAV. In this case the first downstream zone would receive a flow of 8 gpm (0. and select Properties. a boiler may have its supply preset to 20 gpm (system supply = 20 gpm) and the connectors at 2 downstream zone valves set to System. enter 300. and press Enter to modify the air flow for the air terminal. 482 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .4 X 20 gpm). 80 Click OK. 73 In the System Browser.72 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser. 77 Double-click a tag associated with one of the air terminals supplied by the VAV. 79 In the Element Properties dialog. The Preset and System settings for Flow Configuration are used together to allow specifying a percentage of the system flow to be allocated to each downstream component. 75 In the Element Properties dialog. The Flow Factor parameter is specified as a value between 0 and 1.6 X 20 gpm). scroll down to Mechanical Airflow. and select Properties. but one with 0. When Flow Configuration is set to System the Flow Factor parameter is active. and the other would receive a flow of 12 gpm (0. the new sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals. expand Mechanical (1 systems) ➤ Supply Air ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV: Size 2 . This allows specifying a different portion of the system flow to each downstream subsystem. 76 Click OK. and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is 600 CFM.6 specified for Flow. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1. with the total for all downstream components equal to 1. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals—in this case 600 CFM (4 X 150 CFM).4 specified for Flow and the other with 0. scroll down to Mechanical Airflow and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is updated to 750 CFM. For example. Because the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. Using the combination of Preset and System settings on connectors lets you distribute flow according to the demands of a particular space. 78 Again.

click the Training Files icon. Modifying Electrical Equipment In this exercise.rfa. you modify a 208V/3Ph panel to create a 240V/3Ph family. The final section demonstrates how to load. click .208V MCB . and then map the Flow Factor to the value specified for each instance of the component used in the project. In the first section.Surface. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Number of Poles. and connect components of the newly created families in a simple project. Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorLighting and Appliance Panelboard . Modifying Electrical Equipment | 483 . 6 Click File menu ➤ Save As. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. Modify an existing panel family 1 In the Project Browser. you must create 2 additional instance parameters for the component family. all instances of the family in a project will have the same factor. enter 240. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and in the following section you modify a 480V/3Ph primary transformer to create a 480V/1Ph to 240V/1Ph secondary transformer. For Voltage. 2 In the drawing area.240V MCB .Loads. you modify existing electrical equipment families to create new families.rfa. and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. and then you use the new families in a project. select the connector. 7 In the Save As dialog. 81 Close the Family and Sample Project files. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . insert. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. To create unequal percentages for several downstream subsystems. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Electrical .NOTE Because Flow Factor and Flow Configuration are properties of the connector.Surface. enter 2.

25 In the Save As dialog. for Name. 23 Click OK. select 112. In the following sections. click Electrical Equipment. click New. for Primary Number of Poles.rfa. 19 Under Family Types. enter 2. 20 In the Name dialog. you create a new family type. right-click the Design Bar. click Delete. click Family Types. for Name. except for 15 kVA. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Single Phase Transformer . enter 0' 8 5/8" NOTE You must enter 0 for the foot value. the inch value will be applied to the foot value. 22 Under Dimensions. enter 3 kVA. Otherwise. 18 Click Apply. NOTE If the Electrical tab is not available on the Design Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. 15 Using the same method.rfa. 11 Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorDry Type Transformers . Modify an existing transformer family 9 Click File menu ➤ Open. 14 Under Family Types. 24 Click File ➤ Save As.480-208-120V . you use the modified families in a project.NEMA Type 2. Next.00 V. and click OK. enter 0' 6 1/2" For Height. 16 In the Family Types dialog. 21 Under Electrical. Primary Number of Poles is 2. 484 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Notice that the new family type is selected for Name. 17 Under Electrical. and click Electrical.480V Primary. 29 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room. verify that 15 kVA is selected. click the Training Files icon. click the Training Files icon. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Length. 12 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Next.5 kVA.rvt. 30 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. delete all of the remaining types. enter 0' 10 1/2" For Width. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 For Name. 28 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load the new panel and transformer families into a project 27 Click File menu ➤ Open. you modify an existing family type.8 Click File menu ➤ Close. verify the following: ■ ■ Primary Voltage is 480.

select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .480V Primary. The new families are loaded into the project.240V MCB . 32 In the Open dialog. You can also click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. navigate to the folder where you saved the new families. click Load. 34 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can press Spacebar to rotate a family if placement seems difficult.rfa.Surface : 100A.Power to make it the active view.31 On the Options Bar.240V MCB . TIP You can verify that the electrical families were loaded by expanding Families ➤ Electrical Equipment in the Project Browser. then while pressing CTRL. 36 Move the cursor over the wall. select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . click to place the panel on the wall as shown. 37 Using the same method. do the following: ■ Place a Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel on the wall to the right of the first panel. and double-click 1 . Test the new electrical equipment in a project 33 In the Project Browser. and after panel snaps to the inside face of the wall.rfa and Single Phase Transformer . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. click Electrical Equipment. and click Open. NOTE The panel is a wall-hosted family—it can only be placed on a wall. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 485 .Surface. 35 In the Type Selector.

40 On the Options Bar. 49 On the Options Bar.Loads. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter DP. L-G Voltage. 47 Click OK. For Phase. 44 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.Loads. enter 480 Wye. select Distribution Systems. select 480/277 Wye. A new row is added in the right pane. select 277. under Electrical . verify that Single is selected. 48 In the drawing area. enter T-LC. 41 With the panel selected. 46 In the right pane. under Electrical . Create a new distribution system 43 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. 45 Click Add. do the following: For Secondary Distribution System. Click OK. for Distribution Sys. select 480. Next. and click OK. select 120/240 Single. 38 Click Modify. select 3. For L-L Voltage. For Wires. 50 In the Element Properties dialog.480V Primary : 15kVA transformer on the wall between the panels. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. select 480 Wye. 486 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . For Panel Name.■ Place a Single Phase Transformer . 42 In the Element Properties dialog. for Panel Name. For Distribution System Types. you create a system to logically connect the panels to the transformer. click ■ ■ ■ ■ . click . select the Single Phase Transformer. Create a system 39 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel. click Electrical Settings.

51 In the drawing area.Surface : 100A panel. select T-LC. and on the Options Bar.Loads.Surface : 100A (LC) panel. 52 With the transformer selected. for Panel Name. This indicates that the transformer is associated with that distribution system. ■ 57 In the Element Properties dialog. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 487 . and click OK. 58 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 56 On the Options Bar. The DP panel is logically connected to the transformer 54 Click Modify. select the transformer. 53 On the Options Bar. For Panel.240V MCB . click to create a new circuit. click 60 On the Options Bar. 59 On the Options Bar. enter LC.240V MCB . under Electrical . This creates a logical circuit between the LC panel to the transformer. click a new circuit. select 120/240 Single. on the Options Bar. 55 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 61 Close the Simple Room without saving. . select DP. do the following: ■ ■ (Create Power Circuit) to create Click (Select a Panel for the Circuit). do the following: ■ For Distribution Sys. Notice that 480 Wye is selected for Distribution Sys on the Options Bar. Click . for Panel.

Toilet . click (Temporary Hide/Isolate) ➤ Hide Element. Select the wall. 3 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so it is oriented as shown. and on the View Control Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorCommercial . 488 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .Wall Mount Flush Valve. click Pipe Connector. However. for System Type. you will be working at the back of the toilet. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. so you must hide the wall in the view. 4 On the Design Bar. 1 The toilet is a wall-hosted component. select Sanitary. (Model Graphics Style) ➤ Hidden Line. and the extrusion that represents the wall is visible in the view. and verify that is selected. click 2 On the View Control Bar.rfa.Modifying a Water Closet This exercise demonstrates adding piping connectors to a water closet family and setting typical connector properties for domestic cold water and sanitary systems. 5 On the Options Bar.

8 Select the connector. so that the connector direction is The arrow indicates the connector direction. The connector direction determines the direction from which it will accept connections from other components.6 Zoom in. 10 Click . 9 If the arrow is pointing in toward the toilet bowl. and move the cursor over the larger of the 2 round extrusions at the back of the toilet as shown. 7 Click Modify. Modifying a Water Closet | 489 . click pointing away from the bowl. not the flow direction. highlight the round face. and click to add the connector.

Select Allow Slope Adjustments For Fixture Units. For Flow Direction. select Out. click 15 On the Options Bar. specify values for the following parameters: For Radius. in the location shown. enter 0' 1 1/2". add a Domestic Cold Water system Piping Connector. 14 Select the connector. enter 4. click ■ ■ ■ to specify connector direction. . select In. 13 Using the same method. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Modify. Clear Allow Slope Adjustments 490 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . For Flow Direction. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Radius.11 In the Element Properties dialog. For Flow Configuration. select Fixture Units. enter 0 3/4". 12 Click OK.

5.rvt. click the Training Files icon. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select a diffuser tag.Commercial Wall Mount Flush Valve. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family | 491 . Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.Ceiling Mech. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family In this exercise. For Fixture Units. 18 Click File ➤ Save As. 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ ■ For Flow Configuration. and in the Save As dialog.rfa. select Fixture Units. 17 Click OK. and double-click 1 . you modify a diffuser tag family to provide a type mark instead of the default instance mark. enter 2. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Toilet .

and click Yes when asked to open the diffuser tag for editing. select Mark. 6 Under Category Parameters. and on the Options Bar.3 On the Options Bar. click Edit Family. and click from label). and click 7 Click OK. (Remove parameter (Add parameter to label). under Label Parameters. The Family Editor opens. click Edit Label. 5 In the Edit Label dialog. 4 Select the top label (1i). The sample text changes to 1t. select Type Mark. Each label is associated with a parameter. 492 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . The diffuser tag is composed of two labels separated by a horizontal line.

and the return air diffuser type. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 493 .8 On the Design Bar. If more than one project is open. click the Training Files icon. click Yes. 9 When prompted to overwrite the existing Diffuser Tag. R-1. you modify a light fixture tag family to include panel and circuit information. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. S-1. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family In this exercise. click Load into Projects.rvt. without saving. and click OK. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. in the Load into Projects dialog. select i Sample Project. The project becomes active and the diffuser tag updates to display the supply air terminal type.

and click Yes when asked to open the light fixture tag for editing. 2 In the drawing area.1 In the Project Browser. The light fixture tag is composed of a label that is associated with a parameter. 3 On the Options Bar. enter 0 1/8".Lighting. click Edit Family. select the 1i label. 4 In the drawing area. select a light fixture tag. 7 Click the midpoint of the label to specify the copy start point. and double-click 1 . 494 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 5 On the Edit toolbar. and press Enter to specify the copy end point. click (Copy). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. click Multiple. The Family Editor opens. and after listening dimensions display. 8 Move the cursor straight down. 6 On the Options Bar.

Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 495 .The label is copied. 9 Repeat the previous steps to create a second copy of the label.

14 Under Category Parameters. 16 Click OK. and click parameter from label). select Panel.10 Click Modify. for the Panel parameter. You need to modify this box. Notice that the bounding box contains only the first label. The middle label text changes to PNL and the label is associated with the Panel parameter. select Type Mark. 496 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 12 Select the middle label. under Label Parameters. click Edit Label. you modify 2 labels. and on the Options Bar. 13 In the Edit Label dialog. (Remove 15 Under Label Parameters. and click (Add parameter to label). and drag it down so that the box contains all 3 labels. Next. 11 Select the bottom line of the box. enter PNL in the Sample Value column. The sample value is the text that identifies this label in the Family Editor.

and click Yes. select Type Mark. select i Sample Project. ■ ■ Under Category Parameters.rvt. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing are. select Circuit Number. and click For the Circuit Number parameter. If more than one project is open. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 497 . and click OK. select Override parameter values of existing types. and click (Remove parameter from label) (Add parameter to label).17 Using the same method. in the Load into Projects dialog. 19 If prompted. click Load into Projects. Load the light fixture tag family into a project 18 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and the light fixture tags update to display the panel and circuit information. enter CKT in the Sample Value column The 3 light fixture labels are as shown. modify the bottom label with the following Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Label Parameters.

the template also defines characteristics of how the family works. as they have reference 498 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. Creating Families In this lesson you learn how features of the Family Editor allow you to build custom component families. you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture. There are various light fixture family templates available in Revit MEP.20 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. If you expect to render your lighting designs. it is important that you start your lighting family with one of these templates. without saving. or profile). 9 Save the newly-defined family. You cannot change these characteristics after you have created the family. Creating a Light Fixture Family In this exercise you create an 8” ceiling hosted recessed downlight. In some cases. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. model. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. For example. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. titleblock. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. Templates also define the type of family (annotation. The process of creating a component family includes the following steps: 1 Select the appropriate family template. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. The hosting of a component is defined by the template used when the family is originally created.

4 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. and wall hosted objects. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 499 . Tilt Plane. the family will have the additional parameters: Spot Beam Angle. select Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. 3 In the New dialog. a spot fixture. ceiling hosted. The Linear template contains a model line representing the light source along the F/B axis. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters. Lighting manufacturers often allow you to download . you can also specify a . 6 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the Always Vertical option Select Light Source For Part Type.rft. objects in the linked file. and click Open. Create a new lighting family 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.ies files from the Web for their fixtures. Using this face hosted family provides the ability for the fixture to be hosted by.planes that define the location of the light source. Spot Spread Angle. Additionally.ies file. and Light Source Elevation. This can be shortened or lengthened as necessary to model the linear lighting fixture. these planes are Light Source Axis (F/B).) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path.ies file is not used for rendering. there are lighting templates for non-hosted. Spot Tilt Angle. and copy the Ltl9815. select the Normal option Clear the Shared option NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). you may use a non-lighting family template.ies file.rft) and linear (Linear Lighting Fixture*. 8 In the Project Browser. select Lighting Fixtures. or a generic fixture.rft). Light Source Axis (L/R).ies files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. and Light Source Elevation. When working in a linked file environment. This file contains engineering data that can be used to calculate the coefficient of utilization of the fixture. Using the generic face hosted and non-hosted lighting fixtures has the limitation that the hosting geometry cannot be cut. The . and move with. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\IES folder. 7 Click OK. Each family has additional parameters depending on whether it is a linear fixture. For spot light templates (Spot Lighting Fixture*. (This is the location from which the . these planes are Light Source Axis (L/R). Locate IES data file 1 Using Windows Explorer.rft) lighting templates. 5 Under Family Category. navigate to the Imperial Templates folder. When creating a lighting family.rft. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). For generic (Lighting Fixture*. When you use a spot light template. you must determine the correct path to the IES file as defined by the IESFileLocation parameter in the Revit. and double-click Front. such as Generic Model face based.

13 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. 4" above the Light Source reference plane. and Chain. 15 Zoom in on the Light Source Elevation. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. and draw a 4" horizontal line to the left of the center. Start at the Center (Left/Right) vertical reference plane. 14 On the Options Bar. . click Lines. 500 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and finish with a 1" horizontal line segment to the left. then draw a vertical line segment down to the ceiling (8"). and click OK. specify 0' 0".0" and zoom in very close to create the Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. click . and drag it up to a point 4" above the Basic Ceiling and Ceiling Plane as shown. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and sketch the shape of the fixture as shown. enter 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. 11 In the Save As dialog. Define the fixture geometry 12 On the Design Bar.TIP You may want set the scale to 6" = 1' .rfa. 9 Select the Light Source Elevation Plane. for File name. and for Offset.

click .Next you will duplicate the original outline. 17 On the Options Bar. move the cursor over the line. click just to the left of the vertical line and just above the lower horizontal line to define the thickness for the fixture as shown. 19 Using the same method. press Tab to highlight the short line. 16 Click Lines. and for Offset. then click just above the line. enter 1/16". 18 Click just above the upper horizontal line to add a line 1/16" above the existing line as shown. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the short horizontal line at the base. offset by 1/16" to define the thickness of the light fixture housing. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 501 .

and for Offset. 22 Draw lines to close the outline at the top right and lower left as shown. 502 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 21 On the Options Bar. click and . enter 0' 0". clear Chain. click Lines.20 On the Design Bar.

and clean up the inside corner as shown. The length of the line and its exact location are not important. 25 On the Design Bar. click (Trim). 26 Click Finish Sketch.23 Click Modify. and sketch the axis line for the revolve as indicated below by the dark line. but make sure it is coincident with the vertical plane. click Axis. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 503 . 24 On the toolbar.

30 On the Design Bar. select the (yellow) Light Source. 31 In the Family Types dialog. click (Point). Define family and connector properties 28 In the drawing area.27 Save the family. select true (green check. and on the Options Bar. click Light Source Definition.Lighting ■ For Calculate Coefficient of Utilization. click Family Types. click (Photometric Web). 29 In the Light Source Definition dialog. for Light distribution. specify values for the following parameters: Under Electrical . for Emit from Shape. not grey) 504 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click OK.

34 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model to view the top of the fixture. and in the Initial Intensity dialog. select <Custom>. ■ ■ A fixture’s Coefficient of Utilization may be calculated based on the geometry of the space.ies in the ■ For Light Loss Factor. and click OK. click the Value column. For Initial Intensity. and verify that (Place on Face) is selected. enter 0. enter 3000 K and click OK.Balanced. For Initial Color. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 505 . click the Value column. Lighting objects in a space contribute to the room’s Average Estimated Illumination. enter 44.85 for Value. and on the Options Bar. expand View (All) ➤ 3D Views. click file browser . and in the Initial Color dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. click Electrical Connector. enter 3200. enter 90 For Photometric Web File.Under Electrical Loads ■ For Apparent Load. select Power . enter CF42TRT Under Photometrics ■ ■ For Tilt Angle. and double-click View 1. click the Value column. for Color Temperature. and is affected by the following fixture properties: ■ ■ ■ Coefficient of Utilization (Instance) Initial Intensity (Type) Light Loss Factor (Type) 32 Click OK. This illumination is based on the lumen method using the total lumen output of the lighting fixtures in the room. 35 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click the Value column. or a static value may be entered. click Simple for Method. and in the Light Loss Factor dialog.21 VA Under Electrical ■ For Lamp. for Color Preset. click Luminous Flux. and select Ltl9815.

Balanced is specified For Apparent Load. select the connector.36 Highlight the face at the top of the fixture. Although the hole is not necessary for construction documents.95 For System Type. 40 Save the family Cut a hole in the ceiling 41 Next you cut a hole in the ceiling. click Opening. enter Lighting ■ ■ 39 Click OK. it permits light to function as expected in renderings. 38 In the Element Properties dialog. click and select Hide Element. 45 On the Options Bar. and in the Associated Family Parameter dialog. 37 Click Modify. verify that Power . and click to place the connector on the top of the fixture. 44 On the Design Bar. and on the View Control Bar. . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. select Apparent Load from the list. (Light at the intersection of planes is able to pass through the ceiling. enter 277 For Load Classification.) In the Project Browser. For Voltage. click in the column. 43 Select the yellow Light Source. and select the 2 arcs that make up the outside edge of the trim (Temporary Hide/Isolate). 506 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . specify values for the following parameters: For Power Factor. 42 Spin the model to view the bottom of the ceiling. and double-click View 1. and click ■ ■ ■ . click ring as shown. and click OK. enter 0.

In this exercise. The new lighting fixture is loaded into the project. you learned: ■ ■ ■ (Temporary Hide/Isolate). and use a Lookup Table to define several sizes for the flange. The lighting level increases to 33 fc. click 47 On the View Control Bar. and select Reset Temporary The basics of how lighting families work How to create a lighting family from a template Where to place IES files for use by lighting families Flange Family In this exercise. and double-click 1 . and the wattage increases to 168.46 Click Finish Sketch.rvt. Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external . click Load into Projects. select 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT.On the View Control Bar. you will create a flange connector to model pipe flanges for model coordination. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. 52 In the Project Browser. 55 Select the 4 downlights in the room. Revit MEP provides a Flange Family | 507 . 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa to make the family the active view. The flange will be based on a 150 pound pressure class slip on flange. 48 Save the family. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans. click the Training Files icon.csv file. 53 Click Window menu ➤ 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. 51 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room. click Hide/Isolate. 54 On the Design Bar. and in the Type Selector. The space tag indicates 22 fc and 135 W. Flex the light fixture 49 Click File menu ➤ Open.Ceiling Elec.

When installed in the default path. 5 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear the Work Plane-Based option.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. and copy the Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. select Dimensions Select Type 508 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Clear the Shared option. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. (This is the location from which the LookupTable files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. select Pipe Fittings. verify that Family parameter is selected for Parameter Type and specify the following parameter data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). navigate to the Imperial Templates folder. enter NR For Discipline. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.rfa. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters.ini file.csv file. 6 Click OK. and in the Save As dialog. 7 Click File ➤ Save. select the Transition option. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor.text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (. and click OK. 10 Under Parameters.rft. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Generic 150 psi Slip Flange.csv file defines multiple sizes for this flange. 8 Using Windows Explorer. NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP. 2 In the New dialog. 4 Under Family Category. Revit MEP looks in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables to retrieve size information. select Generic Model.csv) file. select Pipe Size For Group parameter under. Create parameters 9 Click Family Types. See Lookup Tables on page 568 and CSV File Structure on page 569. Select the Always Vertical option. The Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. select Piping For Type. For Part Type. click Add. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

create Instance parameters named D1. select the Family parameter option For Discipline. Select the Instance option 14 In the Family Types dialog. LenA3. 0’. enter NR * 2 For R1. Define work planes 18 In the Project Browser. enter LenA2 – LenA1 For D1. Level. LenA1. "D1". 0’. and select 3” = 1'. 0’.12 Click OK. and for Offset. 0’. click . 23 Click again to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the left of the center line as shown. ND) 16 Click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans. 21 On the Options Bar. select Dimensions. enter D2 / 2 For LenA3. R1. D2. enter 2" For Lookup Table Name = Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. LenA2. click Ref Plane. select Piping. For Type. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name.0". select Pipe Size. For Group parameter under. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. ND) For D2. enter 0' 2". enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ For NR. Flange Family | 509 . 17 Save the family. 13 Using the same method.csv Click Apply. ND) For LenA2. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. ND) For LenA1. 22 Click to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the right of the center line. 20 On the Design Bar. R2 and specify the following parameters for each one: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. ND. 19 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. "D2". "LenA1". "LenA2". 15 Specify formulae for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ND. and double-click Ref. enter D1 / 2 For R2.

enter Pipe. 28 On the Design Bar. click .24 Click Modify 25 Select the left plane and. for Name. click (Aligned). and on the Options Bar. under Identity Data. 29 Create a dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Connector (right) plane. 27 Using the same method. enter Connector for the Name of the right plane. click Dimension. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 Click Modify. 30 Create another dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Pipe (left) plane. 510 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

. and select 33 In the Element Properties. 38 Click OK. and 44 Draw a vertical line on both the left (Pipe) and the right (Connector) vertical reference planes. for Is Reference. 48 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. The length is not important. and on the Options Bar. and set the Projection Line weight of each category to 5. This option disables grips at the intersection of reference planes and specifies that the reference plane cannot be dimensioned to when you place a family into a project. 43 On the Design Bar. click the Value column. 46 Click Modify. clear Chain. and label it LenA2. 42 Click OK twice. Define geometry 40 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 45 Draw a horizontal line on the horizontal plane. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. but be careful to sketch them on the reference planes. under Other. under Other. click the Value column for Label. Flange Family | 511 . 41 On the Model Categories tab. between the intersections with the right and left vertical planes as shown. and on the Options Bar. 39 Save the family. click LenA1 from the list. select the dimension between the left (Pipe) plane and Center (Left/Right) plane. click Model Lines. click Visibility.32 Select the dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and right plane (Connector) and click . and click OK. 47 Select the 3 model lines. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane and the 3 vertical reference planes. 36 Click . clear Fine. click . and select Not a Reference. 34 Using the same method. click Object Styles.

for Reference. click Dimension. 512 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 49 With all 3 lines still selected. 54 Select the horizontal reference plane. from endpoint to endpoint. and in Fine view the solid model elements are shown. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. Thus. press Tab to highlight the endpoint. 52 On the Design Bar. click the Value column. 56 Using the same method. click Dimension. click . and select Not a Reference. 55 Click . and click to place the dimension. under Other. 58 Using the same method. click . and on the Options Bar. create dimensions for the right vertical line. click . then select the other endpoint. 57 On the Design Bar. create dimensions for the overall length of each vertical line.NOTE Piping objects generally show as linework in Coarse and Medium view. move the cursor to the left. we shut off the linework in Fine view. 53 Move the cursor over an endpoint on the left vertical line. 51 Click OK. and click to specify the endpoint for the dimension.

and click OK. click . click and . 69 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. 66 In the Work Plane dialog. . 61 In the Element Properties dialog. 64 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 62 Using the same method. click Radius.59 Click Modify. expand Elevations (Elevation 1). under Other. 60 Select the dimension for the overall length of the left line. 68 On the Options Bar. click 72 Select the dimension line. Flange Family | 513 . Create the first extrusion 63 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 71 Select the circle. click the Value column. 65 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. for Label. click the Value column. and select D2. 70 Click Modify. under Other. and select R2. for Label. 67 Click Lines. and in the drawing area. and click . and enter 0' 5". and on the Options Bar. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click Left. select the dimension for the right line and label it D1. specify Reference Plane : Pipe.

and click 91 Click OK. 85 On the Options Bar. and click OK. . 514 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . under Constraints. click Radius. 80 Click Finish Sketch. click Edit. under Other. and click OK. and select R1. select LenA2. 76 In the Element Properties dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.74 Click OK. 79 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. for Label. for Visibility/Graphics. 83 In the Work Plane dialog. click the Value column. in the 86 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. click Set Work Plane. Create the second extrusion 81 On the Design Bar. click and . 82 On the Sketch Editor tab on the Design Bar. for Extrusion End. click column. click 89 Select the dimension line. 78 Under Graphics. and click OK twice. 84 Click Lines. 75 Click Extrusion Properties. and enter 0' 10". 87 Click Modify. 77 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 88 Select the circle. . clear Coarse and Medium. 90 In the Element Properties. specify Reference Plane : Center (Left/Right). and in the drawing area.

105 Highlight the large diameter face of the flange. click column. for Visibility. click extrusions. Add connectors 99 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. 101 On the View Control Bar. and click OK twice. clear Coarse and Medium. and select Wireframe to view both in the 102 Spin the flange to view the face of both extrusions as shown. click Pipe Connector. 94 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. where the 2 extrusions meet. and double-click View 1. Flange Family | 515 . and click OK. (Model Graphics Style).92 Click Extrusion Properties. 96 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. verify that is selected. 100 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. select LenA1. 98 Save the family. for Extrusion End. 95 Under Graphics. 93 In the Element Properties dialog.0". select Fitting. 104 On the Options Bar. 103 On the Design Bar. 97 Click Finish Sketch. click Edit. and select 6” = 1'. expand 3D Views. and for System Type.

if necessary. click and. for Radius. enter 5". under Dimensions.106 Click to add the connector. click . 110 In the Element Properties dialog. to change the direction of flow. 107 Click Modify. 109 With the connector selected. 516 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face. and click OK. 108 Select the connector.

add a connector to the larger extrusion.111 Spin the flange to view the back of the larger extrusion. and using the same method. Flange Family | 517 . 112 Click Pipe Connector.

for Radius. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face. You then create single line geometry for the elbow. and by defining fitting size parameters. After completing the pipe fitting family. click Link Connector on the Options Bar. you create an elbow pipe fitting family. to change the direction of flow. 117 Select both connectors. 118 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 120 Save the family Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family In this exercise. 518 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . test the fitting geometry.113 Click Modify. you create the physical fitting geometry by using reference planes and lines. click 119 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. First. click and. select NR. and on the Options Bar. if necessary. in the column. and click the second connector. 116 Click Modify. under Dimensions. 114 Select the connector. and set the object visibility. you can use the same method to create a duct fitting family for air systems. and click OK twice. 115 Select the first connector.

14 Select the 2 reference planes. one window for each open project remains open. click . Level floor plan window. click the current scale value. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 519 . 9 In the Project Browser. For Part Type.rft.NOTE Fittings are among the most complex families to create. 13 On the View Control Bar. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Close Hidden Windows closes all of the hidden windows for a project. Level to make it the active view. A new family file is created and new views open. select Elbow. 8 In the Save As dialog. creating system families typically takes more time to complete. 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. You can also press CTRL+S. on the Edit toolbar. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. and double-click Ref. 10 Maximize the Ref. navigate to a folder of your choice. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. verify that Imperial Templates is selected. select Pipe Fittings: 5 Under Family Parameters. It may take a longer to complete this exercise as compared to other exercises in this tutorial. They are not displayed when the family is used in a building model. and verify that both reference planes have been pinned. if you have other projects open during a session. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans. and select 6" = 1'-0". Select Generic Model. 7 Click File ➤ Save. Even if you have created parametric families before. under Family Category. Verify that Shared is cleared. However. and save the family as Threaded Generic Elbow. Configure the elbow pipe fitting family 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. It is recommended that you methodically follow the steps and periodically check your work against the exercise. Click Open. 2 In the New dialog. 6 Click OK. Define reference planes Reference planes are used to define relationships between the geometric components within the Family Editor. Verify that Always vertical is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Work Plane-Based is cleared. If necessary.

Pinning prevents accidentally moving the reference planes. enter Fitting. and in the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and for Offset. click Ref Plane. 18 Click Modify. add another vertical plane 2" to the left of the left (Fitting) plane. 16 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. click . 21 Using the same method. 23 Add new reference plane 2" above the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. click . A tooltip and the Status Bar (which is located below the Design Bar) displays the object’s name. 22 Select the horizontal Center (Front/Back) reference plane. enter Coupling. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 520 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 0' 1". TIP You can identify an object in the drawing area by placing the cursor over the object. for Name. for Name. 17 Click to the left the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane to place a new reference line to the left of the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 15 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 19 Select the left plane. under Identity Data.

25 Right-click the new reference plane. and click OK. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 On the Options Bar. Create reference lines and dimension them Reference lines are used to define the basic geometry of the family. For Offset. click Reference Lines. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 521 . You create reference lines in order to create sweeps for the fitting geometry. enter Radius. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected.24 Click Modify. 28 On the Design Bar. (Line) is selected. for Name. Verify that Radius is cleared. They are not displayed when the family is used in a project. and click Element Properties.

31 On the Edit toolbar. 37 Align and lock the left end of the right reference line to the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 32 Select the middle vertical reference plane (Fitting). 34 Using the same method. 522 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . align and lock the left end of the reference line to the left vertical reference plane (Coupling). click (Align). draw another reference line to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane as shown. draw a horizontal line of the approximate length and location as shown.30 In the drawing area. 38 Align and lock the right reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. 35 Align and lock the reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. 33 Click to lock the end of the reference line to the Fitting plane. 36 Using the same method. and click the right end of the reference line to align the right end of the reference line to the Fitting reference plane. you draw an arced reference line. Next.

43 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing the arc. and press Enter to specify a 45 degree radius for the arc. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 523 . click Reference Lines. ■ You may need to click ■ ■ For Offset. verify that 0' 0" is specified. and zoom out to view 2 dimension controls ( ). select this sketching option from the list. 44 Click Modify. enter 45. do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. 41 In the drawing area. and after the endpoint snap displays. Verify that Radius is cleared. 42 Move the cursor directly down. 45 Select the arc reference line. click the intersection of the Fitting and the Radius reference planes to specify the center of the arc. click the right end of the left reference line to specify the first endpoint of the arc. 40 On the Options Bar. and. (Arc from center and endpoints).39 On the Design Bar.

and click to specify the reference line end point at an approximate line length as shown. and adjust the length of the witness lines as shown. The dimension control that is located perpendicular to the line being dimensioned represents the overall length of that line. dimensions are temporary—they only display when selected. Next. (Line) is selected. For Offset. 50 Click the right end of the arced reference line to specify the diagonal reference line start point. 48 On the Design Bar. 47 Drag the permanent dimension annotation away from the arc reference line.NOTE Temporary dimensions have two dimension controls that allow you to convert the temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 46 Click the dimension control that controls the overall dimension (located to the lower-right of the arc). 49 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected. The dimension control located near the reference plane represents the projected length of that line relative to the reference plane. Verify that Radius is cleared. you draw a diagonal reference line. 524 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 51 Draw a diagonal reference line to extend the arc at a 45 degree angle toward the Radius reference plane. click Reference Lines. By default.

Between the Fitting and the Center vertical reference planes. 55 Drag the dimension line down and to the right to move it out of the way. 54 Using the same method. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Default linear style is selected. 58 On the Options Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 525 . 53 Select the diagonal reference line. click Dimension.While drawing the diagonal reference line. click (Angular). 61 Position the dimension annotations and witness lines as shown. on the Options Bar. 56 On the Design Bar. 52 Click Modify. convert the temporary dimension for the overall length of the diagonal reference line to a permanent dimension. zoom the view to display the 2 dimension controls. and add an angular dimension between the diagonal reference line and the right horizontal reference line (which is located below the diagonal reference line). 59 Add the following aligned dimensions: Between the Radius and the Center (Front/Back) horizontal reference planes. verify that ■ ■ ■ (Aligned) is selected. 57 In the Type Selector. and clean up the witness lines as necessary. the Tangent Extension tooltip may display to indicate that the diagonal reference line is tangent to the arced reference line. Between the Coupling and the Fitting vertical reference planes. 60 With the Dimension tool active.

create the following family parameters: Name Discipline Type of Parameter Group parameter under Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Angle Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Instance/Type Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance LenA2 BdyRad CplRad NomDia NomRad Ang Piping Piping Piping Piping Piping Common 526 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 67 Click OK. click Add. select Pipe Size. Select Instance to create an Instance Parameter. The new family parameter. 65 In the Parameter Properties dialog. For Group parameter under. 64 In the Family Types dialog. LenA1. enter LenA1.62 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. For Type of Parameter. select Piping. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Create family parameters and assign them to dimensions 63 On the Design Bar. select Dimensions. verify that Family parameter is selected. is listed under Dimensions in the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. under Parameters. under Parameter Type. 68 Using the same method. 66 Under Parameter Data. For Discipline.

select each dimension and associate it to a family parameter as shown. specify that following values and formulae: ■ ■ ■ ■ For CplRad. Revit MEP uses this pipe size information to define pipe fitting size after you specify a pipe diameter. Use a lookup table file to define multiple sizes A lookup table file is a CSV (comma separated value) text file that contains pipe size information. in the Formula column. and copy the Threaded Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 527 . enter NomRad * 2. Fittings must have their connectors (which you place later in this exercise) on lines that intersect the Center (Left/Right) and Center (Front/Back) reference planes. 75 Using Windows Explorer. NomDia. Do not select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter as this will cause errors. select the LenA1 family parameter. select the (left) dimension that is dimensioning the Center (Front/Back) and Radius reference planes. 73 Using the same method. 71 In the drawing area. NOTE When specifying formulae. 69 In the Family Types dialog. 74 Press CTRL+S. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. 70 Click OK. the calculated length defines the geometry. Lookup tables are not used to determine pipe sizes as a result of using the Pipe Sizing tool—these pipe sizes are determined by various project-specific factors. you specify values and formulae for the family parameters that you added. in the Formula column. in the Value column. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. in the Value column. For LenA2.25". enter LenA1 * tan(Ang / 2). enter 1. for Label. NOTE Associate each dimension separately. 72 On the Options Bar.Next. enter 2". The dimension is associated and controlled by the LenA1 family parameter. For NomRad.

NomDia). Level floor plan is the active view. NomDia). For BdyRad. For CplRad. you specify formulae that use the lookup table file to determine pipe size. 0. The formulae are applied and the dimensions are adjusted. NomDia). 80 Press CTRL+S to save the family. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. "LenA1". enter the following formulae: ■ ■ ■ For LenA1. 78 In the Formula column.rft. However. NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. 76 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. "CplRad". enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. 83 In the Project Browser. 81 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. "BdyRad". verify that the Ref.Generic Elbow. 528 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. you must save the lookup table file in a plain text format. Create a fitting profile You create a fitting profile in order to provide a geometrical shape for the sweep extrusion. 0.csv file extension and copy it to the LookupTables folder. you can add them according to manufacturers’ specifications. This is the default path. 82 In the New dialog. 79 Click OK. copy the lookup table data from the problematic lookup table file and paste it into a new text file. click Family Types. if specific pipe sizes that you need are not present in the lookup table file by default. in the Value column. for Lookup Table Name. you begin creating the fitting geometry. 0. select Profile. Save the text file with the file name including the .ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). RELATED During fitting creation. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. 77 In the Family Types dialog. This sweep uses the profile and the reference lines to create the elbow fitting geometry. Next. If you encounter this type of issue. If the file is saved in a proprietary format. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name.csv lookup table file. and click Open. enter Threaded Generic Elbow.csv and click Apply. Next. Revit MEP may not be able to read it and any family type parameter formulae that refer to that lookup table will most likely return a value of 0 and errors will occur.

and on the Options Bar. zoom out. select Center Mark Visible. under Graphics. The center mark displays allowing you to align the circle to the reference planes. click (Align). 87 In the drawing area. 95 Select the circle. 85 In the Type Selector. 97 On the View Control Bar. 92 Click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane.0". enter 1". verify that 0' 0" is specified. click the current scale. Verify that Radius is cleared. verify that Profiles is selected. click . You may need to click ■ ■ and select this sketching option from the list. ). 88 Click Modify. and then click the circle center mark to align the circle horizontally.84 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 93 Click to lock the circle to the horizontally. For Offset. 90 In the Element Properties dialog. 96 Click the dimension value. ■ (Circle). 86 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. and click OK. align and lock the circle vertically. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 529 . do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. and select 6" = 1'. draw a circle with any radius in the approximate location as shown. 98 Zoom in to view the sketch. click Lines. 91 On the Edit toolbar. 89 Select the circle. and click the dimension control ( The temporary dimension converts to a permanent dimension. 94 Using the same method.

select Pipe Size. For Discipline. you create a new family type. and click OK. 103 Name the new family type. enter Rad. click Family Types. The new family parameter is listed under Dimensions. For Group parameter under. The new family type is listed in the Name list. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. 106 In the drawing area. select Piping. 102 In the Family Types dialog. 100 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameter Data. 107 On the Options Bar. For Type of Parameter. Next. select Dimensions. click Add. 101 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Rad. 105 In the Family Types dialog. Verify that the Type option is selected to create a Type parameter. 104 Using the same method. Fitting. Click OK. The dimension is now associated to and controlled by the Rad family parameter. under Family Types. under Parameters.99 On the Design Bar. 530 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select the dimension. click New. create a family type named Coupling. for Label.

select BdyRad. click Load into Projects to load the Threaded Pipe Profile into the Threaded – Generic Elbow family. under Existing family parameters of compatible type.Generic Elbow project becomes active. TIP Remember that when you use cross-picking (drag right to left) to select an object. for Rad. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. 117 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. right click Coupling. and click OK. This allows for parametric changes in the fitting geometry to occur. Create sweeps using reference lines The elbow fitting geometry consists of 2 couplings connected by the fitting body. 116 In the Associate Family Parameter.108 Click File ➤ Save. for Rad. 109 On the Design Bar. Notice that the Threaded . you create the fitting geometry. 115 Under Dimensions. You create sweeps using the reference lines as sweep paths to create the fitting geometry. select Fitting. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. click . 112 In the Associate Family Parameter. the cross-picking border only needs to intersect an object in order to select it. click Apply. an object must be fully contained when using a pick box (drag left to right). Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 531 . and click Properties.rfa. 113 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. Next. Next. select CplRad. click . under Dimensions. 118 In the drawing area. under Existing family parameters of compatible type. In contrast. you load the fitting profile into the project. and save the family as Threaded Pipe Profile. Associate family parameters to a profile parameter You associate family parameters to the Rad profile parameter for each family type in order to control the radius of the elbow fitting geometry. 114 For Type. The object does not need to be fully contained within the border. 110 In the Project Browser. Each sweep is based on the profile that you created and loaded into the project. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Threaded Pipe Profile.

123 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sweep. 532 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list. 120 In the Filter dialog. 127 On the Options Bar. 125 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 121 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 126 In the drawing area. select the left horizontal reference line. click Finish Path. Only the reference lines and reference planes display. Y. Verify that the X. and Angle options are specified at 0. 124 In the drawing area. click Pick Path. clear Reference Lines and Reference Planes. 128 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Filter Selection). click the red dot on the horizontal reference line.119 On the Options Bar. 122 On the Design Bar.

click Finish Path. click Pick Path. click the red dot on the arced reference line. Next. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 533 . 134 On the Options Bar. 133 In the drawing area. Verify that the X. and Angle options are specified at 0. Y. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Fitting from the profile list. click Finish Sweep. select the arced reference line. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. you create the geometry for the fitting body. 132 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar.The geometry for the left coupling is created. 130 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 129 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 131 In the drawing area. 135 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

clear all annotation categories. and select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list to the right reference line to create the geometry for the right coupling. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active.The geometry for the fitting body is created. 137 In the Project Browser. 138 With the 3D view active. Next. enter VG. 136 Using the same method. and click OK. Next. The elbow fitting geometry is created. 139 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. 534 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . you create the right coupling geometry for the elbow fitting. The fitting geometry displays. you verify the fitting geometry. add a solid sweep.

Level to make it the active view. drag the cursor to spin the model. In this section. 143 In the drawing area. (Filter Selection). select Other. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. Create detail level geometry Detail level geometry is the geometry that displays when you select a detail level. and click OK. and verify the fitting geometry. 144 On the Options Bar. click The 3 sweeps are selected. you draw model lines to create the single line fitting geometry. First. This fitting geometry displays when the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are used.140 While pressing SHIFT and the middle mouse button. 146 On the View Control Bar. Coarse and Medium detail levels display pipe and pipe fittings as single line. 145 In the Filter dialog. 141 In the Project Browser. click Check None. In Revit MEP. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. you need to hide some of the geometry in the family to make it easier to create model lines for the single-line display. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 535 . 142 Press CTRL+S to save the family. The Fine detail level displays pipe and pipe fittings as double line. double-click Floor Plans ➤ Ref.

Select (Pick Lines). 147 On the Design Bar. 149 On the Options Bar. 536 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 150 In the drawing area. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. select the left horizontal reference line.Only the reference planes and reference lines display. do the following: ■ For Plane. click Model Lines. verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Lock is cleared. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. 148 In the Type Selector.

click to lock the model line to the reference line. you highlight through the vertical hierarchy of objects (from top to bottom).A model line is created over the reference line. and on the Options Bar. 151 With the model line selected. select the arced reference line to create an arced model line. 154 Select the arced model line to display its temporary dimension. A tooltip and the Status Bar display the name of the object. 153 Click Modify. for Label. This converts the overall angle temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. select Ang. 157 Select the permanent dimension. 155 Zoom out. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 537 . TIP You can identify objects that are located under other objects by placing the cursor over an object and press Tab. and click the dimension control ( ) that is located at the lower-right. This associates the angle dimension of the arced model line to the Ang family parameter. Each time you press Tab. 156 Click Modify. and lock the model line to the arced reference line. 152 With the Model Lines tool active and using the same method.

and associate it to the LenA1 family parameter. press Tab to locate the model line. then click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane. click Dimension. NOTE Make certain that you select the model line and not the reference line. If necessary. 166 In the drawing area.158 Relocate the dimension annotation. 159 Using the same method. create a diagonal model line by picking the diagonal reference line (located at the right end of the arced model line). convert the diagonal model line overall length temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. 164 On the Options Bar. associate the new angular dimension to the Ang family parameter. Revit MEP warns you that locking the alignment would over constrain the sketch. 169 Relocate the dimension annotations. 163 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. verify that Angular Dimension Style : Linear angular style is selected. click the diagonal model line. If you lock it. 168 Using the same method. 161 Select the diagonal model line. 160 Click Modify. you dimension the diagonal model line. 162 Using the same method. 538 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click (Angular). Next. and modify the witness lines as shown. 165 In the Type Selector. 167 Click Modify. and finally move the cursor and click to place the dimension. and modify the witness lines as shown. NOTE Do not lock the diagonal model line.

click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click Family Types. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 539 . The part flexes to become a 90 degree elbow fitting. and click Apply. for Ang.170 On the View Control Bar. under Dimensions. Flex the part 172 On the Design Bar. 173 In the Family Types dialog. enter 90. 171 Press CTRL+S. Next. you flex the part to validate the design.

176 On the Options Bar. this is usually caused by a constraint issue. Lines (Pipe Fittings) are the model lines. and click OK. you create tick marks. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in view. Next. Check all constraints and verify that model lines were created and properly constrained. click (Filter Selection). 174 Restore the Ang parameter to 45.NOTE If the part does not flex and errors occur. Add tick marks and dimension them You create tick marks to indicate the end of the fitting when viewing the fitting in either the Coarse or Medium (single line) detail level. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 175 In the drawing area. 540 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 178 On the View Control Bar. Everything except for model lines and reference planes are selected. clear Lines (Pipe Fitting) and Reference Planes. and click OK. 177 In the Filter dialog.

click Model Lines. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. Verify that Radius is cleared. 183 At the right end of the fitting. Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. 182 At the left end of the fitting. 181 On the Options Bar.Only model lines and reference planes display. 180 In the Type Selector. Line length is approximate. TIP You draw this model line on top of the Coupling reference plane. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 541 . do the following: ■ For Plane. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. verify that 0' 0" is specified. draw a model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the horizontal model line as shown. draw another model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the diagonal model line as shown. 179 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

length is approximate. The 2 tick marks are drawn. 185 In the Type Selector. dimension the bottom half of the left model line.Again. click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane and click the top end point of the model line (tick mark). 186 On the Options Bar. dimension both halves of the right model line (tick mark) by clicking the diagonal model line first. The top half of the model line (tick mark) is dimensioned. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Linear is selected. then move the cursor to the left and click to place the dimension. Next. verify that (Aligned) is selected. 188 Using the same method. 184 On the Design Bar. 189 Using the same method. NOTE You must click the reference plane first to dimension this model line. 187 On the left end of the fitting. you dimension each side of the 2 tick marks. 542 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click Dimension. and then clicking an endpoint of the model line (tick mark).

click (Angular). and modify the witness lines as shown. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 543 . You may need to zoom out to locate the lock. 192 Using the same method. The dimension are as shown. 190 Click Modify. 198 Relocate the dimension annotations. associate the other 3 model line dimensions to the CplRad parameter. You cannot select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter. and on the Options Bar. move the cursor down and click to place the dimension.You place 2 dimensions for the right model line. 193 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. NOTE You must associate each dimension separately. for Label. you create an angular dimension between the diagonal model line and the right model line tick mark. 195 Click the diagonal model line and then click the right model line tick mark. 196 Click Modify. select CplRad This associates that dimension to the CplRad family parameter. and lock it to 90 degrees. 194 On the Options Bar. Next. 197 Select the angular dimension. 191 Select the lower dimension for the left model line.

544 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .199 On the View Control Bar. 202 In the Family Types dialog. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ . enter 90. click Family Types. and for NomRad enter 1 1/2". for Ang. 200 Press CTRL+S to save the family. Flex the part 201 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click Apply. The elbow fitting flexes into a 90 degree elbow that has a 3 inch diameter.Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.

select Lines (Pipe Fittings). 206 In the Filter dialog. the NomRad value that you specified required a pipe diameter that is not included in the lookup table file. and click OK. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 545 . 208 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click (Filter Selection). Only model lines are selected. Next. click Check None. Specify object visibility You specify object visibility to determine the type of elbow fitting geometry that displays for each detail level setting. NOTE If errors occur while flexing the fitting. and click OK. 207 With the model lines selected. Next. verify that Coarse and Medium are selected. This specifies that the single-line fitting geometry will display when only the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are selected. Next.203 Continue to flex the fitting by changing the Ang and NomRad parameter values. 204 In the drawing area.csv lookup table file for the valid pipe diameters or add new pipe diameters based on the manufacturers’ specifications. click Visibility. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. you set object visibility. clear Fine. You may want to refer to the Threaded Generic Elbow. you specify the 2-line geometry for the Fine detail level setting. You created the detail level geometry for the elbow fitting and flexed this geometry to validate it. you specify this single line geometry to a detail level setting. 205 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar.

219 On the View Control Bar. The 2-line fitting geometry will display only when the Fine detail level setting is selected. verify that Fine is selected. Add connectors 215 In the Project Browser. click (Filter Selection). Only the 3 sweeps are selected. and verify that Face) is selected. 212 With the sweeps selected. 221 On the Design Bar. 214 Press CTRL+S. and click OK. 211 In the Filter dialog. on the Options Bar. and after the edge highlights. click None. you add connectors to the elbow fitting family. select Dimensions. clear Coarse and Medium. click Pipe Connector. The fitting displays. 220 Spin the model to view the faces at the ends of the fitting. and click OK. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. click to place the primary connector. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. click (Filter Selection). Next. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the view. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active. 216 In the drawing area. (Place on 223 Place the cursor on the edge of the right face of the fitting. select Other. 213 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. select Fitting from the system type list. click Visibility.209 In the drawing area. click None. 218 In the Filter dialog. 210 On the Options Bar. 222 On the Options Bar. You begin by placing the primary connector. 217 On the Options Bar. 546 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

Unexpected behavior can result if the primary connector is not properly placed relative to the other connectors. NOTE When you place fitting connectors. You place the primary connector on the right face because this face is on the X-axis. and that if all connectors are not properly rotated and linked. Notice that crosshairs display indicating that this is the primary connector. place a connector on the left face of the fitting. the primary connector must be placed on the face that is on the X-axis. 224 Using the same method. You can verify this by viewing the face in a floor plan view. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 547 .The primary connector is placed.

it is the recommended that you rotate them so that they are oriented vertically. select ■ . Although the connectors are round. 548 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click OK. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. ■ ■ For Radius. The 2 connectors are linked. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 227 On the Options Bar. 230 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: For System Type. under Instance Parameters. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. verify that Fitting is selected. ■ The connector radii change. click . and click the other connector.225 Click Modify. and that these parameters cannot be edited in the Element Properties dialog. you rotate the connectors. and click OK. Next. This allows the fitting radius to change after you specify a pipe diameter or perform pipe sizing. 228 In the drawing area. 229 On the Options Bar. For Angle. It also allows the fitting angle to change as a result of modifications to the pipe layout. Rotate connectors 231 In the 3D view. select NomRad. click OK. you specify connector properties. Next. Next. The 2 selected connectors display in red. The connector angle constraint and radius dimension are now associated to parameters. Notice that the connectors are oriented horizontally. Notice that values are assigned to both associated parameters. click . select Ang. 226 Select the primary connector (indicated by crosshairs). click Link Connector. you link both connectors. select the 2 connectors.

and after the intersection snap displays. Remember that for rectangular connectors. the rectangular duct fitting will be inserted improperly. click to specify the rotation start point. If rectangular connectors are not rotated properly. the rectangular connector must be oriented so that the width is assigned to the face that is on the X and Y axes. 235 Move the cursor clockwise 90 degrees. it is extremely important for rectangular connectors such as those on rectangular duct fittings. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 549 . You may find it easier to rotate connectors in a 3D view. The height is not on these axes. where the part geometry is clearly visible. 233 Select the connector. and on the Options Bar. creating an unexpected result. and click to specify the rotation end point. click (Rotate). 232 Spin the fitting to view the entire primary connector. The connector orientation determines the correct orientation of the objects that are automatically inserted on the part. 234 Move the cursor over the model line and to the left of the connector arrow. Although this is not as important for round connectors.IMPORTANT Connector rotation is a critical part of connector placement.

550 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .NOTE Do not use the flip arrows to flip the connector with respect to its reference plane. you verify the connector arrow direction. The primary connector is rotated and now has a vertical orientation. You will learn more about connector arrows in the next section. Next. 237 Press CTRL+S to save the family. 236 Using the same method. This also flips the connector arrow. rotate the secondary connector so that it has a vertical orientation.

239 Press CTRL+S. 241 In the New Project dialog. It does not indicate flow direction. This template may not be the Systems-Default template. In most instances. If the template file path does not point to the Systems-Default. you load the threaded elbow family into the new project. Test the elbow fitting in a project 240 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 243 On the Design Bar. Next. verify that Project is selected. The elbow family is loaded into the new project and the new project becomes active. You can modify the connector arrow direction by selecting the connector and clicking the flip arrows. based on the systems default template. IMPORTANT Connector arrows indicate the direction of a duct or pipe (extrusion) when it is being created to complete a connection. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Template file. verify that the path points to the Systems-Default. The Systems-Default template creates views for all system types allowing you to model different systems in one project. 244 In the Project Browser. and click OK. a new project is created based on the current project template. Otherwise. the duct or pipe when created will pass through the object geometry instead of away from it. then click Browse. 242 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded Generic Elbow.Mech view is located under Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. opens. If more than one project is open. TIP You can also set the project template file path for all new projects on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Options). Because Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 551 .3D View to switch back to the threaded coupling family. verify that each connector arrow indicates an outward direction from its connector as shown. click Load into Projects.Mech mechanical floor plan is the active view. Under Create New.Verify connector arrow direction 238 In the 3D view. NOTE If you click on the Standard toolbar. Click OK. verify that the 1 . This is the default view when a project.rfa .rte template. a connector arrow points outward away from the object to which the connector is associated.rte template file. The 1 . and locate this template file. select the project that you just created from the Load into Projects dialog.

it is associated with the mechanical discipline, both ducts and pipe can be created in the 1 - Mech view. 245 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. Next, you assign the new threaded generic elbow fitting to a pipe type. 246 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. 247 On the Options Bar, click .

248 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 249 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for Elbow, select Threaded – Generic Elbow: Threaded – Generic Elbow, and click OK twice. 250 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter) select 3”. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Verify that the Offset elevation is specified at 9' 0"

251 In the drawing area, draw some piping, using various angles and offset elevations. NOTE Remember that if errors occur during fitting insertion, it is usually because the specified pipe diameter was not in the Threaded Generic Elbow lookup table file. 252 On the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, click Coarse, Medium, and Fine to see how the new elbow fitting geometry displays in both the floor pan and the 3D views.

You have verified that the threaded elbow fitting was correctly inserted, that the pipe was created in the correct direction away from the elbow, and that the detail level geometry displayed properly. Next, you check connectivity. Check connectivity 253 Place the cursor over the piping, and press Tab to check connectivity. The piping highlights indicating that it is connected. 254 Click Modify. Hide shape handles 255 In the Project Browser, double-click the 1 - Mech view to make it the active view. 256 In the drawing area, select an elbow from your test piping layout.

552 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

257 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the elbow. Notice that triangular and dot shape handles display on the elbow along with the 2 connectors.

258 Drag the upper triangular shape handle upward as shown.

Notice that this shape handle modified the fitting geometry.

Other shape handles can modify aspects of the fitting such as location. These modifications can violate the design intent of the elbow fitting.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 553

IMPORTANT Shape handles are not used for Revit MEP system families but they display by default when you create a new family. If shape handles are not hidden and they are inadvertently dragged during your modeling session, the geometry or placement of the family will be adversely affected. This can create unexpected results, especially for duct fittings. This is because, unlike pipe fittings, duct fittings use formulae that reside in the family rather than in an external lookup table file to determine size. It is highly recommended that you hide all shape handles for Revit MEP families before using them in a project. To hide the shape handles in a system family, you need to open the family in the Family Editor and specify the Is Reference instance parameter as Not a Reference for all reference lines and all reference planes that are used for that family. 259 Press CTRL+Z to undo the modification. 260 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded - Generic Elbow.rfa - Floor Plan: Ref. Level to switch to the elbow family floor plan view. 261 In the drawing area, cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing, including reference planes.

262 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

263 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Reference Planes, and click OK. Only the reference planes are selected. 264 On the Options Bar, click .

265 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Is Reference, select Not a Reference, and click OK. 266 Using the same method, specify Not a Reference for all reference lines. 267 Press CTRL+S to save the family. 268 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. If more than one project is open, in the Load into Projects dialog, select the test project in which you tested the elbow fitting, and click OK. 269 After a message informs you to overwrite the existing version of the threaded generic elbow, click Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. The test project becomes active. 270 In the 1 - Mech floor plan view, zoom in and select an elbow from your piping layout. Notice that all shape handles are hidden.

554 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

The threaded elbow is ready to be used in a project. RELATED Although the physical geometry of this fitting is accurate, it is inconsistent with a real-world threaded elbow in that the connectors on this elbow fitting are on the outer face of the threaded portion of the fitting. This prevents the pipe from engaging the fitting. You can use the Hidden Line model graphics style to verify this. If the part were modeled so that the pipe engaged the fitting, proper performance of Revit MEP would be impacted due to the way hidden lines are calculated and drawn.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family
It is likely that you will need to create annotation symbols that are not part of a building model. For example, a common symbol in MEP drawings is a New to Existing Connection callout. In this exercise, you create such an annotation. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 2 In the New dialog, select Generic Annotation.rft, and click Open. 3 Maximize the window, and in the drawing area, zoom in to view the note (located near the intersection of the reference planes). This note contains key points to remember when creating an annotation family. 4 Select the note and delete it. 5 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the intersection of the 2 reference planes. Draw lines 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 8 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Clear Chain.

(Draw), and

(Line) are selected.

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

9 Click the intersection of the 2 reference planes to specify the line start point, move the mouse to the right, and after listening dimensions appear, enter 0 1/8, and press Enter. This creates a 1/8" line to the right of the intersection. The line is over the reference line. 10 Using the same method, draw 3 more 1/8" lines located above, below, and to the left of the intersection as shown.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 555

TIP You can also mirror the opposite lines instead of drawing them. 11 In the drawing area, while pressing CTRL, select the 2 reference planes. 12 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left under the drawing area), click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. This hides the reference planes allowing you to better view the lines.

Next, you create the filled regions. Create filled regions

13 On the toolbar, click

(Fine Lines).

14 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design, verify that Lines is selected. 16 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 17 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Select

(Draw) is selected.

(Arc from center and endpoints). and, select this sketching option from the list.

You may need to click

Click Radius, and enter 3/32".

18 Zoom the view, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the arc.

556 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

19 Move the cursor directly up and over the end of the upper vertical line, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the start point of the arc.

20 Move the cursor over the right horizontal line, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the end point of the arc.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 557

An arced line is drawn.

21 With the Lines tool active, on the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Click

(Draw) and Chain are selected.

(Line).

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

22 In the drawing area, click the upper end point of the arced line, then click the intersection of the 4 lines, and finally click the lower end point of the arced line.

558 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

A chain of 2 lines is drawn. 23 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. This filled region is created.

24 Using the same method, draw a filled region on the opposite lower-left quadrant.

Next, you draw a circle around the 2 filled regions. 25 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Lines. 26 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Click

(Draw) is selected.

(Circle).

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 559

■ ■

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Click Radius, and verify that 0' 3/32" is specified.

27 In the drawing area, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the circle. 28 Click Modify.

29 Click File ➤ Save, and save the family as New to Existing.rfa Test the annotation symbol in a project 30 Click File menu ➤ Open. 31 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. 32 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.rvt. 33 Click Window menu ➤ New to Existing.rfa - Drawing Sheet to switch to the new annotation symbol family. 34 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 35 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 36 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar, click Symbol. 37 In the Type Selector, verify that New to Existing is selected. 38 On the Options Bar, click .

39 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 40 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow Filled 15 Degree, and click OK twice. 41 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 42 In the drawing area, zoom in, and click to place the annotation symbol in the project. 43 Press ESC twice. Next, you modify the symbol leader. 44 Select the leader to display shape handles.

560 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

45 Drag the middle shape handle up to modify the middle of the leader.

46 Drag the end shape handle to modify the annotation symbol as shown.

47 Select the symbol, and drag the cross-arrows to relocate the symbol. 48 Click File menu ➤ Close. You do not need to save the project.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts
A defining feature of Revit MEP content is the concept of connectors. Connectors allow Revit MEP content to participate in specific systems and facilitate calculations for a variety of parameters.

Connectors
The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family.

Duct connectors are associated with ductwork, duct fittings, and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections, including power, telephone, alarm systems and others.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts | 561

Pipe connectors are used for piping, pipe fittings, and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids.

The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. Steam, medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly, as after this selection is made, it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline.

Connector Properties
The discipline assigned to a connector determines the connector’s properties. The following tables show the different connector parameters, by property group, for each discipline and a brief description of their functionality.
Electrical Constraints Edge loop centered Graphics Size on screen Electrical - Loads True Load Phase 3 Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 3) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 2) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 1) x (Power Factor). Percentage of power attributed to this connector. Active only when Power is specified as System Type. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 3). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >2. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 2). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >1. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor. Connector placement method (read only).

True Load Phase 2

True Load Phase 1

Power Factor

Apparent Load Phase 3

Apparent Load Phase 2

562 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Apparent Load Phase 1

Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 1). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current). Active only when Balanced Load is True and System Type is Power. The voltage specified on the connector. Active only when the System Type is Power. Possible values are: Data, Power - Balanced, Power - Unbalanced, Telephone, Security, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Controls, Communication. Possible values are: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. Possible values are: Lagging, Leading. Possible values are: 1, 2, or 3.

Apparent Load

Voltage

System Type

Load Classification Power Factor State Number of Poles Identity Data Index Primary Connector

A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s electrical data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. A description of the connector

Connector Description

Mechanical (HVAC) Constraints Edge loop centered Angle Connector placement method (read only) Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Flow Factor Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

Connectors | 563

Loss Coefficient Flow Configuration Flow Direction System Type

Active only when the Loss Method is Coefficient. Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Possible values are: Supply, Return, Exhaust, Other, Undefined. Possible values are: Not Defined, Coefficient, Specific Loss.

Loss Method Mechanical - Airflow Pressure Drop Flow Dimensions Shape Height

Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss. The amount of air flowing at this connector.

Possible values are: Rectangular or Round. The height of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The width of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The radius of the connector when the Shape is defined to be round.

Width

Radius

Identity Data Index Primary Connector A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s HVAC data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only) A description of the connector

Link Connector Index Connector Description

Mechanical (Piping) Constraints Edge loop centered Connector placement method (read only).

564 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Angle

Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Fixture Units Active only when the System Type is Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, or Domestic Cold Water and the Flow Configuration is Fixture Units. K Coefficient (K Factor) is only editable if Loss Method is specified as “K Coefficient”. Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Volumetric flow rate of fluid through connector. Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Bidirectional is active only when the Flow Configuration is Calculated. Possible values are: Not Defined, K Coefficient from Table, K Coefficient, Specific Loss. Possible values are: Checked or unchecked. Possible values are: Undefined, Hydronic Supply, Hydronic Return, Sanitary, Domestic Cold Water, Domestic Hot Water, Fire Protection, Other. Possible values are: Bell Mouth Inlet or Reducer, Inward Projecting Pipe, Outlet, Square Edged Inlet. Active only when the Loss Method is K Coefficient from Table. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

K Coefficient

Flow Factor

Flow Pressure Drop Flow Configuration Flow Direction

Loss Method

Allow Slope Adjustments System Type

K Coefficient Table

Dimensions Radius Identity Data Index A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). The nominal size of the connector.

Connectors | 565

Primary Connector

Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s piping data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only). A description of the connector.

Link Connector Index Connector Description

System Types
When a Revit MEP component that is not a member in a system is selected in a building model, the Options Bar displays create system buttons. The specific buttons depend on the component and the type(s) of connectors in the family. If there are multiple connectors of the same type and you want to connect to a specific connector, you can right-click on the connector control to create the appropriate type.

Electrical
When a component with an electrical connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Power, Data, Telephone, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Communication.

Duct
When a component with an Duct connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific HVAC system (from left to right: Air Supply, Air Return, Exhaust).

Pipe Connector
Pipe connectors are used with hydronic systems, plumbing systems, fire protection systems. When a component with a hydronic pipe connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific hydronic piping system (from left to right: Supply, Return, Other.

When a component with a plumbing (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, Domestic Cold Water, Other).

When a component with a fire protection (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Wet Sprinkler, Dry Sprinkler, Other).

566 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Load Classifications
Revit MEP maintains information about loads associated with the rooms in a project. As devices and equipment are placed in rooms, Revit MEP keeps track of the loads based on load type: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. The loads associated with the room can be view in the Element Properties for each room, and displayed in schedules.

Connector Placement
Connector placement options allow you to specify two basic connector placement methods:

Place on Face This option (Edge loop centered=true) will maintain its point at the center of the edge loop. In most cases this is the preferable method for placing a connector. Typically the Place on Face option is easier to use, and is suitable for most cases. Place on Work Plane This option allows placement of the connector on a selected plane. For many cases it would be possible to imitate the place on face option by specifying a plane and using dimensions to constrain the connector to the desired location. However, this method generally requires additional parameters and constraints to be used effectively.

Connectors | 567

NOTE Fittings (pipe and duct fittings) expect the instance origin of the family to be the intersection of the connectors. In most cases for fittings, there is a point on the fitting where all of the connectors (if extended into the fitting) will collide. Fittings expect this collision to be placed at the original intersection of the Center (Front / Back), Center (Left / Right), and Reference Level work planes. For this reason, it is good practice to pin these reference planes before beginning to build the family. Do this by selecting the reference plane(s) and clicking the Pin icon on the Edit toolbar.

Hosts
Objects that are placed in a model are often hosted by other components. Hosting components include ceilings, floors, roofs, and walls, as well as lines, and faces. Even components that are not hosted by one of these components are still hosted by the level on which they reside. When creating a family from a template, it is important that you consider what type of hosting behavior you want for the family. For example, you may intuitively think that a new light fixture should be ceiling hosted. However, there may be cases where you want to use that family in a wall mount configuration, or even freely suspended. You cannot change the hosting of a family after it is created; the hosting setting is hard-set based on the template from which the family originated. Plane hosting provides the ability for the family to be hosted by walls, floors, or ceilings, and provides a high level of flexibility. Plane hosted elements will even move with their hosting elements through linked models. Non-hosted families are actually hosted by the level they are inserted on and provide the ability for the element to be placed anywhere. Their height is defined relative to their level, but there is no association established with elements, linked models or otherwise. When using linked files, only face-hosted families will be able to be hosted by the linked file’s geometry.

Templates
As described above, the hosting of an element is defined based on the template that is used when the family is originally created. Templates also determine the type of family as an annotation family, model family, titleblock family, or a profile family. In some cases, the template also defines particular characteristics of how the family works, such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. NOTE You cannot change these characteristics once you have created the family. For example, you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture, or redefine an annotation symbol to be a model element. You must start the family with the appropriate template.

Lookup Tables
Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external .csv file. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. Revit MEP provides a text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (.csv) file. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.ini file. The syntax for the text_file_lookup function uses the following format:
result=text_file_lookup(LookupTableName, LookupColumn, DefaultIfNotFound, LookupValue) Where: Is:

568 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

result LookupTableName LookupColumn

the returned value. the name of the CSV file to lookup. the name of the column from which the result value is to be returned. the value that will be returned if LookupValue is not found. the value to find in the first column of the table.

DefaultIfNotFound LookupValue

CSV File Structure
The first row of values in the CSV file is for header information, to describe the contents of subsequent columns. The headers are of the format ParameterName##ParameterType##ParameterUnits Acceptable parameter types are: NUMBER, LENGTH, AREA, VOLUME, ANGLE, and OTHER For example, a column may have the following header: TotalArea##AREA##INCHES to represent the total area in square inches. The first column in the file contains a description. The Lookup Function processes the information in the file starting with column 2.

Parameter Mapping
Many properties for objects, such as the depth of an extrusion and the voltage of a connector, can be mapped (associated) to a family parameter or to a shared parameter to provide flexibility to the family. The associated parameter can be defined as an instance parameter or a type parameter. Parameters are mapped by clicking (small button) in the column in the Element Properties dialog for the object. When an object’s parameter is mapped to another parameter, its Value column cannot be edited. The example below shows that the Power Factor and Number of Poles parameters are currently not mapped to a parameter. Their values can be edited directly in the Value column. The Apparent Load Phase 1 and Voltage parameters are mapped to other parameters, and their values assume the values specified for the parameters to which they have been mapped.

Parameter Mapping | 569

Category
Revit MEP components fall into general categories (pipe fittings, lighting fixtures, and so on). The Family Category specified when a family is created determines which Family Parameters are activated. The settings for these family parameters affect the behavior for the part and identifies the type of component. In Family Editor, the Family Category and Parameters settings are found in the Settings menu. Depending on the Family Category and the type of template that the family was derived from (host-based, generic model, detail component, generic tag, and so on), different Family Parameters apply. The following table lists each Family Category, and indicates the applicable Family Parameters. Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver- Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation Shared

Air Terminals Communications Devices Data Devices Duct Accessories Duct Fittings Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixtures Fire Alarm Devices Generic Models Lighting Devices Lighting Fixtures Mechanical Equipment Nurse Call Devices Pipe Accessories Pipe Fittings Plumbing Fixtures Security Devices

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X

X

X X X X X X

X X

X X

570 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Generally the Type Selector allows you to replace a family of one category with any other family of the same category. Part Types The Part Type parameter provides additional subclassification of a family category. such as Light Loss Factor. Exit. and Initial Color Control. Undefined. Fan and System Interaction.Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation X X X Shared Sprinklers Telephone Devices X X X X X X Family Parameters ■ ■ ■ Light Source: See Light Source on page 571. The part type serves 2 functions: ■ To only allow replacing a particular part with a similar part in a building project. You can also define photometric characteristics. and determines the behavior for the parts in the family. ■ If a family category provides a Part Type parameter. In a project. each lighting fixture family has one light source. Obstruction. Plumbing Fixture Part Types Damper. spot. Pipe Accessories. rectangle. However. To accurately look up the correct fitting in the database. Light Source A light source is the part of a lighting fixture that emits light (such as a light bulb). Mechanical Equipment. This allows calculating fitting losses based on a loss table. To create a lighting fixture that uses multiple light sources (such as a chandelier or a set of track lights). The following table shows which part types apply to which family categories: Family Categories Air Terminals. So there is a level of filtering built into the Type Selector for Revit MEP. For example. there are times when this is not appropriate. and the light distribution (spherical. the part type must be defined. The ASHRAE Duct Fitting database is integrated with Revit MEP. line. for fittings it would not be valid to replace a cross with a transition. Pipe Fittings. Duct Accessories. Valve Light Source | 571 . Elbow. When light source is selected in the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Part Type: See Part Types on page 571. create a nested family. you can specify the shape of the light element (point. Duct Fittings. or photometric web). In general. Duct Mounted Equipment. To determine the part type family. circle).Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver. as is the case with receptacles and switches. Hood. you can adjust the position and brightness of each light source to achieve the desired lighting effects. the Part Type values available depends on the family category. hemispherical. Maintain Annotation Orientation: Use this option when the family has a nested annotation family. Transition. Entry. Equipment. Initial Intensity. Junction.

Nurse Call. Panelboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. As indicated in the image. steam generators Elbow: A bend or elbow type fitting Entry: Point at which fluid enters the system: louvers. grills. such as an inline filter Transition: Shape or size change Undefined: No specific functionality Valve: Valves and similar accessories Data Panel: Panels used to connect devices with connectors of System Type Data. the automatically generated wiring branches through the junction box. Telephone. Lighting Fixtures. Fire Alarm.Family Categories Communication Devices. Controls. As indicated in the image. lab or other exhaust hoods Junction: Intersection of 3 or more segments (tee. fire alarm components. ■ ■ ■ ■ 572 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Normal: Devices such as receptacles. Duct Mounted Equipment: Smoke detectors. Junction Box: Wire management devices through which wiring is generally drawn through the device. wye) Obstruction: Anything that causes a pressure drop. Security. Electrical Fixtures. grates Exit: Point at which fluid leaves the system Equipment: Generic equipment Fan and System Interaction AHUs. Nurse Call Devices. Telephone Devices Part Types Normal. Switch Junction Box ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Damper: Used to control flow volume. inline fans Hood: Kitchen. and light fixtures. Security Devices. and Communication. Fire Alarm Devices. Switch: Control device such as a switch where wiring is typically not drawn through the devices. Data Panel. Switchboard. cross. the automatically generated wiring branches to the switch. Data Devices. Panelboard. Electrical Equipment. Lighting Devices. Transformer.

■ Part Types | 573 . Transformer: Used to interconnect Panelboards and/or Switchboards of differing voltages.■ Switchboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules.

574 .

exterior fire stairs. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. 575 . Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. slight modifications to the building design have been made. balconies. and a roof garden. NOTE For training purposes. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2009. a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. lofty ceilings. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces.

576 .

you learn how to create views from a building model. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. section. elevation. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 10 In this tutorial. how to create section and elevation views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. 577 . including plan. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You learn how to create new views from existing views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project.

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 578 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.rvt.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 2 In the Project Browser. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. expand Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. and click OK. select Level 2. 8 In the Rename View dialog.Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 579 . enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 7 In the Project Browser. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 11 Under Floor Plans. 12 In the Rename View dialog. 13 In the Project Browser. enter Vicinity Plan. 580 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Vicinity Plan. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

14 On the View Control Bar. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. and click 1''= 80'-0''. Duplicating Plan Views | 581 . Next. click the current scale. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view.

rvt. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.16 Right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 582 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 18 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in _progress.

select Elevation: Building Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. 3 In the Type Selector. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Elevation. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. for Scale. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. select 1/8''=1'-0''. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 583 . 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.

8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. 584 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar.

Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. click Section. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 10 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. under Views (all). Creating Elevation and Section Views | 585 . 14 In the Type Selector. select 1/8''=1'-0''. ■ Move the cursor down. and double-click Level 1. for Scale. and click OK. select Section: Building Section. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. double-click South East. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 11 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. enter South East.

586 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building.

drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 587 . click Split Segment. Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint.

588 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. expand Sections (Building Section). and double-click Section 1.21 On the Design Bar. using the blue circular drag grip. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. 23 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. click Modify. 24 Select gridline F. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser.

Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Creating Callout Views | 589 . you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view.25 On the Design Bar. To create each view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.

Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.Resulting callout view . 3 In the Type Selector. select 1/4"=1'-0''. click Callout. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale. 590 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan.

Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head.■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. click Modify. and select the callout boundary. Creating Callout Views | 591 .

enter Enlarged Stair Plan. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and click OK.■ Select the middle grip. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 9 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 592 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays.

Creating Callout Views | 593 . ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. under Sections (Building Sections). 13 In the Type Selector. double-click Section 1. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. for Scale. click Callout. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. select 1 1/2''=1'-0''. 14 On the Options Bar. select Detail View: Detail. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

18 In the Rename View dialog. expand Detail Views (Details).16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and click OK. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. enter Roof Overhang Detail. 17 In the Project Browser. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 594 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Details).

Existing stair callout head and boundary Modifying View Tag Appearance | 595 . you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. You change the appearance of the section mark head. the elevation markers. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.

click Load into Project. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. .Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Section Tail . and click OK. and click OK. and click Open. under Floor Plans. and click OK twice. click Edit/New. 596 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. enter Section Head – Custom. and click OK. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. double-click Level 1. for Section Head. 10 On the floor plan. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. and can be applied to the section line. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rfa. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. select Section Head .Custom. clear any others. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 4 On the Design Bar. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. select the section line. Section Tail – Filled.Filled. select Custom-Section Head. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 For Section Tag. click Duplicate. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. select the current project. 8 In the Name dialog.

open Imperial\Families\Annotations.rfa. notice the circular elevation markers that display. 15 Under Category. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 Click OK twice. enter 3/4''. Click OK. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. and click OK. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. for Elevation Tag. On the floor plan. and select 3. and on the Options Bar. enter 3/4'' Circle. 19 Click OK. select Custom-Callout Head. and select 2. For Line Weight. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. and click Open. click Edit/New.Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click Duplicate. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. . scroll to Section Line. select 3/4'' Circle. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. scroll to Section Marks. select Circle. 17 Under Category. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. click the Annotation Objects tab. select 3. 22 In the Name dialog. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 597 . The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. On the floor plan. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing.

30 On the Design Bar. 39 Click OK twice. select the current project. select the callout. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. . click the Annotation Objects tab. For Corner Radius. clear all others. and click OK. scroll down to Callout Boundary. click Duplicate. 36 In the drawing. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and select 7. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. for Callout Tag. click Load into Project. enter 1/4''. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. 43 Under Category. 598 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 40 Press ESC. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. Click OK. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 34 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius.

You learn to create view templates. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. To accomplish this. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. and apply it to multiple elevation views. masking regions.45 For Line Pattern. click Training Files. and select 4. filters. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select Dash. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a View Template In this exercise. expand Callout Boundary. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. and visual overrides.rvt. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. 49 Click OK. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. view regions. 46 Under Category. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 599 . View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings.

under Elevations. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 6 On the View Control bar. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. The crop region displays as red. 5 On the View Toolbar. under Visibility. click (Hide Crop Region). and double-click East.Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 600 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . clear Entourage. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 9 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom to Fit. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown.

under Elevations.10 Under Visibility. Creating a View Template | 601 . under Elevations. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. click OK. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 12 On the View Control bar. 14 In the New View Template dialog. 16 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Project Browser. 15 In the View Templates dialog. grids. and click Create View Template From View. Callouts. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 11 Click OK. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. elevation markers. and click OK. right-click East. double-click North. levels.

You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click Penthouse. 602 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 19 Using the same method. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.17 In the Project Browser.rvt. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. under Floor Plans.rvt. and click Apply View Template. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. edit the crop region as before. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. right-click North. 18 In the Select View Template dialog. and click OK. click Apply. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views.

4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level Below (Level 4). under Extents.2 In the Project Browser. select Penthouse. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. View Range and Plan Regions | 603 . for Bottom. click Edit. double-click Roof Plan. select Level Below (Level 4). right-click. for Level. Under View Depth. and click Properties. under Floor Plans. Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice. for View Range.

for Level. click Edit. for Bottom. for View Range. click Plan Region. right-click. select Roof Plan. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the Design Bar.6 In the Project Browser. Under View Depth. select Level 4. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. Click OK twice. 604 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Level 4. and click Properties. click Lines. Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Extents.

under Extents. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below.11 On the Options Bar. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. for View Range. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. for Bottom. select Unlimited. 16 On the Design Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). click Modify. Click OK twice. 13 On the Design Bar. for Level. 17 On the Design Bar. Under View Depth. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. click Region Properties. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. select Unlimited. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. click Finish Sketch. click Edit. in this case. In the left corner of the building. Move you cursor diagonally. the fire Using Filters to Control Visibility | 605 .

rvt. select the red color. click the Filters tab. 12 On the Filter tab. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. 11 Select Rated Walls. and click OK. click <No Override>. for Color. 16 Click OK. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. click Override under Patterns. under Views (all). 14 In the Color dialog. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 17 Using the same method. click (New). enter Rated Walls. 5 In the Filters dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Select contains. under Filters. 1 In the Project Browser. under Basic colors. click Add. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. for Pattern. Enter Hr. 10 On the Filter tab. 7 In the Filters dialog. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. click Edit/New. under Categories. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and double-click Level 1. under Projection/Surface. expand Floor Plans. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. for Rated Walls.rating of the walls. After you apply the filter. select Walls. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 9 Click OK. 606 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Fire Rating. and apply a color. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Solid Fill. and click OK.

To accomplish this. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. Masking Portions of a View | 607 . Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. click OK. click Remove. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog.

click Show Crop Region. 5 On the View menu. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click OK. 608 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. right-click.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. under Floor Plans. 4 On the View Control Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. and click Rename. as shown.rvt.

12 On the Options Bar. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.7 On the View menu. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. Masking Portions of a View | 609 . and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 9 On the View Control Bar. 8 Select the crop region. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. select Invisible lines. click (Rectangle). click Masking Region. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 11 In the Type Selector.

14 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. click Finish Sketch. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. 610 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. under Floor Plans. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.

6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click in the Patterns field. click black. click <No Override> to apply a color. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click OK. and click OK. select Walls. select Solid fill. right-click.2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. for Pattern. right-click. and click Override. Working with Visual Overrides | 611 . 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Color. and click Rename. 4 On the View Control Bar. under Pattern Overrides. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 Under Cut. click the current scale. 11 Click OK twice. under Visibility. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. and click 1/4''=1'0''. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.

18 Right-click. 16 Under Visibility. and click OK.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. clear Floors. under Visibility. 612 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Grids. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown.

select Dash 1/16''. click a purple color. Working with Visual Overrides | 613 . click <No Override> to apply a color. click Override.19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. for Color. 20 Right-click. under Lines. 25 Click OK twice. 21 Under Projection/Surface. 23 In the Color dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. and click OK. for Pattern. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. By using the previous method to make the selection.

Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 28 For Color. click Projection Lines. right-click. 29 In the Color dialog. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog.Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 614 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK twice. click By Category Override. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. click . 30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select a bright green color. select the sofa. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color.

32 Select one of the lamps. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 615 . and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. click . right-click. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project. how to add views to the sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. 33 On the View Control Bar.

Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets. 616 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click. click Sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. click Training Files.rvt. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. and click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. and click View.

7 On the Design Bar. enter A101.Unnamed. 3 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. click Modify.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . Creating Drawing Sheets | 617 . click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. enter Site Plan. 5 When the title block highlights. expand Sheets (all). on the Options Bar. For Sheet Name. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. Click OK. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. For Sheet Number. and select the title block. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser.

for Project Address. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For Client Name. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. 2009. enter For Approval. For Project Status. For Project Number. The new project information displays in the titleblock. MA 12345 12 Click OK. under Other. click Edit. 618 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Freighthouse Flats. For Project Name.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 15 May. 14 Click OK. enter J. Smith. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. enter 2009-1. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date.

21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Sections A108 . and click OK. for Name. 17 In the Project Browser. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.Layout Plan A104 . Adding Views to Sheets | 619 . select the new sheet name. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you add views to these sheets. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .Elevations A105 .rvt. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Stairs In the following exercise. and click Rename. right-click.Elevations A106 .Elevations A107 . and click Save. and click OK. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. enter Floor Plan.rvt. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.

and click to place it. The red border around the view no longer displays.Elevations. under Sheets (all). click Modify. and drag it to the sheet. under Sheets (all). 4 On the Design Bar. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. and click to place the view. under Floor Plans. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Elevations (Building Elevation).Floor Plan. 620 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Level 1. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. double-click A102 . 2 In the Project Browser. double-click A104 .Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser.

12 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. under Sheets (all). 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). align it with the East elevation.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. click Modify. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click A107 . drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). click Modify. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. Adding Views to Sheets | 621 .Sections.

click Modify. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sheets (all). 19 On the Design Bar. and click to place it.Stairs. 18 Under Floor Plans. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. select 1-1/2'' = 1'0''. and on the Options Bar. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. and press TAB until it highlights.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. double-click A108 . 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. 622 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. zoom in to the grip. for View Scale. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. 16 Select title bar. move the cursor over it. .

double-click Level 1. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 623 . you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. In order to do this. you must first activate the view on the sheet. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. and then make changes and deactivate the view. under Floor Plans.View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser.

3 At the right end of the Roof level line. enter 54'. 5 On the Design Bar.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Sections. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and press ENTER. and click Activate View. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. 2 Select the building section view.rvt. under Sheets (all). 624 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click. double-click A107 . zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. 7 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Deactivate View. double-click North. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 625 .6 Right-click.

you create a title sheet for your drawing set. enter T. After you create the sheet. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. under Floor Plans. and click Properties. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. select the new sheet name. enter Title Sheet. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 3 In the Project Browser. 626 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . For Sheet Name. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser.rvt. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 7 Place the camera as shown. and click OK. double-click Level 1.8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. right-click. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Camera. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. You modify the view to hide the view title. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The camera view displays.

8 On the Options Bar. select Far Clip Active. 12 On the View Control Bar. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Under Camera. For Far Clip Offset. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. enter 420'. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. enter 5'. For Target Elevation. for Eye Elevation. 11 On the View Control Bar. enter 60'. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 627 . Under Extents. Click OK.

drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. select Scale (locked proportions). for Height. and click to place it in the center of the sheet.Title Sheet. and then click OK. 14 Under 3D Views. Under Model Crop Size. 628 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change.13 In the Project Browser. Click Apply. under Sheets (all). 15 With the view selected. on the Options Bar. double-click T . click Size. enter 25''.

and close the exercise file.17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 629 . click Modify. enter Viewport/no title mark. click Duplicate. click Modify. under Graphics. 22 In the Name dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. for Show title. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. select No. 24 Click OK twice. 25 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the view on the sheet. and click OK. click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. . and on the Options Bar. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar.

630 .

You also learn to create different types of schedules. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. expand Floor Plans. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. Because of the open style floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. click Training Files. such as room and window schedules. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. in your Revit MEP 2009 projects. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. such as doors and windows.Level 1. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. Tagging Objects In this lesson.rvt. 631 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP.Tagging and Scheduling 11 In this tutorial. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged.

click Room Separation. move the cursor to the right. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click Room and Area. as shown: 5 Using the same method. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. right-click in the Design Bar. as shown: 632 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing).

create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Modify.6 Using the same method. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 633 . Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Load. 7 On the Design Bar.

type 8'. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Room Tag.rfa. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 11 In the Tags dialog. click Training Files. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. click OK. type U18-1. 16 On the Design Bar. The room tag number displays in blue. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 634 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Room. 14 For Offset. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. indicating that it can be edited. verify that Tag on placement is selected.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and press ENTER. and select the room tag. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. and click to place the room and tag. click it.

type Entry. Dining. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. type Kitchen. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 19 On the Design Bar. place rooms and tags. 23 Using the same method. 22 Click the room text label. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 635 . click Modify. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged.18 Click the room text label. click Room. Click to place the new room and tag. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. and press ENTER. click Modify. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Sequential letters are also supported. and press ENTER.

636 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . on the Model Categories tab. click Modify. under Floor Plans.Level 2. The rooms are already placed. 27 On the Design Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. clear Room Separation. and click OK. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. but they need to be tagged. expand Lines. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). and moving clockwise. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Room Tag.

4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 637 . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. in the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. 3 On the Options Bar. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. click Tag ➤ By Category. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. you learn how to place door and window tags. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 31 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.Level 1. clear Leader.

under Identify Data. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. click Modify. type U18-2. type U18-1. 638 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Properties). and click OK. (Element 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family. and press ENTER.■ Closet door in living room 5 On the Design Bar. for Mark. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. and drag it down to center it in the doorway. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. Tagging Doors and Windows | 639 .

click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser.Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the Tags dialog. click Tag All Not Tagged. 22 In the Tags dialog.rfa. click Training Files. and click OK.Level 2. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 15 Under Category. verify that All objects in current view is selected. 640 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. select Window Tags. select Door Tags.

6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. select the edge to which the leader connects. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 28 Using the same method. tag all untagged windows. you learn how to tag furniture objects. click Training Files. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 3 On the Options Bar. 26 Under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 5 At the confirmation prompt.rvt.25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. expand Floor Plans. select Leader. Tagging Other Objects | 641 . 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. and modify the tag placement and display.Level 1. click Tag ➤ By Category. 4 Select a dining room chair. 29 Save the file.rfa. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to load a tag. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Furniture Tag. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser.

8 Select the furniture in the living room. 11 Select the tag for the table. 642 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and drag it above the chair tag. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. clear Leader. 13 Optionally. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. 9 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. and drag it up to form an angled leader. 14 Click Modify. 12 Click the elbow control.

and on the Design Bar.Level 2. Tagging Other Objects | 643 . All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. under Floor Plans. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. click Modify. and click OK.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. 18 On the Design Bar. select Furniture Tag : Standard. double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. click Tag All Not Tagged.

select Furniture Tag: Boxed. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. click Check None. 644 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .20 On the Options Bar. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. and click OK. select Furniture Tags. you learn to add schedules. 21 In the Filter dialog. 23 Save the file. click (Filter Selection). Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. 22 In the Type Selector. and click Modify. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise.

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. in which windows are listed by window type. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Finally. that is. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. a schedule that lists every window in the building. Creating a Window Schedule | 645 . you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. Next.

order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. type Building Window Schedule. select Windows. 4 For Name. click Training Files. and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. 9 Click OK. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 646 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 7 Using the same method. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. under Category.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View. select Comments and click Add.rvt.

and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. click Show. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. this can be a time-consuming process.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. 13 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. expand Schedules/Quantities. NOTE By clicking Show. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. in large building models with many views. If no open view shows the selected element. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. right-click the schedule. you are prompted to open one that does. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. Creating a Window Schedule | 647 . and on the Options Bar. However. click Close. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule. clear Itemize every instance. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. under Other. and click View Properties. for Sorting/Grouping. sorted by type mark. change the Type Mark in the first row from 10 to A. 648 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . for Sort by. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. The window type schedule is displayed. click Edit.15 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. The window schedule is displayed. under Other. click Edit. 23 Click OK twice. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule. for Sorting/Grouping. and press ENTER.

2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters.24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.rvt. In this case. you cannot use them to tag objects. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. jamb. as shown: 25 In the Project Browser. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. double-click Level 2. and sill conditions for a window can be found. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and double-click Building Window Schedule. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. expand Schedules/Quantities. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. under Floor Plans. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 649 . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. unlike shared parameters.

under Other.3 In the Project Parameters dialog. For Group parameter under. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. for Fields. 650 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Edit. right-click Building Window Schedule. so that they are listed before Comments. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Name. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. click OK. select the following fields. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 12 Click OK twice. Under Parameter Data. type Head Detail. Select Type. click Add to create the new parameter. 5 Click OK. under Available fields. 6 Using the same method. and click Properties. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. select Construction. create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail.

You then hide the column used for the filter. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule.Level 1. under Type Mark A. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Jamb Detail. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 651 . type 2/A107. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. for Jamb Detail. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. click Group. type 1/A107.Door Schedule. TIP To select all 3 headers. expand Floor Plans. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. select Head Detail.rvt. click Schedule/Quantities. and Sill Detail. type Unit 18 . View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. select Doors. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 17 Save the file. Under Name. 14 On the Options Bar. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. click in the Head Detail header. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. For example. and without releasing the left mouse button. type Window Details. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. and for Sill Detail. type 3/A107. for Head Detail.

6 Under Available fields. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. expand Sheets (all). 10 Under Fields. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18.■ For Phase. select the following fields. select Hidden field. Select contains in the second field. 652 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. select Mark. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with.Unit 18. Type U18 in the third field. select Family and Type. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 9 Click the Formatting tab. 4 Click OK. but is not included as a column in the schedule. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. 11 Under Field formatting. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. verify that New Construction is selected. click the Fields tab. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and double-click A102 .

click Unit 18 . click Modify. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar.13 In the Project Browser.Door Schedule. and drag it to the sheet. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 653 . 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width.

select Bold. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. and click OK. under Category. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under Available fields. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. right-click in the Design Bar. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. double-click Level 1. 654 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . under Floor Plans. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. 8 Click OK. click Schedule/Quantities.rvt. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building.20 Save the file. 5 Using the same method. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Number. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Rooms. and click Add. 7 Under Text. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. to the right of Header text. and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields.

and press ENTER. for Name. next to Rows. 101-106. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. For 103. for room 101. and press ENTER. 10 Edit the number to be 101. select Corridor. add 5 more rooms. The room Number is U17-46. For 104. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. and press ENTER. select Storage. type Stair. click New. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. For 106. For 105. type Corridor. type Storage. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. type Building Entry. For 102. 11 Using the same method. and press ENTER. Creating a Room Schedule | 655 .

3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise.13 Save the file. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. For Room Separation. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. click the Lines field. select 9. For Weight. and click OK. First. you add room separation lines. double-click Level 1. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Under Custom colors. expand Lines. In the Line Graphics dialog. click the bright green swatch. In the Lines field. click the Color field. click Room Separation. under Floor Plans. under Visibility. under Projection/Surface. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. draw the horizontal line. click Override. 656 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. 4 Click OK twice. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. place rooms from a program list. and modify room names. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

click Room. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 657 . 9 On the Design Bar.8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.

14 For Offset. type 8'. for Room. 658 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). select 102 Storage. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. select 101 Building Entry. for Room.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing.

17 On the Design Bar. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 659 . double-click Level 1. place the following rooms. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas).15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. under Floor Plans. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. double-click Room Schedule. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. 19 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. 20 While pressing CTRL. and zoom in to the Corridor. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 16 Using the same method. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). click Modify.

Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 30 On the Options Bar. and for all 3 finishes. under Available fields. under Constraints. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. for Rows.21 On the Options Bar. and Wall Finish. type Units. and click OK. click 23 On the Design Bar. 660 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 24 Open the Room Schedule. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. Floor Finish. and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. under Category. 27 Select Schedule keys. and click Add. select Base Finish. click New. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 31 For Key Name. type As Selected. (Element Properties). 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. clear Room Bounding. while pressing CTRL. select Rooms.

and click Add. right-click Room Schedule. under Floor Plans. 42 On the Options Bar. under Other. select Units.32 Using the same method. and click Properties. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 43 In the Filter dialog. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. and click OK. for Fields. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). double-click Level 1. click Check None. click Edit. click (Element Properties). select Room Style. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 661 . for Room Style. select Rooms. 38 Under U17-8. under Schedules/Quantities. 37 Open the Room Schedule. for Available fields. 36 Click OK twice. 33 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. select Units. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. under Identity Data. 44 On the Options Bar.

type Room Type. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. 48 Save the file. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 104. select Service. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under Floor Plans. expand Floor Plans. under Graphics. For rooms 102 and 105. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. for Color. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. right-click Level 1. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. and double-click Level 1. and apply it to the Level 1 view.rvt. click 5 For Title. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.46 Open the Room Schedule. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. and 106. 662 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Properties. select Room Style. select Public. at the warning prompt. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. (Duplicate). 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. type Room Type. under Views (all). 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. 103. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. click the Color Scheme field. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

21 In the second row of the table (Public). 19 On the Options Bar. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. click Color Scheme Legend. and clear Room Separation. select Room Type. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 663 . a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. under Schemes. and click OK. select the color legend. click Modify. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Edit Color Scheme.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. expand Lines. under Visibility. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. 14 Click OK twice. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. click the value in the Color column. 17 On the Design Bar. clear Visible.

click Edit/New. type 1''.22 In the Color dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. and click OK. under Graphics. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Show Title. (Element Properties). under Custom color. click Modify. respectively. select blue. 24 Click OK. 664 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 Using the same method. for Size. type 1/4''. 28 Under Title Text. 29 Click OK twice. for Swatch Width. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. 27 In the Type Properties dialog.

As you move the cursor over the drawing area. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. right-click Building Section. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 665 . volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. and click OK. select Room Type. under Sections. under Graphics.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. under Sections. click Edit. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. click Color Scheme Legend. for Color Scheme. select Rooms. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 35 Click OK twice. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. under Visibility. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. and select Properties. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. double-click Building Section. 33 In the Element Properties dialog.

47 In the Element Properties dialog. 666 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 45 While pressing CTRL. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 46 Click . for Room Style. for Room Style. and click OK. under Identity Data. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). select all the rooms in the stairwell. under Identity Data. click Check None. 42 In the Filter dialog. select Rooms. select Public. click . select Units. (Filter Selection). and click OK.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing.

under Schedules/Quantities. under Identity Data. and click . for Rows. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 667 . click New. under Key Name for the new row. for Room Style. excluding the stairwell spaces. and click OK. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. double-click Room Style Schedule. 51 On the Options Bar. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. 49 In the Element Properties dialog.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. select Service. 54 While pressing CTRL. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. type Suites. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4.

62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. The color fill will extend to the roof. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 668 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . verify that At wall finish is selected. 59 Under Room Area Computation. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. The color fill extends to the roof. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. select Suites. under Volume Computations. select Areas and Volumes. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area.55 Click . but not beyond it. for Room Style. under Identity Data. select the room on the left side of the top floor. and click OK. and click OK. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations.

70 For Limit Offset. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). type -10”. under Constraints. select the stairwell room. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. 72 On the Design Bar. for Upper Limit. for Upper Limit. select Level 2.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. and the living room. . click Modify. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 669 . 68 Click . and click 65 For Limit Offset. 66 Click OK. 71 Click OK. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. the dining room. 67 On the first level. select Loft. type 0’ 0” . under Constraints.

double-click {3D}.rvt. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.73 Save the file. 670 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under 3D Views.

under Category. Creating a Material Takeoff | 671 . Select Grand totals. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 9 Using the same method. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. under Available fields. For Then by. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 5 On the Design Bar.Insulation on Plywood Deck . select Material: Description. Clear Itemize every instance.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. and click Add. click Family and Type. 3 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. select Roofs. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. select Family and Type. click Modify. 4 In the Type Selector.EPDM.

select Material: Cost. and click Add. select Material: Area. 23 For Field formatting.25 4. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. type Estimated Cost. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1'^2). 19 For Type. and under Fields. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. select Currency. click Estimated Cost. for Fields. 20 For Formula.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. for Name. and click Properties. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. click Edit. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 21 Click OK. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Under Field formatting. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. 12 Click OK. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.75 672 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. under Other. select Calculate totals. and click OK twice. The /(1'^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. 17 Click Calculated Value. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 1. select Calculate totals. for Material: Cost.50 1. click the Formatting tab. under Available fields.

28 For Unit symbol. 29 Select Use digit grouping. adding the shared parameters to a family. select $. which inserts commas after every three digits. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and reporting the shared parameters. tag the line. Digit grouping. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules. The cost fields are formatted correctly. either within family components or within the project template. and are defined and stored in an external file. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost . 27 In the Format dialog. not just for currency. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. for Rounding. ensuring consistency across families and projects. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. creating a generic tag to tag the family. 30 Click OK twice. In this lesson. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. can be used for any number-based parameter. regardless of category. 26 In the Project Units dialog. These shared parameters can be added to any family. you create a shared parameter file. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 673 . and schedule the total distance of each path. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. 31 Save the file. click the Format value. You draw a travel path line.50 The Estimated cost is calculated. for Currency. you create an exiting plan for the building.

5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 674 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Name. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 9 Under Parameters. click New. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 11 Click OK twice. type OfficeStandardsParameters. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. for Type of Parameter. type Travel Distance. select Length. for File name. 7 Under Parameters.txt. under Groups. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save. for Name. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. type Path ID. for Name. click New. type Exiting.rvt. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. click Training Files.rvt. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. click New. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click Create.

select Shared parameter. under Parameter Type. type Length. and click OK. under Parameters. 13 Click Apply. group it under Dimensions. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Add. and select Instance. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 11 Click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 14 On the Design Bar. If you have multiple projects open. select i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. under Parameters. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. in the Load into Projects dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 12 In the Family Types dialog. under Dimensions. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Constraints. and click OK. and click OK. following the equals symbol (=). for Group parameter under. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 3 On the Design Bar. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. click Family Types. 4 In the Family Types dialog. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 675 .rfa.rvt. 8 Select Instance. click Load into Projects. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Click Training Files. and click Select. and click OK. 10 Using the same method. click Add. for Travel Distance Formula. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Travel Line.rvt. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. under Parameter Data. 15 If necessary. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.

under Parameters. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. select Travel Distance. 676 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Label. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. click Training Files.rft. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and open Imperial\Templates\Generic Tag. click Label. select Travel Distance. click parameter(s) to label).Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. and click OK. 17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. click (Add Parameter). 25 In the Edit Label dialog. click Select. 19 On the Design Bar. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. under Category Parameters. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. 24 Click OK twice.

31 Click File ➤ Save As. 33 On the Design Bar. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. and click Save. type Travel Distance Tag.28 On the Design Bar. 29 In the drawing window. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog.rvt is selected. and move it down. and click OK. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 677 . click Modify. and press DELETE. click Load into Projects.rfa. 32 In the Save As dialog. verify that i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 35 Save the file. select Path ID. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. for File Name.

2 Zoom in to the corridor. double-click Exiting Plan . After the lines are tagged. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. under Floor Plans. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID.Placing. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.Level 1. 6 Move the cursor to the right. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.Tagging. 678 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. above the exterior door as shown. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Chain. click Component. and click in the center of the corridor.

clear Leader. 17 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Tag ➤ By Category. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 679 . verify that Chain is selected. under Constraints. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines. for Path ID. click Component. double click Exiting Plan .7 Move the cursor down. 13 While pressing CTRL. and click outside of the building. under Floor Plans. type 1-1. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. move the cursor near the right corner. and click (Element Properties). and click OK.Level 2. click Modify. through the door. Placing. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Tagging. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser.

click Modify. and click.19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click in the stair. 680 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 Move the cursor down. 21 On the Design Bar. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 20 On the Design Bar. click Component. and click above the door to the stair. move the cursor to the left.

click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify.24 On the Design Bar.Tagging. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 27 On the Design Bar. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Placing. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. type 2-1. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 681 . under Category. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. under Constraints. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. 30 Using the same method. . 28 While pressing CTRL. for Path ID. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. 33 For Name. and click OK. type Level 1 Exit Distance. click Modify. and click OK. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

click Training Files. under Schedules/Quantities. in the first field. click Edit. 35 Click the Filter tab. select Path ID and Travel Distance. 42 Click OK. for Filter. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. and click Properties. and click Add. 45 In the Rename View dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. 38 For Sort by. in the third field. and in the third field. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. select Travel Distance. select Path ID. type 2-. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. and click OK. type 1-. 36 For Filter by. select Path ID.rvt. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 50 Save the file. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 682 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 40 Click the Formatting tab. for Filter by. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Calculate totals. 46 In the Project Browser. 41 Under Fields. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. while pressing CTRL. under Other. and under Field formatting. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 In the Project Browser. 49 Click OK twice. select contains. 43 In the Project Browser. in the second field. type Level 2 Exit Distance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Available fields.

Partitions . expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. under Categories. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 683 . for Assembly Code. under Identity Data. and click .6''.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. right-click the Design Bar. 9 Click OK twice. and click View. 4 Under Available fields. expand C . select the following fields. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 10 In the schedule. right-click Generic . and click OK. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. click the Fields tab. and select C1010145 .Fixed Partitions. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. and click Properties. click the Value field.Interiors ➤ C10 . select Walls.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . click Schedule/Quantities.Partitions ➤ C1010100 .

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Next. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 684 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. type Revit_Project. click Create. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. and click Next.rvt. for Database Name. 8 In the New Database dialog. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. select a location for the database file. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. the database display may be different than that shown. 6 Click Finish. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Under Directories.11 Close the exercise file. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 11 Click OK 3 times. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. under Database. and click OK to create the database. 3 Click New. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. click Export ➤ ODBC Database.mdb. click the File Data Source tab. click Training Files. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays.mdb). The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. click OK. 1 On the File menu.

which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 685 . In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. 13 Close the exercise file. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. in addition to the Id column. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. For example. so that each table of elements includes an Id column.Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. Additionally. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code.

686 .

or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 687 . you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0'.Annotating and Dimensioning 12 In this tutorial. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2009 projects.

you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0' to 325'. 688 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project.Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height Relocating a Project In this exercise. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

The levels in the project are not shared. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. 3 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click OK twice. If you did that now. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0'. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated.Shared Elevation. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. type 1/4'' Head . expand Views (all). 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However. click (Element Properties). and click OK.rvt. click Training Files. Under Constraints. In the Name dialog. for Elevation Base. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Shared. 8 Select the Level 1 line. click Edit/New. and double-click South. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Relocating a Project | 689 . and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. to better demonstrate how shared levels work.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. and press ENTER. you specify the point (0') from which you want to relocate the project. The base elevation now reads 325'. select Level : 1/4'' Head . you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu. By typing 325' in this step. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. 13 On the Design Bar.Shared Elevation. 690 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . type 325'.By selecting the Level 1 line. click Modify. 12 In the Type Selector. The south elevation is displayed. Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line.

15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ While pressing CTRL. the Penthouse level. Relocating a Project | 691 . select Levels 2-4. under Elevations.The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. 14 In the Project Browser. and the Roof Plan level. as well as other views of the building model. double-click North.

multi-segmented. click Modify. permanent dimensions are created automatically. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. 16 If you want to save your changes. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. In Revit MEP. select Level : 1/4'' Head . and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. In this case. On the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Save As. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. radial. You place linear. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Dimensioning In this lesson. Dimensioning on page 692. and angular dimensions.Shared Elevation.■ ■ In the Type Selector. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 692 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .

The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default. expand Floor Plans.Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. dimensions are aligned. and double-click Level 1. Creating Dimensions | 693 . and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall. expand Views (all). and are created by selecting individual reference points. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Dimension. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. snap to wall centerlines. select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view. and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall.4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. select it. 694 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the dimension.

and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right.6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating Dimensions | 695 . The lock displays as locked. click Modify. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. and select it. click Dimension.

696 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and select its left exterior face. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 12 On the Options Bar. 14 Move the cursor to the right. select the right side of the curtain wall. for Prefer.11 Using the same method. select Wall Faces. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. but below the first dimension that you placed. above the plan view of the building. select the right endpoint of the planter. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. 16 Move the cursor up.

select Baseline. select Ordinate. under Graphics. The dimensions start from 0' 0" and increase moving away from the origin. click Duplicate.Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. . 21 In the Type Properties dialog.3/32" Arial . Creating Dimensions | 697 . 27 Click OK twice. Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. and click OK. and click OK. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. for Dimension String Type. click Edit/New. enter Linear . for Dimension String Type. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 On the Basics tab.Baseline.Ordinate. and on the Options Bar. enter Linear . 25 In the Name dialog.3/32" Arial . 22 In the Name dialog.

3/32" Arial to return to the original dimension style. verify that Use Actual Value is selected.Baseline. select Linear . below. 698 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . to the left. 30 In the Type Selector. or to the right of a permanent dimension value.3/32" Arial . The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline. . 33 Under Text Fields. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text. for example Text dialog displays. under Dimension Value. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above. 34 Click OK. select Linear . and in the Type Selector.29 Select the dimension string. enter Planter. The Dimension 32 In the Dimension Text dialog. for Below.

and specify a point to place the dimension. Creating Dimensions | 699 . 38 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). 40 Move the cursor outside the wall. click Modify. click Modify. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. 39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. and select it. click Dimension. select Wall faces.35 On the Design Bar. For Prefer. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

and click OK. 44 With the dimension still selected.42 Select the radial dimension. 700 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. click Modify. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog. type Typ.. click the dimension text. 46 On the Basics tab. for Suffix.

49 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). verify that Wall faces is selected. For Prefer. 50 Select the horizontal line. 51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. 48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. Creating Dimensions | 701 . This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. 702 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the dimension. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 702. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. and double-click Level 3. 53 On the Basics tab. expand Views (all). click Modify. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. When you dimension the wall.52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. Automatic wall dimension Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you select only the wall. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.

click Dimension.Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 703 . select Entire Walls. For Pick. and click to place the automatic dimension string. select Openings. Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select references. Click Options. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. and select Widths. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. select Wall centerlines.

expand Views (all). for a multi-segmented dimension. Controlling Witness Lines on page 704. expand Floor Plans. However. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis.7 On the Basics tab. For example. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. 704 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. in some cases. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. When you place dimensions. click Modify. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click Level 1.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser.

4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. click Dimension. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. select Individual References. and select it. For Pick.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Controlling Witness Lines | 705 . verify Wall centerlines is selected.

7 Using the same method. 706 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . move the cursor down. and select it. select the right edge of the planter. 8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. select the bottom right endpoint. and click to place the dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. 10 Using the same method.

14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. for Prefer.11 Move the cursor down. 13 On the Options Bar. Controlling Witness Lines | 707 . and when the wall centerline highlights. select Wall centerlines. Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab. and specify a point to place the dimension. click Dimension. select it.

708 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. 18 While pressing SHIFT.15 Moving the cursor to the right. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. and drag the dimension down the wall. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar. 19 Release SHIFT. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension.

you change the dimension tick mark. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. and using the same methods.20 Click the blue middle grip. After you create the new family type. and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. text font. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 709. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 709 . click Modify. drag it to the right. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise.

and click OK.Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 5 In the Name dialog. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ Under Graphics. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Arrow 30 Degree. type Office Standard. 710 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 2 Click (Element Properties). for Tick Mark. and select the lower dimension.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. click Duplicate.

for Text Size. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 711 . 7 On the Basics tab. select CityBlueprint. 9 In the Type Selector. ■ Click OK twice.■ ■ Under Text. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. 10 On the Basics tab. select another font. type 1/8”. click Modify. For Text Font. and select the bottom dimension.

you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. 712 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 12 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. create a new angular dimension type. and how to add leaders to the text notes. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. Creating Text Annotation on page 712.11 Using the same method. select the angular dimension on the planter. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan.

3 On the Options Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click and drag to create a text box.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 713 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Text. for Leader. but below the upper dimension string. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. click (None). zoom to the planter near grid line 5.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan.

and click . type 1/4''. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. click Duplicate. under Graphics. and click OK. for Text Size.5 In the text box. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. 714 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Name dialog box. 11 Under Text. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. type 1/4'' Arial Notes. 7 Select the text box. If so. click Modify. and click OK. select Arc Leaders. click Edit/New. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. type EXISTING BUILDING. and click OK.

■ Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 715 . 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar. click Text. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. click Modify. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter.

and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 716 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . In the Rename dialog. for Leader Arrowhead. click Edit/New. Under Text. Click Rename. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. click Modify. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. select CityBlueprint. for New. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 On the Design Bar. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. and click OK. type Standard Notes. Under Graphics. Click OK twice. for Text Font. click Modify. 24 On the Design Bar.

27 On the Options Bar. and click Modify. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 717 . click to place the text box.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. over the Planting Bed text. click (Arc). 31 Click in the text box. click Text. and type 18'' Conc. for Leader. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. select Text: Standard Notes. Wall.

718 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.32 If you want to save your changes.

You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2009. In order to detail from the building model. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. 719 . you trace over the building model geometry. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. plywood. add detail components.Detailing 13 In this tutorial. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. These components display at the required scale. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. In the callout view. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. like a standard door header condition. and metal studs. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you detail the roof overhang of a project building.

7 In the drawing area. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. double-click the detail callout head.rvt. which means that all detail components. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Exact location is not important. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 5 In the alert dialog. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. navigate to Imperial\Families\i_Corrugated Metal. select As underlay. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.rfa. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. click Detail Component. and insulation objects. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. After you add components. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. you detail the view of the roof edge. and click OK. 720 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. You load detail components. and click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Detailing the View In this exercise. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. region objects. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. They are also view specific. The roof overhang detail displays. as well as detail lines.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. select Corrugated Metal. 16 Click OK twice. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 10 On the Options Bar. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 17 In the drawing area. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 For Spacing. click Duplicate. Detailing the View | 721 . 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. and click OK. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. enter 1' 4".8 Delete the component. 13 In the Name dialog. for Pattern ➤ Detail. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties). 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Repeating Detail.

Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. click Training Files. and on the Edit toolbar. verify that Plywood-Section : 3/4" is selected. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood.rfa.19 On the Design Bar. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click Open. ■ ■ Click Modify. click Modify. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\Plywood-Section. click (Move). click Load. 22 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. 24 In the Type Selector. 722 | Chapter 13 Detailing .

Because you still have several components to load. 30 In the Type Selector. and click Open. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Roof Edge Components. click Training Files. 33 In the Type Selector. 29 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. press SPACEBAR 3 times. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. you load them as a group from a single file. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x8. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. Detailing the View | 723 .rvt. click Detail Component. 31 To properly orient the component. and place it in the detail view as shown. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. click OK.

35 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the horizontal segment.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 37 Click Modify. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. and click Modify. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8". 724 | Chapter 13 Detailing . select Chain. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. click the Flip instance arrows.

(Move).Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. For Offset. as shown. click Select the left midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move start point. Detailing the View | 725 . and on the Edit toolbar. click Insulation. 42 Click Modify. enter 5 1/2". select to near side. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. Select the right midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move end point. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width.

■ Click Modify. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x12. select Rigid Insulation-Section : 2 1/2". 48 Place the component directly above the 2x8 component. select Plywood-Section : 3/4". Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. and lock the component. as shown. click Detail Component. 47 In the Type Selector. 45 In the Type Selector. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 51 Click Modify. 726 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed.

Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 2x12 component to the lower left corner of the 2x8 component. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. For Offset. they are view specific. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. meaning they display only in this view. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 2x8 component.rvt. Adding Detail Lines | 727 . Like detail components. you add lines to your detail. 4 Click Modify. enter 1/4". click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.52 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. as shown. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. Adding Detail Lines on page 727. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 7 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 2x12 component and the roof joist.

as shown. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and clear Chain. select Medium Lines. 13 Add detail lines around the 2x12 component. and press ENTER. 16 On the Options Bar.10 On the Design Bar. For Offset. select Chain. and draw the detail lines as shown. 11 In the Type Selector. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 2x12 component. as shown. 728 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. enter 1/4". click (Draw). click Detail Lines.

and click OK. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 22 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. draw the detail lines as shown. When you turn the display model off.17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Adding Detail Lines | 729 . the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 18 In the Type Selector. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. select Thin Lines. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. select Do not display. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Properties. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 24 On the View Control Bar. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. select the Penthouse level line.

enter 1/2". 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 26 In the Type Selector. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. select Break Line. 29 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 30 In the Type Selector.Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 730 | Chapter 13 Detailing . TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. click Detail Lines. select Vapor Barrier. and press ENTER. For Offset. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail.

32 Click Modify. Add a dimension to the detail 5 On the Design Bar. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. and click to place the dimension. 3 On the Options Bar. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Adding Text Notes | 731 . Enter the text. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. click Text. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you add text notes to complete the detail. 6 Click the left outer edge of the 2x12 component.rvt. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the View Control Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 4 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Adding Text Notes on page 731. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. specify 3/4" = 1'-0" for the scale. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). clear Detail Items and Dimensions. 732 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click.rvt. for Suffix. under Text Fields. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. right-click. (Filter Selection). select a text note. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click. and press DELETE. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 In the Dimension Text dialog. and save the exercise file. click Select All Instances. and click the dimension text. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. click 6 In the Filter dialog.Keynotes.. 8 Select the dimension line. on the Options Bar. enter Roof Overhang Detail . and click OK. and click OK. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. enter Typ. and click OK.7 Click Modify. click Roof Overhang Detail. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Rename. Creating Detail Components on page 732.

click Training Files. and click Open. in the Type Selector. 7 Click Modify.rft. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select Medium Lines. select all the coping linework. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 14 Click Modify. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component. and selecting the chain. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. while pressing CTRL. 15 Use a window to select all linework. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 16 Click Modify. pressing TAB. Creating Detail Components | 733 .The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.

The original linework remains selected. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing.17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 25 In the Filter dialog. 26 Press DELETE. delete the underlying linework. 22 Click Modify. and click Save. double-click it in the Project Browser. 18 In the Save As dialog. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. enter Roof Edge. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 31 Using the same method used previously. 30 In the drawing area. Adding Keynotes on page 735. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. click Detail Component. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Keynotes view is not the open view. click . 28 On the Options Bar. click Load into Projects. 23 Using a window. for File name. and click Open. click Training Files. While pressing SHIFT. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. clear Detail Items. and click OK. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. click Load. 734 | Chapter 13 Detailing . navigate to your preferred location. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . and the component can be placed in the detail.rfa. 21 To place the component. select the coping. click Detail Component. 27 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar.

i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.C1. Adding Keynotes | 735 . click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. navigate to Imperial\Families\Annotations\Keynote Tag. 3/4" Plywood. and click Open. you place keynotes on objects.rfa. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. and click OK. Click to place the leader arm. click Training Files. Roof Edge4. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. In the Keynotes dialog. 2-1/2" Rigid Insulation. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. For the metal coping.Adding Keynotes In this exercise. use keynote 06160. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.B5. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.D11. click Keynote ➤ Element. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the alert dialog. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. use keynote 07645.

12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK 3 times. For the 2x12. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge.20 Ga. FasciaProfile_1. 15 In the Type Selector. use keynote 06110. 736 | Chapter 13 Detailing .F1. 17 Keynote the component. 13 Tag components: ■ (Element Properties). click Keynote ➤ Element. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. using keynote 07460. and click . use keynote 06160. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 737. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. 7/8" Corrugated Steel .I1.A8. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. 18 Save the file. click Edit/New. click in the Value column. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. For the 2x8.F1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. select Corrugated Metal.D11. For the 2x6.D1. click Detail Component. For the 2 instances of the 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. select the metal fascia with drip edge. navigate to 07645.G1. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. For the 3/4" Plywood Siding. use keynote 09250. use keynote 06110.6 Click Modify. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. You do this in order to keynote the component. use keynote 06110.

Creating Line-based Detail Components | 737 . 9 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 20 Click OK 3 times. and click Save. click Lines. navigate to your preferred location. click Detail Component. and click Open. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 11 Press DELETE. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 4 In the Type Selector. click Load. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. enter i_Medium Line Detail Component. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Detail Component. and click (Element Properties). select the left end point of the reference line. click Training Files. select Medium Lines. 15 Click Modify. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area.Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 8 In the Save As dialog. 18 In the Type Properties dialog.rft. 6 Lock the line.rvt. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Duplicate. 13 In the Type Selector. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. and select the right end point. select Medium Line Detail Component. 5 In the drawing area. click Load into Projects. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component line based. 19 In the Name dialog. and click Modify. 16 Select the component. for File name. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote.

You add the components to the project and keynote them. click Duplicate. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. click Detail Component. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. i_Invisible Line Detail Component. 25 Next. on the Edit toolbar. invisible. 48 Using the same method used previously. 37 Click OK 3 times. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right.G1. and assign it keynote 07260. select i_Light Line Detail Component. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 46 Click Modify. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. (Move). 28 In the Type Selector. and click . 38 On the Design Bar. and assign it keynote 06110. click in the Value column. click Edit/New. and click OK. click Detail Component. and hidden) used in the view. and i_Light Line Detail Component. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. enter EPDM Membrane. 24 While pressing CTRL. and click . and click . name the component Air Barrier. 42 Using the same method used previously. 738 | Chapter 13 Detailing .A1. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 34 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. 49 With the component selected. and click . 29 In the drawing area. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. against the 3/4" plywood. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. 47 Select the component. 44 On the Design Bar. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. name the component 2 x 8 Framing. 40 Click Modify. 31 Select the component.23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click Open. click Detail Component. 30 Click Modify. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.A5. 41 Select the component just added. and click the lower end at the break line.

56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 55 Click Modify. click Detail Component. 53 On the Options Bar.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 52 In the Type Selector. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. select Chain. and click . 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 739 . leaving the detail component lines.

65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.A4. in the Type Selector.rfa. click Keynote ➤ Element. 63 In the drawing area. 740 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 68 In the drawing area. 61 In the drawing area. select the component. Air Barrier.58 Using the method used previously. click Detail Component. click Load into Projects. 60 On the Design Bar. 2 x 8 Framing. select i_Invisible Line Detail Component. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ i_Medium Line Detail Component. and assign it keynote 07260. name the component Vapor Barrier. and Vapor Barrier. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Invisible Lines. 67 In the Type Selector.rfa. 64 Save the file as i_Invisible Line Detail Component. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.

i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 10 In the Keynotes dialog.. name the component Batt Insul. 9 In the drawing area.A1. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. 3 In the text editor.txt. navigate to i_Example_RevitKeynotes. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. add a keynote for the component. Each keynote displays as a simple number.A1. The database file opens in a text editor.A4. In the Type Selector. Enter 07460. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. click File menu ➤ Save. and press TAB.txt. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 07463. 11 Click Modify. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. ■ Modifying a Keynote Database | 741 . click to place the leader. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 741. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). and double-click i_Example_RevitKeynotes. navigate to 07463. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and assign it keynote 07210. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. click Keynote ➤ Element. click Browse. and click .A9. and click to place the note. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. and click Open. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Imperial.69 Select the component.rvt. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. and press TAB. 70 Using the method used previously. under Keynote Table. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. under Path Type. and click OK. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. 72 Save the file. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. 6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. select all the keynotes. select Absolute. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. and click OK. and close the text editor. 71 In the drawing area.

you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail.dwg. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.rvt. verify that Auto . 742 | Chapter 13 Detailing . These details do not update with changes to the building model. After you create a drafting view. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. select 3" = 1'-0". Navigate to Imperial\i_Roof Edge Detail. For Positioning. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise.Center to Center is selected. For Colors. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. for Scale. select Black and White. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 13 Click Modify. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. The detail that you import is in DWG format. click Training Files. 14 Save the file. and click OK. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you learn how to create a drafted detail.

5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. 6 Select the callout. enter EPDM Metal Coping. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). The detail is imported as an import symbol. and click Rename. 6 In the Project Browser. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Modify. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Reference other view. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. right-click Drafting 1. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. Creating a Reference Callout on page 743. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. and click OK. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. click Callout. 7 In the Rename View dialog.■ Click Open. Creating a Reference Callout | 743 . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).rvt.

and click Properties. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.No Reference. and click OK. 12 Click OK twice. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. double-click A105 . enter Detail . delete the existing value. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 744 | Chapter 13 Detailing .Elev. The callout is updated with the sheet information. 10 In the Rename dialog. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. click Modify./Details. 11 In the Type Properties dialog./Sect.Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. and double-click the callout. for New. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).No Reference). The callout head no longer displays a reference label. click Rename.

Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that the scale is 3" = 1'-0". Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 745 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 3 On the View Control Bar. so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 745 . you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Component. for Name. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.18 Save the file. and click OK.rvt. enter Header @ Sliding Door.

click Duplicate. click Edit/New. select the width dimension. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. 18 While pressing CTRL.5 In the Type Selector. select Gypsum-Plaster. click . 11 In the Name dialog. 19 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. click Filled Region. Draw a rectangle as shown. select the left and bottom edges of the region. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 16 Select the left edge of the region. Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. for Name. 14 Click OK 3 times. and enter 5/8". You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. 746 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click Region Properties. click Finish Sketch. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . and click OK. Board. 17 Click Modify. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Gyp.

Move the cursor up. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 2x6. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 747 . click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). and on the Edit toolbar. (Draw).Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. 24 Select the mirrored region. and click above the top of the region as the end point. Select the midpoint of the upper 2x6 as the start point. click 22 On the Options Bar.

35 Select all the linework for the wood region.Finish. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. in the Type Selector. 36 Align the wood region to the 2x6: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. On the Options Bar. and select the right edge of the wood region. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Align). click Filled Region. select Medium Lines. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Name dialog.25 Click Modify. Select the right edge of the lower 2x6. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. for Name. Draw a rectangle as shown. select Wood . click (Rectangle). enter Wood . 34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ .Finish. click Duplicate. 748 | Chapter 13 Detailing . and click OK. click Region Properties. 33 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New. verify that the thickness is 3/4".

and press ENTER. enter 1/4". 38 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 749 . 40 On the Options Bar. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. click Ref Plane. 39 In the Type Selector. For Offset. 42 On the Design Bar. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. click Finish Sketch. select Medium Lines. click . 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). verify that the width is 3/4" and the height is 2 1/2".37 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. sketch the new region as shown. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. click Filled Region. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar.

750 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click 48 Click Modify. enter 3/8". Move the cursor left 1". and press ENTER. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor right 1". and click the bottom of the gypsum board region.46 On the Tools toolbar. (Align). 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. and click to select the point. enter 0. 52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). and press ENTER. and click to select the point. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. Move the cursor down 1'. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. For Offset. 47 Click the reference plane. click Filled Region. and click to select the point. Select Chain.

select Medium Lines. and select the bottom horizontal line.54 On the Tools toolbar. 60 Select the left. click (Trim/Extend). 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. click Detail Lines. top. 58 In the Type Selector. 56 On the Design Bar. enter 1/8". Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Finish Sketch. For Offset. and right edges of the door panel region. and press ENTER. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 751 .

drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 752 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click Detail Component.61 Click Modify. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 62 Select the left detail line. 69 Select the bolt. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click Open. 65 On the Options Bar. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. click Training Files. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 68 Click Modify. select the height dimension. and press ENTER. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\A307 Bolts-Side.rfa. enter 3". click Load.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 753 . select Thin Lines. click Training Files. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 2x6. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 2x6. and click Open. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar.70 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 79 In the Type Selector. 76 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 78 On the Design Bar. 71 On the Options Bar. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 80 On the Options Bar. select Wide Lines. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\Expansion Bolts-Side. click Detail Lines.rfa. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. use the images as a guide. click Load. click . 74 Select the expansion bolt. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown.

82 Select the rectangle. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. click . click Detail Lines. 87 Click Modify. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 85 On the Options Bar. 754 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 84 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. (Mirror).

91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. click (Mirror). 92 Select the line. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click Detail Lines. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 755 . as shown.89 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. 90 In the Type Selector.

enter 1/8". and click to place the arc as shown. 102 In the Type Selector. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. click . click Detail Lines. 95 On the Design Bar. 103 Add two break lines as shown. select the length dimension. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. and press ENTER. 96 Beginning at the end of the 1/8" line. 756 | Chapter 13 Detailing . TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 97 On the Options Bar. 101 On the Design Bar. 99 Click Modify. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. select Break Line. click Detail Component.

select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. and click Modify. 107 Select the dimension line. 109 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 757 . . Because detail measurements are typically less than a foot. 106 Click to place the dimension. select To the nearest 1/16". click Edit/New.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 114 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. Select Suppress 0 Feet. 112 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. For Rounding. The dimension display is updated. click in the Value column. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 110 In the Name dialog. click 108 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Detail Linear . for Text ➤ Units Format. and click OK. click Duplicate. You create a dimension style for detailing that rounds to a more precise measurement than the default. click Dimension.3/32" Arial. the new style displays only inches. 113 Click OK 3 times. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. 105 In the drawing area.

click Dimension. 120 Under Text Fields. enter See Schedule. and then click the dimension text.115 In the Type Selector. under Dimension Value. 116 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. and click Modify. 121 Click OK. and enter Varies. select Replace With Text. select Linear Dimension Style : Detail Linear 3/32" Arial. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 122 On the Design Bar. 123 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . using the Drag Text grip. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 118 Select the wall dimension. 117 Select the dimension line. 124 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 119 In the Dimension Text dialog. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 758 | Chapter 13 Detailing .3/32”Arial. for Below.

Enter 9 ½" “ @ Type C.125 Select Modify to end the command. select Replace With Text. and enter 6 7/8" @ Type A. 129 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 7 ½" “ @ Type B. 130 Click OK. and click the dimension text. under Dimension Value. 127 In the Dimension Text dialog. 128 Click OK. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 759 . 126 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions.

760 | Chapter 13 Detailing . and click to place the text. 134 Enter Gyp. 137 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 138 On the Design Bar. click to create an arced leader. Board. and on the Options Bar. click (Add Right Arc Leader).Add text notes to complete the detail 131 On the Design Bar. select the gypsum board region on the left. 135 Select the note. and click Modify. 139 Save the file. 132 In the Options Bar. 133 In the drawing area. click Modify to end the command. 136 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. click Text.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. click Training Files. 761 .rvt. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser.Finishing the Sheets 14 In this tutorial. and double-click East. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

7 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.rfa. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Number of Leaders. 5 On the Options Bar. click Training Files.Hexagon. type 1. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Symbol. 8 Select the keynote. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 762 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .

and click OK. and click above the tag to place the copy. 13 Select the tag. click (Element Properties). under Identity Data. click (Copy). Creating a Note Block | 763 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. 12 On the Edit toolbar. type Seal existing doors and insulate.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. for Text.

type B. 18 Using the same method. and click. on the Edit toolbar. click (Element Properties). make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 764 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 19 With the tag selected. 15 For Text. on the Options Bar. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. (Mirror). position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays.14 With the copy selected. type Repair existing door surround. 16 For Tag. 17 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. click Copy.

Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Remove all existing windows. Tuckpoint as required. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.21 On the Design Bar. and moving counter-clockwise. Repair existing door surround. Repair as required. 22 Optionally. Clean exterior brick wall. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 765 . click Modify. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. using the table as a reference.

expand Sheets (all). select Exterior Construction Notes. type 1/4''. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. and drag it to the sheet. select Tag. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. 28 In the Project Browser. and select Bold. for Header text. and click Add. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. and click OK. select Tag. for Heading. verify that Arial is selected.Elevations. for Sort by. for the value. expand Schedules/Quantities. 27 In the column header (text). under Available fields. and for Alignment. and click Add. Select Text. type Mark. type Exterior Construction Notes. select Center. format. type Description. for Note block name. Clean cut and repair wall as required. On the Formatting tab. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. On the Appearance tab. 26 Click OK. 766 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. 29 In the Project Browser. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and double-click A103 . Create.

under Sheets (all).31 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Title Sheet. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. double-click T . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Using Drawing Lists | 767 . you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson.rvt. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 33 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.

Select Sheet Name. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. The drawing list displays. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click Add. select Sheet Number. under Sheets (all). in the first field. in the second field. select Sheet Number. under Available fields. select Sheet Index. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. 6 In the Project Browser. select does not equal. for Filter by. On the Filter tab. and drag it to the sheet. select Sheet Number. 768 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . and click Add.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. double-click T . ■ 4 Click OK. for Sort by. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. expand Schedules/Quantities. 5 In the list title field. 7 In the Project Browser. and in the third field.Title Sheet. type T.

11 Save the file. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. doors. and door frames. Finally. On construction documents. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. On construction documents. click Modify.9 On the Design Bar. door frame schedule. and so on). For the text. windows. Training File Using Legends | 769 . The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends.

Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.Open Level Head . click Edit/New.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. click Text. select Arial. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. and click OK. for Name. type Legend Text. for Name. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Circle Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote . click Symbol. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. click . and click OK. click Duplicate. 6 On the Options Bar. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. type 1/8''. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 10 For Text Size. 9 For Text Font. you create a text type with the necessary size.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 770 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . type Typical Symbol Legend. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. expand Sheets (all).Site Plan/Floor Plan. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. verify that is selected. and click to place it. click Typical Symbol Legend. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. Creating a Symbol Legend | 771 . 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. expand Legends. 14 Working from the top down. and for Leader. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. and double-click A101 . 16 In the Project Browser.

and click to place it. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. 23 Save the file. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark.17 In the Type Selector. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet.Unit 18. click Modify. double-click A102 . A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 21 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. 772 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . under Sheets.

9 Select the second wall. for Name. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. and press ENTER. select Section. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 7 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Component Legend | 773 . For Host length. For View. for Family. type 3'. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. type 4th Floor Wall Types. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Legend Component. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. select 3/4'' = 1'-0''. 3 For Scale.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. 6 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. and on the Options Bar. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model.rvt.

774 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.'' 14 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.Add titles to the legend components 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. 11 In the Type Selector. click Text. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. for Leader. click to add text without a leader. 12 On the Options Bar. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider.

pressing ENTER between component descriptions. The text note with leader is added to the legend. Creating a Component Legend | 775 . 17 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 18 Type the following text. 19 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.Add text to the legend 15 On the Options Bar. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 1'' Decking 2x4 Stud 1'' Decking. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 16 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point.

under Legends. drag it onto the sheet. and click New Sheet. right-click Sheets (all). 23 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. select Level 4. select 4th Floor Wall Types. 22 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and drag it to the new sheet. under Floor Plans. 24 In the Project Browser.Place the legend on a sheet 20 In the Project Browser. 776 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click OK to accept the default titleblock.

indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Creating a Component Legend | 777 . 28 In the Project Browser. click (Match Type). Match a component type 30 On the Tools toolbar. Tile views in the drawing window 26 In the Project Browser. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. select the Wall Type 2 component. The open drawings are both visible. click Modify to end the command. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled.25 On the Design Bar. 27 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. double-click Level 4. 29 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 31 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. under Floor Plans.

32 In the floor plan view. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 34 On the View Control Bar. 33 Select the patio divider wall. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. select Detail Level: Medium. 778 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. double-click Level 4. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. contractor inquiries. These changes can be due to owner requests. Using the table. or changes in building material availability. under Floor Plans.rvt.35 Optionally. You can create a sequence of revisions. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. click 36 Save the file. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. Using Revision Tracking | 779 . Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. In this exercise. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions.

verify that Per Project is selected. When Issued is selected. If Visible is not selected. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. In general. When you use this option. If you select Per Sheet. the revision is locked and issued to the field. In most instances. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. 7 Under Show. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. if the active revision is number 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. For example. 780 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. for Numbering.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 5 For Description. type a date. yet as concise as possible.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 Select the divider.8 Click OK. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Sketching Revision Clouds | 781 . but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. click Modify. including revision number and revision date. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. move the cursor up. click (Move). which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. double-click Level 4. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. you make changes to the project floor plan. 6 On the Design Bar. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 9 Save the file. 4 On the Edit toolbar. under Floor Plans. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 5 Select the divider.

11 On the Design Bar. click Revision Cloud. click near the partition you moved. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. 782 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . select Snaps Off. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. In the Snaps dialog. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Revit MEP is now in sketch mode. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. 8 In the drawing area.

13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click the Annotation Objects tab. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. select 6. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. Training File Tagging Revision Clouds | 783 . The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 16 Click OK. 17 Save the file. you load a revision tag into the project. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. for Line Weight.

Working with Revisions In this exercise. 6 Click Load. 5 In the Tags dialog. click Training Files. Because you chose to number by project.rfa. you create additional revisions in the revision table. click OK. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. You then issue a revision. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Revision Tag. 10 In the drawing area. the tag is displayed inside the cloud.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. click Tag ➤ By Category. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. click Tags. select Leader. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. the cloud is tagged as number 1. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 4.rvt. 8 In the Tags dialog. and because the revision is the first in the project. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. notice that Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 12 Save the file. scroll down to Revision Clouds. Training File 784 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 11 Click to place the tag. you need to add one. under Floor Plans.

You can continue to add revisions. type Modify Paving Area. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. you can no longer modify it. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. double-click A107 . 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. 8 Add another revision row. and enter a date for the revision. under Sheets. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.Unnamed. 9 Click OK. you prevent further changes to the revision. with the description Relocate Door. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. click Add. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. Working with Revisions | 785 .rvt. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. You do this by issuing the revision. NOTE After you issue a revision. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. select Issued. and enter a date. 7 For Description.

15 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Drafting tab. under Sheets (all). double-click Level 4.Modify Paving Area. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. 10 In the Project Browser. for Revision. 13 Click Finish Sketch. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 2 . apply Seq. in the drawing area. 17 Using the same method learned previously.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. select Tag ➤ By Category. select the revision cloud. double-click A107 . click to add a revision clouds. 20 On the Project Browser. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 19 To add tags. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. 786 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. select Revision Cloud.Unnamed. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. select Seq. 12 In the drawing area. 3 .Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic.

You do this so that the revision can be changed. select the titleblock. Click Options. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. For each revision. delete the first 3 characters.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. beginning with "D". Working with Revisions | 787 . 26 In the drawing area. 25 Click OK twice. select Alphabetic. for Sequence. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. you edit the titleblock family. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. height. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. and rotation) to the revision schedule. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. clear Issued. for Numbering.

expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. for Appearance. 788 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . Clear Blank row before data. click Edit Family. click Load into Projects. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Edit. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. for Build Schedule. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. and drag it above the schedule area. and then zoom in to the revision schedule.27 On the Options Bar. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 33 Select the schedule header. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. and click Properties. click Modify. Select Grid lines. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. under Other. select Bottom-up. click Yes. click Yes. 28 In the alert dialog. Select Outline. 34 On the Design Bar. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. right-click Revision Schedule. and press DELETE. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area.

the schedule is restricted to a specific size. 45 On the Appearance tab. and click Properties. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. select the revision schedule. click Edit.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. Working with Revisions | 789 . 43 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click OK twice. When the height property is variable. select 90° Counterclockwise. With a user-defined height. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. 40 Select the revision schedule header. for Rotation on Sheet. enter Rev. open the titleblock family for editing. for Height. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. for Heading. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. under Other. and on the Options Bar. right-click Revision Schedule. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. for Formatting. select User defined. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser..

click Load into Projects.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. you learn to import information (such as images. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Yes. text. 51 Save the file. 790 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. 50 In the Reload Family dialog.

4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. for Leader. click Modify.Title Sheet.rvt.JPG. under Sheets. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Importing Image Files In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. and place it on a sheet. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. click Training Files.rvt. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click T . click Text. click to add text without a leader. 5 On the Design Bar. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 1 In the Project Browser. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click T . Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Title Sheet. under Sheets. Importing Image Files | 791 .

you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit MEP. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 6 Select the text. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. with the new text box still selected.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. click Modify. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window.doc text file in another window. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 9 On the Design Bar. Training File 792 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 11 Save the file. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text.

3 In Microsoft Excel. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 4 Under Printer. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. This process may vary from system to system. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. Importing Spreadsheets | 793 . 10 On the Design Bar.JPG. double-click A102 . and open Common\Fixture Schedule. 12 Save the file. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Desktop. click Modify. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. for File name. 7 In the Revit MEP window.JPG.rvt. This step has been completed for you. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format.Unit 18. type Fixture Schedule. under Sheets. click Training Files.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.xls. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. click File menu ➤ Print. This exercise demonstrates a common method. and click Save. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 5 Click OK.mdi. select the document writer. for Name. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog.

794 .

you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. called dependent views. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. To effectively document this project. or footprint. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. The large floor plan. 795 .Using Dependent Views 15 In this tutorial. as well as a large lab building. you break up the plan into sections.

796 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 797 . and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, under Level 2, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Aviary, and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar, click Zoom To Fit. 6 In the drawing area, select the crop region. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region, and the model crop is the interior crop region.

7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.

798 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up, confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

9 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 799

10 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 11 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Labs, and click OK. 14 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 15 Select the crop region. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.

800 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 19 On the View Control Bar, click (Hide Crop Region).

20 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Matchline. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points:

Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.)

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 801

■ ■ ■ ■

Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Move the cursor left about 16', and click.

24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

802 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 26 In the Object Styles dialog, click the Annotation Objects tab. 27 Under Matchline, for Line Weight, select 9. 28 For Line Pattern, select Double Dash 5/8'', and click OK.

Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 31 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets, right-click A101 - Unnamed, and click Rename. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 Aviary, and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, click Level 2 - Aviary, and drag it onto the sheet. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 803

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet, rename the sheet Level 2 Labs, and place the Level 2 - Labs dependent view on the sheet.

Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 39 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 - Aviary is selected. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.

804 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

41 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 2 - Labs. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.

44 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 45 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 805

46 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2 - Aviary. 47 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Crop Region).

48 Select the crop region, click the far right control, and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.

49 If, after modifying the annotation crop region, the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display, select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

806 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3), leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.

51 On the View Control Bar, click Apply dependent view settings to other plans

(Hide Crop Region).

52 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 2, and click Apply Dependent Views. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view, you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 53 In the Select Views dialog, select all views in the list, and click OK. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view, but are not placed on sheets. 54 In the Project Browser, expand Level 1, and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.

56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 807

57 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views
In this exercise, you
■ ■ ■ ■

Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.rvt

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South Elevation. The matchline is already placed in the view.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

808 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, expand South Elevation, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Left, and click OK. 5 In the drawing area, select the Crop Region.

6 Select the inside crop region control on the right, and drag it toward the center of the view, cropping the view to the aviary.

7 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

8 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 9 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Right, and click OK. 11 Select the crop region. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left, and drag it toward the center of the drawing, cropping the view to the lab building.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 809

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

810 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 811

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

812 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

Using Advanced Features

813

814

Grouping

16

Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009, you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. By grouping objects, you not only simplify their placement, you also simplify the modification process. For example, when you make changes to a single instance of a model group, all instances in the building model are updated, and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial, you create a model group for a typical kitchen, and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project, or with those working on a different project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose, creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create, place, and modify repetitive units.

Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups
In this lesson, you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units, hotel rooms, and typical office layouts. After you create a model group, you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. In another exercise, you add the new model group to a previously created group. The new group is considered nested within the host group, and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. When you make changes to a nested group, the host group is also updated automatically.

Creating and Placing a Group
In this exercise, you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. In this exercise, you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. You mirror one instance of the group, and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.

815

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium.rvt. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.

Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click First Floor.

2 Click in the drawing area, enter ZR, and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.

816 | Chapter 16 Grouping

Creating and Placing a Group | 817 . enter Typical Kitchen. click (Group). and click OK. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. 4 On the Edit toolbar.

7 On the Design Bar. 818 | Chapter 16 Grouping . click Modify. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. select the center control for the group origin. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

under Groups. right-click Typical Kitchen. click Modify. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. and click Create Instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. expand Model. 12 On the Design Bar.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. Creating and Placing a Group | 819 . and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance.

14 On the Edit toolbar. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. clear Copy. click (Mirror). 820 | Chapter 16 Grouping . The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection.

18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 821 . and on the Edit toolbar. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate).

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and one rotated. 822 | Chapter 16 Grouping . as shown. one mirrored. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.

and click Save. When you finish editing. click Save As.rvt. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modifying a Group | 823 . press TAB to highlight the wall. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. you make changes to an instance of a group. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.Save the training file 22 On the File menu.rvt. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group In this exercise. and click to select it. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen.

Click icon to exclude in this group instance.).).). NOTE To display an excluded element. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. press TAB.3 Click (Group Member. and click to select the door. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. press TAB. 4 Move the cursor over the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). select the element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click member to group instance. and click to select the wall. 824 | Chapter 16 Grouping . (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. 7 Click (Group Member.

click Modify.8 On the Design Bar. click Wall. 11 On the Design Bar. click Door. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 825 . select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. clear Tag on Placement. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. move the cursor to the left.

select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. All other elements in the model are grayed out. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. click Edit Group. 20 On the Options Bar. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. click Modify. 826 | Chapter 16 Grouping .16 On the Design Bar. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. move the cursor up. 22 In the drawing area. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. In edit group mode.

enter 7'. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. click Modify. Nesting Groups | 827 . click 27 For Base Offset. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. you add the Typical Kitchen group. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Finish. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 25 Select the opening. (Element Properties). All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. 28 On the group editor toolbar. under Constraints. Nesting Groups In this exercise. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group.24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 3' 4''. which acts as the host. created in an earlier lesson. for Unconnected Height. and on the Options Bar.

Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. click (Add to Group). 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. 828 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 4 On the group editor toolbar. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. under Floor Plans. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. in the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area. select the Typical Kitchen group. double-click First Floor.

Nesting Groups | 829 . click Finish. double-click Second Floor. and each of the bifold doors. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 7 On the group editor toolbar. select the wall between the folding doors. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group.6 Press TAB. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group.

such as text. you add door tags to a group. double-click First Floor. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. and filled regions. such as door and window tags.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model.rvt. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. In the next exercise. under Floor Plans. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. 830 | Chapter 16 Grouping . Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements.

A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. Creating a Detail Group | 831 . click Filled Region. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. and select a point below the left elevator. click Finish Sketch. click to draw a rectangular region. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar.

11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 14 On the Edit toolbar.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 9 On the Options Bar. and select the text note and the filled region. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. as shown. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. click Modify. 12 Enter Tile. and on the Design Bar. 16 In the drawing area. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 832 | Chapter 16 Grouping . click to add an arc leader. click Text. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. click (Group). enter Elevator Lobby Tile.

and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. under Groups. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 833 . Because the detail group contains variables. and click Create Instance. 20 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. expand Detail.18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Modify. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. double-click Second Floor. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 21 In the drawing area.

i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Modify. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. as shown. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different.rvt. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.manner that a drawing component can be added. click Tag ➤ By Category. double-click First Floor. 3 On the Options Bar. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 5 On the Design Bar. 834 | Chapter 16 Grouping . Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. click (Filter Selection). 9 On the Edit toolbar. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. and click OK. click Check None. 11 In the Project Browser. select Door Tags. click (Group). double-click Second Floor. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. for Attached Detail Group Name. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups | 835 . 8 In the Filter dialog.7 On the Options Bar.

14 On the Options Bar. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. click Place Detail. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. click Modify. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. therefore. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. When you load the group from the library into a new project. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. Training File 836 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 16 On the Design Bar.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit.

i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 3 For File name. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. A warning dialog displays. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. 12 On the Design Bar. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. and click Save Group. browse to the Desktop.rvt. for Create new. under Groups\Model. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. and expand Model. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt. and click Save. select 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Open. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Modify. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click OK. verify that Project is selected.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. expand Groups. verify that Same as group name is selected. click OK. accept the default template file. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. click Desktop. In this case. Saving and Loading Groups | 837 . the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). 5 In the New Project dialog.

click Link.rvt file is added as a link to the project. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. click Remove Link. and on the Options Bar. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 24 In the message dialog. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 838 | Chapter 16 Grouping . either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 20 On the Options Bar. verify that Attached Details is selected only.rvt. 23 In the confirmation dialog. expand Revit Links. click Use Existing. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. select the linked Revit model. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Bind. click Training Files. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. click Modify. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. When a group is converted to a link. click OK. 17 On the Design Bar. and the link is removed.

When you are working on a shared project. The first time you activate worksets within a project. they cannot make changes to it. 839 . you specify an active workset. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. Working in a shared project In a shared project. such as walls. select the desired workset. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. and click Editable. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. you must first enable Worksharing. however. and so on. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. go to the Worksets dialog. doors. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. stairs. called Worksharing. Using Worksharing. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. use Element Borrowing. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. All other team members can view this workset. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit MEP 2009. Elements specific to a view. After the project is shared. To make a workset editable.Sharing Projects 17 When working with large building projects. floors. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. In this tutorial. You can enable Worksharing for any project. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. A workset is a collection of building elements. such as annotations and dimensions. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time.

Instead. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. In the lessons and exercises that follow. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. After learning the fundamentals. you can select which worksets are open or closed. Team size 840 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. In the next exercise. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. such as a tenant interior. When setting up Worksharing. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. In a multi-story structure. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit MEP by opening only those worksets required for your work. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets.

The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. On this tab. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. not including the Project Standards. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Shared Levels and Grids. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. designers work in teams. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. This allows Revit MEP to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. When creating the new worksets. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Regardless of the default setting. with each assigned a specific functional task. and View worksets. for a typical project. Team member roles Typically. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. In most projects. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 841 . you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. When you create a new workset. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. You should have at least one workset for each person. each team member has control over a portion of the design. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Experience has shown that. As new members create worksets for their own use.

your changes are saved. however. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. the file is saved as the central file. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. When you save locally (to your local file). This makes them available to other team members. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. For example. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. However. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. When finished or at regular intervals. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. you make that workset editable by you. When you save to the central file. you should then save to your local file. 842 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . This is called “Selective Open. your changes propagate to the entire team. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. When you save to the central file. After saving to the central file. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Therefore. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. As you work. On the Options Bar. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. within the local file. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. you can select which workset is active. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. proceeds as usual.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. if a workset named Interior was created. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Generally.

The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. To do this. for instance. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 843 . This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you work no differently then you would in the office. make any required worksets editable. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. In this instance. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. and make that workset editable. save to the central file. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. if you know who checked out the required workset. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit MEP. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. In this situation. When working remotely. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you should check out the Materials workset. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. using VPN. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. Alternatively. reload the latest changes from the central file. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. In this conceptual exercise. and then save the local file. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets.

Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu.In the next exercise. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. 844 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. and open Common\c_Worksets. 3 In the Worksets dialog. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. The Worksets dialog displays. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Show. click Training Files. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. Your username displays as the present owner. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. click Worksets." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and notice all are editable by you.rvt.

Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. click OK. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Only User-Created worksets should display. In this case. When you initially activate Worksharing. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. you can rename the default workset. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. another is assigned the interior layout. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. select Workset1. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. clear Visible by default in all views. expand Floor Plans. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. 8 Click OK. and click OK. imagine four users including yourself. 12 Click Rename. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. For training purposes. it is better to make them visible by default. 9 Click New. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. ■ 5 Under Show. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. currently named Workset1. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Revit MEP creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. 16 In the drawing area. You do. In this simple training project. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 845 . Therefore. 13 In the Rename dialog.When you enable worksharing. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. 14 In the Worksets dialog. In this training file. For example. and Views. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. Project Standards. Because the interior walls appear in many views. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. however. click New. clear Families. type the name Exterior Shell. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1".

29 Click OK. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. including the interior doors. stairs. click . 19 Click OK. 23 Select all of the interior elements. under Identity Data. select Interior Layout for Workset. under Identity Data. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. select Interior Layout for Workset. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 24 On the Options Bar. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. and click OK. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. and walls. 21 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View menu. click the Worksets tab. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. 846 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 20 Select one of the interior walls. and click OK. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. click Visibility/Graphics. click .17 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data.

Create the central file 37 On the File menu. 35 On the Options Bar. you enabled Worksharing on a project. In this exercise. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 847 . you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. 43 Click OK. 41 In the Worksets dialog. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 34 In the drawing area. Now that you have created the central file. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. double-click Level 2. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. and click OK. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. 39 Click Save. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. 30 On the View menu. 33 In the Project Browser. click Worksets. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 38 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. click Close. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. If any interior elements remain. click Visibility/Graphics. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. click the Worksets tab. under Floor Plans. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 42 On the right side of the dialog. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. select Interior Layout for Workset. under Views (all). under Identity Data. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. click Non Editable. select all of the interior elements of the building model. click . click Save As. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 44 On the File menu. 32 Select Interior Layout. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A.

The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. 7 In the Save As dialog. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. and double-click Level 1. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. check out worksets. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. select Interior Layout. 848 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 11 In the Worksets dialog. In this case. you create your local file. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. any referenced workset is opened but hidden.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. 12 Click OK. Before working on the model. and click OK. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. expand Floor Plans. and click Save. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. If you have not yet completed the exercise. and click OK. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. select the central file. make modifications to the building model. select Interior Layout for Name. and select Yes for Editable. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. expand Views (all). Next. click Options. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 15 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Open dialog. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. please do so before continuing. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. click Worksets. 13 On the Window menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 844. 6 On the File menu. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. You have created a local file which is for your use only. click Save As. select all the User-Created worksets. 4 Click Open. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. click Open. In addition. and select Specify.

click Modify. If this is selected. click . you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. click Worksets. If it was owned by another user. you can still edit this wall. Because this element is not owned by another user. In this case. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. 23 On the File menu. notice the Editable Only option. 21 On the Options Bar. Revit MEP borrows it for you and applies your changes. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. 18 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. under Identity Data. 24 Click OK. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 20 Under Constraints. however. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 22 Click OK. Working Individually with Worksets | 849 . click . notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. On the Options Bar. In the Worksets dialog. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Verify that it is cleared. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. the Edited by value is now assigned to you.

26 Delete the door. click Wall.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 850 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 29 In the Type Selector. 31 On the Design Bar. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. click Modify. The precise location is not important.126mm Partition (2-hr). 34 In the Type Selector. 33 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 28 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. click Door. select Basic Wall: Interior . 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. and modify the length so that the corridor is open.

Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. If you have not yet completed these exercises. At the end of a work session. save to central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 851 . they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. displays the workset as well as the element type. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. Borrowed Elements is selected. make elements editable. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. Whenever you save. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. add two door openings into the rooms you created. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. you should perform regular saves. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. Throughout the process. In this exercise. checked out worksets. you created your local file. it is recommended. By default. and save locally immediately afterward. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. which matches the information in the Status Bar. two users access the central file through a network connection. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. For training purposes. a tooltip. and reload the latest changes. please do so before continuing.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. In addition. In this particular case. click Save to Central. you should relinquish all worksets. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. You modified the building model. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. leave this file open in its current state. each user must check out worksets. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. When working in your local file.

under Username. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. 852 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2. and click Save. 4 Click the General Tab and. and proceed to Creating a local copy. This is a system setting. and select Yes for Editable. 7 In the Open dialog. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. click Open. You now have a local copy of the project. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. For training purposes. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 12 In the Save As dialog. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and click OK. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. click Worksets. skip the following section. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. select the central file. 11 On the File menu. Using a second Revit MEP session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit MEP window. In addition. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 2 Start a new Revit MEP session by double-clicking the Revit MEP icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. one user has already created a local file.rvt. return to the Settings dialog. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and click OK. 3 On the Settings menu. select all the User-Created worksets. click Options. 15 On the File menu. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. consider that person to be User 1. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. User 2: Create a local file. In the following section of this exercise. and select Specify. 9 Click Open. enter User 2. specifically sequenced. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. instructions are staggered. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. and click OK. click Options. click Save As. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. This file is for your use only. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise.

and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. and double-click Level 1. and select Yes for Editable. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 27 On the File menu. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. If it is not open. and double-click Level 1.You are now the owner of that workset. expand Views (all). click Worksets. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. If you only have one workset checked out. select the lower exterior wall. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. modify the building model. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. expand Floor Plans. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. open it now. 23 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 24 In the Project Browser. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. User 1: Check out worksets.” 29 Click OK. 17 Click OK. it becomes the active workset. click Save to Central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 853 . expand Views (all). 19 On the File menu. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning.

select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 46 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. Because you now have more than one workset checked out.” 39 Click OK. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 41 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. The changes User 2 made are apparent. click Reload Latest. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. 33 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. select Yes for Editable. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. under Views (all). 42 Select Furniture Layout. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. However. User 1: Reload latest worksets. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. 43 In the Project Browser. Click Yes. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. Before adding any furniture. When you save to central. 44 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. 854 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 38 In the Save to Central dialog.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. right-click Copy of Level 1. and click OK. you should create a furniture plan view. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. and click OK.” 35 Click OK. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. and click Rename. 45 In the Rename View dialog. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 37 On the File menu. click Save to Central. click Worksets. click Save to Central. under Floor Plans. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays.

select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. such as Wall Types. select Project Standards. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 50 On the View menu. Therefore. the Visible by default option was not selected. 66 On the File menu. 48 In the Type Selector. click Save to Central. click Worksets. choose any desk. click Visibility/Graphics. click Save to Central. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. and click inside any room. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. NOTE System families. and click OK.” 55 Click OK. and click OK. click the Worksets tab. 60 In the Rename dialog. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. are placed under Project Standards. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility.200mm. and click Element Properties. click Edit/New. 62 On the File menu. enter Exterior Wall . click Reload Latest. 63 In the Worksets dialog. click Modify. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 49 On the Design Bar. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 855 . 58 In the Element Properties dialog.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 61 Click OK 2 times. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. under Show. 65 Click OK. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. rather than Families. click Component. 53 On the File menu. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. click Rename.

If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. finished the previous workset exercises. In subsequent steps. As each of you work. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. There are specific instructions for each user. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and click OK. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2. you save the training file as a central file. click Save As. click Options. and published their changes back to the central file. User 1: Reload latest. At the appropriate point in this exercise. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. you need to set up your central and local files. 3 In the Save As dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 856. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. 70 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Checking out worksets. modified the building model. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. and still have your local files open. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. and these problems are rectified. throughout this training. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. leave this file open in its current state. select Reload Latest. 856 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . two users worked on the same building model using worksets. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. click Training Files. leave this file open in its current state. select Save to Central.rvt. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. Each user must have network access to the central file. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. This exercise requires two users and. select the following. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. In the final exercise of this tutorial. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. Each user checked out worksets. and save 69 On the File menu. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2).

4 In the File Save Options dialog. 8 In the Save As dialog. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 13 In the Open dialog. This is the local file for User 1. 17 On the File menu. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click OK. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Save As. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. select Make this a Central File after save. click Save As. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Next. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. click Open. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. and reset the Username to your computer login name. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit MEP by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. ■ ■ ■ This Revit MEP session is now set up for User 2. and click OK. and click OK. and select Specify. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. On the Settings menu. select the central file. The central file should still be open. click Options. In addition. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Set the Username to User 2. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and click OK. and click OK. click Options. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 15 Click Open. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 5 Click Save. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 12 On the File menu. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. return to the Settings dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 857 . and click Save. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 18 In the Save As dialog. click Options. 6 On the File menu. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. This is a system setting. and click Save.

You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. and select Yes for Editable. double-click Level 1. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. and then click OK. click Worksets. After you submit the request. click the File menu. Afterwards. select Exterior Shell. 24 Under Active Workset. select them. select the second window from the top. 27 Under Active Workset. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. 26 In the Worksets dialog. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. and click Editing Requests. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. At this point. 22 In the Worksets dialog. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 858 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . and select Yes for Editable.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. 29 On the Options Bar. verify that Editable Only is cleared. and then click OK. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. You are now the owner of that workset. You are now the owner of that workset. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. click Worksets. 30 On the left exterior wall. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. under Floor Plans. select the Interior Layout workset. and click Open. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. select Interior Layout. if any User-Created worksets are not open.

and click OK. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. In this multi-user exercise. you requested permission to edit the element. 35 Click Grant. select the request submitted by User 2. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. and the other user granted it. to Local. 36 Click Close. A message informs you that your request has been granted. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. 38 Click OK. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 859 . click Check Now. click Close.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. select the following. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. select Save to Central. and notice the window is in the new location. In this case. and close 39 On the File menu.

860 .

In addition. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can have multiple sets of design options. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. Using design options. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. In this tutorial. At any time in the design process. 861 . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. For example.Creating Multiple Design Options 18 When working with a building model.

Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. The client has asked you to create various options. In the second exercise.rvt. In the first exercise in this lesson. the only available command is to create a new option set. click New. click Training Files. 862 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. you design each of the structural options. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. under Option Set. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the roof and structure systems must work together. 2 In the Design Options dialog.In this particular case. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. With the second option. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. you can edit it. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. each is constructed for interchangeability. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. you set up multiple design option sets. each with multiple design options. make your final design decision. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and delete the unwanted options from the project. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. After you create a design option. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. In the final exercise of this lesson. therefore. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. TIP In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options.

click Column. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. or add a dimension string between the columns. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. Creating the Structural Design Options | 863 . add three columns. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied.3 Select Option 1 (primary). Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 9 On the Design Bar. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. click 12 On the Options Bar. 5 On the View menu. select: ■ ■ ■ . 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. In this case. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. expand Floor Plans. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. and the third column centered between the two. and click Close. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. expand Views (all). In the following illustration. click Modify. By selecting Multiple. click Edit Selected. 7 In the Type Selector. 4 In the Project Browser. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. 11 On the Edit toolbar. TIP To center the middle column. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide.

click . 17 Zoom out and. Because of the size of the columns. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 864 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 18 On the View toolbar. When you are finished. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. using the same technique. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. they are difficult to see in this view.

and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. you add the beams that span the columns. 21 In the Type Selector. Adding a beam is a two-click process. select Round Bar : 2". under Floor Plans. In it. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. Next. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. and click at its center to set the beam start point. 23 On the Design Bar. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. click Modify. 19 In the Project Browser. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. double-click TOP OF CORE. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. click Beam.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Zoom in on the upper right column. The second click specifies the end of the beam. Use the following illustration as a guide. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. The first click specifies the beam start point. Creating the Structural Design Options | 865 .

and select the center of the column to add a copy. 28 Zoom out. move down to the next set of columns. click 26 On the Options Bar. and click the center point. 866 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . click . 30 On the View toolbar.25 On the Edit toolbar. zoom into the left column. select: ■ ■ ■ . Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns.

click New. and click OK. There should now be two roofing design options. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. click New. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. not a new option set. 45 Under Roofing. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. under Option. click New. and click OK. under Option Set. 46 Under Option. and click OK. 34 In the Design Options dialog. click Rename. under Option. enter Brackets for New. and click OK. click Rename. Creating the Structural Design Options | 867 . 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 41 Under Option Set.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 32 In the Design Options dialog. click Rename. 43 In the Rename dialog. under Option. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 40 In the Rename dialog. 37 Select Option 2 and. 36 In the Rename dialog. under Option Set. enter Roofing for New. under Option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. select Option 1 (primary). enter Beam for New. name the option Louvers. and click OK. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. 38 In the Rename dialog. enter Structure for New. 33 Click Finish Editing. click Rename.

You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. Under Now Editing. select Option 2. 51 Under Edit. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 53 In the Project Browser. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. you create the second design option. under Floor Plans. under Structure. and click OK. double-click ROOF TERRACE. name the option Sunscreen. This allows you to more easily manage the project. When finished. 48 Under Option. 50 In the Design Options dialog. select Edit Selected. 52 Click Close. select Beam. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 868 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . notice that Structure: Beam is displayed.47 Under Roofing. click Rename. it will resemble the following illustration.

55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Align. 56 In the Type Selector. The second click represents the plane that is moved. Creating the Structural Design Options | 869 . select Roof Beam. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. click Component. 58 On the Tools menu. Refer to the following illustration. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.

The second click represents the move end point. click Modify. The first click sets the move start point. on the Edit toolbar. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 870 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . Click to indicate the end point of the move. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 62 Select the beam and. 61 On the Design Bar. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment.60 After aligning the beam.

click Design Options ➤ Design Options. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. 68 In the Design Options dialog. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. Notice that even before you close the dialog. click . You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. which is visible by default.rvt. i_Urban_House-in progress. 66 On the View toolbar. 70 On the File menu. Creating the Structural Design Options | 871 . click Save As. 69 Click Close. 67 On the Tools menu. name the file. click Finish Editing. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. you need this file in its current state. and click Save. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam.

open it now. you design each of the roofing options. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. each with multiple design options to pick from. 2 On the Tools menu. select Louvers (primary). the other for beams. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. select Rafter 2 x 10. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. a Louver system. In the next exercise. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. Sunscreen. expand Floor Plans. The first option. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. 6 In the Project Browser. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. under Roofing. delete them after the rafter is in place. 8 In the Type Selector. you set up multiple design option sets. With the second option. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. The second roofing system. 10 Referring to the following illustration. and double-click TOP OF CORE. do so now. 5 Click Close.In this exercise. 4 Under Edit. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 872 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Component. expand Views (all). click Edit Selected. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. 3 In the Design Options dialog. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. Under Now Editing. If you need to add dimensions. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'.rvt.

16 On the Options Bar. click Array. under Other. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. click Modify.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Select Constrain. Enter 5 for Number. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 On the Edit menu. Select 2nd for Move To. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 873 . enter 38' 6" for Length. and click OK. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. click . 13 On the Options Bar.

874 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. TIP When entering a dimension value. when the listening dimension displays. enter 3' 3". you can enter 3 3. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. rather than entering 3' 3". For example.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. and press ENTER. The space separates feet and inches.

26 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 875 . The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. 25 With the louver still selected. Select 2nd for Move To. Select Constrain. enter 1’. when the listening dimension displays. select Louver 2 x 6. click the Edit menu. 22 On the Design Bar. and select the louver you just placed. 27 For the array starting point. 23 On the Options Bar. click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. and press Enter. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. and click Array. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click Component.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Modify. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. under Other. Enter 34 for Number. and.

876 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options .Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 29 On the View toolbar. 30 On the Tools menu. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. The louver roof system is complete. 31 In the Design Options dialog. under Edit. click Finish Editing. click .

the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. under Roofing. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. then you can modify it through the dimension. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. click . Therefore. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. and double-click West. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. 43 On the Design Bar. In this case. and click OK. The first two points define the ends of the line. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and the third point defines the arc. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. 33 Under Editing. 41 Select the top of the left column.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 40 On the Options Bar. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. select Sunscreen. Click OK. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 877 . Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. the top of the next column on the right. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 39 On the Design Bar. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. click Properties. expand Elevations. click Edit Selected. click Lines. You will fix this in a later step. 34 In the Project Browser. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. and then click Close.

Sunscreen. click Trim/Extend. click Finish Sketch. Under Constraints. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. The louver roof system is complete. In this exercise. 50 On the Tools menu. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. 45 Click OK. under Edit. a Louver system. then the center arc. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. The arcs should connect. The first option. 878 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 52 On the File menu. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. click Save. 49 On the View toolbar. 48 On the Design Bar. you designed each of the roofing options. click . and then click Close. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. 51 In the Design Options dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. The second roofing system. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. 46 On the Tools menu.44 In the Element Properties dialog. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. Select the right arc. click Finish Editing. you need this file in its current state. Under Constraints.

make it part of the building model. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. 7 On the View menu. under Views (all). under Views (all). Notice that both option sets are set to automatic.Managing Design Options In this exercise. and last options. and click Rename. 5 Right-click each of the copies. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. and click Duplicate. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. click Visibility/Graphics. right-click {3D}. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. expand 3D Views. under 3D Views. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. and delete the discarded design options. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). and click OK. under 3D Views. Managing Design Options | 879 . All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. tertiary. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. under Views (all). and click Rename. 4 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. click the Design Options tab. enter Primary Option. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. do so now. double-click Secondary Option. double-click Primary Option. you select a design. After exploring the combinations. 2 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. secondary. 11 On the View menu.

20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Last Option. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 15 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. click the Design Options tab. 19 On the View menu. 880 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click OK. under 3D Views. double-click Tertiary Option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. under Views (all). 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 14 In the Project Browser. under Views (all).

27 In the alert dialog. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 26 Under Option Set. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 24 Under Option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. Because the client has selected the design option. click Close. double-click Primary Option. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. In your design options. 29 Select Roofing. 25 Select Structure. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. Managing Design Options | 881 . the current primaries are no longer options. under Structure. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. click Accept Primary. An alert is displayed. 30 Under Option Set. The set is deleted. 22 On the Tools menu. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. select Make Primary. click Yes. but should be accepted as part of the building model. click Delete to remove the views that used options. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. click Delete. select Beam. click Yes. In this case. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. since you no longer need them. the beam option becomes part of the model.At this point. 31 In the alert dialog. This was the client choice for structural.

35 On the File menu. After exploring the combinations. In this exercise. 882 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . and deleted the discarded design options. you selected a design. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. click Save. made it part of the building model.

complete with schedules. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. You create new phases. In the lesson and exercises that follow. This changes room definition and total building model area.Project Phasing 19 In any project. In the second exercise. and then add new building model elements. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new phases. 883 . you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. then add new walls and doors in a different location. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. demolish existing construction. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. In the second exercise. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. demolish existing walls and doors. For the client.

2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. are visible in this view. and click OK. and open Common\c_Phasing. define the units. During the demolition and renovation process. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. 884 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. go to the Settings menu. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. 4 Click Cancel. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. In the Element Properties dialog. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. If you wish to do so. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. As you add new elements to the building model. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. click Project Units. and double-click Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. expand Floor Plans. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). regardless of phase. When you create a new project. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. under Phasing. under Phasing. you do not need to change the project units to metric. click (Element Properties). click Training Files. click Modify. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. 7 Click Cancel.rvt. This means that all building model elements.

Because this is a phase-specific view. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. including the door tags. Phasing Your Model | 885 .Existing. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific.Existing. and click Rename. 11 In the Filter dialog. 20 In the Rename dialog. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser.Demo. 17 Click No. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. click Modify. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. click (Filter Selection). under Floor Plans. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. all of the building model elements. enter Level 1 . After you release the mouse button. 18 In the Project Browser. After you create the views. 16 In the Rename dialog.Existing. clear Door Tags. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. under Floor Plans.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. right-click Level 1. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. and click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter Level 1 . for Phase Created. under Floor Plans. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Existing. Because this is a renovation project. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP If this were a multi-story building. and click Rename. click . 14 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 . are highlighted in red. right-click Copy of Level 1 . and click OK. under Phasing.

In this case. Phase status is time-dependent. however. select Overridden. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. Later in this exercise. under Floor Plans. Next. and click OK. you modify these settings.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. 21 In the Project Browser. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. enter Composite Plan. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. 29 For Composite Plan. 26 In the Phasing dialog. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. There are five default phase filters. Demolished. You may need to zoom in to see this. 28 Under Filter Name. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. select Existing. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. to which all the building model elements belong. click the Phase Filters tab. double-click Level 1 . Existing. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 27 Click New.Demo. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab.Existing. Because of this time relationship. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. On a logical time line. under Floor Plans. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. double-click Level 1 . new construction occurs after existing construction. for Phase. 24 In the Project Browser. under New. and Temporary. 886 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . under Phasing.

As you click each wall. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. 35 Click OK twice. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. select the line style. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration.31 Under Phase Status. its display changes to a red dashed line. 39 In the Phasing dialog. double-click Level 1 . under Floor Plans. you begin demolition. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. select Demolished. click the value for Color. under Floor Plans. 36 Using the same method. Phasing Your Model | 887 . Next. 42 In the Project Browser. you demolish all elements hosted by it. click (Demolish).Demo. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser.Existing. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. double-click Level 1 . Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. select red. under Cut ➤ Lines. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. select the interior walls one at a time. 34 In the Color dialog. click OK. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. select a lighter blue. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. or you can use the demolish tool. 32 In the Demolished row. There are two ways to demolish an element. When you demolish the host.

53 Open Level 1 . for Phase Filter. 47 In the Type Selector. and click OK.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 52 Open Level 1 . The demolished walls no longer display. click Door.Demo. click Wall. select Show Previous + New. for Phase Filter. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 49 On the Design Bar. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. select Basic Wall: Interior . 50 In the Type Selector. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. under Phasing. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click OK. 46 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". under Phasing. 51 Add a door leading into each room. add a long horizontal wall.Existing. 888 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing .

61 On the View Control Bar. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans.New. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. 62 If necessary. The renovated building model plan is displayed.Demo. regardless of phase. All elements are displayed in this view. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. and existing shows as half-tone. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). 60 On the View toolbar. because the phase filter is set to Show All. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Phasing Your Model | 889 .New. right-click Level 1 . and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. 57 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. new is shown in blue.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. which are displayed as red. 59 Open Level 1 .

go to the Settings menu. and click OK. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. define the units. the rooms change in both definition and size. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. you can see the new walls added to the building model. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. In this view. 890 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . demolition. click Project Units. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. If you wish to do so. As the renovation process continues. In this exercise. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. Notice that this view is the original building model. In the next exercise. click Training Files. In this view. 63 Close the file.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. you can do so at this time. expand Floor Plans. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. 2 Open Level 1 . All room boundaries are phase-specific. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you wish to save this file. expand Views (all).New. You can also see that the room quantities. sizes. you do not need to change the project units to metric. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. therefore. 3 Open Level 1 .Existing. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly.Demo. and new construction. and double-click Level 1 . Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise.rvt.

10 Open Level 1 . 11 On the Design Bar. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.Demo. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 891 .New. 5 Click OK.Existing. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. yet they have different room numbers. Use the following illustration as a guide. In the Phasing dialog. click in each room as you move to the right. 9 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. click Room. click Room. and maximize the view.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. click Room Tag. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 Open Level 1 . notice that there are two phases defined in this project. 6 Open Level 1 .

you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. The two schedule views tile.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. 16 In the Project Browser. and double-click Room Schedule . You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. click Tile. click Close Hidden Windows. In addition. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters.Existing. In this exercise. 20 Close the file.New Construction. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. 19 On the Window menu. View phase-specific room schedules. expand Schedules/Quantities. 892 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. In this case. 17 On the Window menu. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. 18 Open Room Schedule . That is because the same phase is assigned to both views.

or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. Comparison of alternatives on a site. In this tutorial. 893 . You position the building models on the site plan. and manage the links throughout the project. In these situations. performance. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. This maximizes efficiency.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. In the final lesson. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. modify their visibility.

NOTE The center of a Revit MEP model is the center of the model geometry. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. One building model is a condominium. 894 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit MEP 2009 to automatically place it. and the other is a townhouse.Linking Building Models In this lesson. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project.Center to Center: Revit MEP places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. You position the building models on the site. modify their visibility. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . You link two building models to the project.

click Save As.■ Auto . NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. NOTE Revit MEP projects have an internal coordinate system. however. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. Otherwise. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. 2 On the File menu. RELATED See the lesson. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 895 . this option will place the link at a predefined location. this system is not exposed to the user. ■ ■ Manual . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. click Open. click Open. you can do so. select the three files. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. c_Condo_Complex. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. and open Common\c_Site. 5 On the File menu.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. click Close. 4 On the File menu.rvt. in the Model Linking folder that you created. All three files now reside. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 911. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit MEP model. 8 Clear Read-only. and click OK. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. c_Townhouse. and save the file there. Select c_Site. This option is grayed out. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. click Training Files.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit MEP Files. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. Manual . with write permission.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. Auto . right-click. and click Properties. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable.

These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. select Auto .■ Click Open. 10 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 13 Click Open. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. expand Views (all). 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex.Origin to Origin. Notice the blue detail lines. 11 On the File menu. For Positioning. and double-click Level 1. 896 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. Standard move commands work with linked building models. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 897 . click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it.rvt displays in the Type Selector.Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. After you select it. The linked model moves as one object. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. 17 For the move endpoint. the linked file displays within the confines of the